Kayenne XL Panel Kayak HD User Manual, Version 7.0.3

Kayenne XL Package
KAYAK HD DIGITAL PRODUCTION SWITCHER
User Manual
Software Version V703
071870103
AUGUST 2010
Affiliate with the N.V. KEMA in The Netherlands
CERTIFICATE
Certificate Number: 510040.001
The Quality System of:
Thomson Inc, and it’s wordwide Grass Valley division affiliates DBA
GRASS VALLEY
Headquarters 15655 SW Greystone Ct. 10 Presidential Way
400 Providence Mine Rd Beaverton, OR 97006 Suite 300
Nevada City, CA 95959 United States Woburn, MA 01801
United States United States
Kapittelweg 10 7140 Baymeadows Way 2300 So. Decker Lake Blvd.

4827 HG Breda Ste 101 Salt Lake City, UT 84119
The Nederlands Jacksonville, FL 32256 United States
United States
Rue du Clos Courtel 1 rue de l’Hautil Technopole Brest-Iroise
CS 31719 Z.I. des Boutries BP 150 Site de la Pointe du Diable
35517 Cesson-Sevigné Cedex 78702 Conflans-Sainte CS 73808
France Honorine Cedex 29238 Brest Cedex 3
France France
40 Rue de Bray Spinnereistrasse 5 Brunnenweg 9

2 Rue des Landelles CH-5300 Turgi D-64331 Weiterstadt
35510 Cesson Sevigné Switzerland Germany
France
Carl-Benz-Strasse 6-8
67105 Schifferstadt
Germany
Including its implementation, meets the requirements of the standard:
ISO 9001:2008
Scope:
The design, manufacture and support of video and audio hardware and software products and
related systems.
This Certificate is valid until: June 14, 2012

This Certificate is valid as of: June 14, 2009
Certified for the first time: June 14, 2000
H. Pierre Sallé
President
KEMA-Registered Quality
The method of operation for quality certification is defined in the KEMA General Terms
And Conditions For Quality And Environmental Management Systems Certifications.
Integral publication of this certificate is allowed.
KEMA-Registered Quality, Inc. Accredited By:

4377 County Line Road ANAB
Chalfont, PA 18914
Ph: (215)997-4519
Fax: (215)997-3809
CRT 001 073004
Kayenne XL Package
KAYAK HD DIGITAL PRODUCTION SWITCHER
User Manual
Software Version V703
071870103
AUGUST 2010
Contacting Grass Valley
International France United States/Canada
+800 8080 2020 or +33 1 48 25 20 20 +1 800 547 8949 or +1 530 478 4148
Support Centers 24 x 7 24 x 7
Hong Kong, Taiwan, Korea, Macau: +852 2531 3058 Indian Subcontinent: +91 22 24933476
Asia Southeast Asia/Malaysia: +603 7805 3884 Southeast Asia/Singapore: +65 6379 1313
China: +861 0660 159 450 Japan: +81 3 5484 6868
Local Support
Centers Australia and New Zealand: +61 1300 721 495 Central/South America: +55 11 5509 3443
(available Middle East: +971 4 299 64 40 Near East and Africa: +800 8080 2020 or +33 1 48 25 20 20
during normal
business hours) Belarus, Russia, Tadzikistan, Ukraine, Uzbekistan: +7 095 2580924 225 Switzerland: +41 1 487 80 02
S. Europe/Italy-Roma: +39 06 87 20 35 28 -Milan: +39 02 48 41 46 58 S. Europe/Spain: +34 91 512 03 50
Europe
Benelux/Belgium: +32 (0) 2 334 90 30 Benelux/Netherlands: +31 (0) 35 62 38 42 1 N. Europe: +45 45 96 88 70
Germany, Austria, Eastern Europe: +49 6150 104 444 UK, Ireland, Israel: +44 118 923 0499
Copyright © Thomson, Inc. All rights reserved.

This product may be covered by one or more U.S. and foreign patents.
Grass Valley Web Site

The www.grassvalley.com web site offers the following:
Online User Documentation — Current versions of product catalogs, brochures,

data sheets, ordering guides, planning guides, manuals, and release notes
in .pdf format can be downloaded.
FAQ Database — Solutions to problems and troubleshooting efforts can be

found by searching our Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) database.
Software Downloads — Download software updates, drivers, and patches.
4 Kayenne XL Package — User Manual

Contents
Contents
Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Software/Manual Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Standard Documentation Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Other Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Section 1 — System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Kayenne XL Control Panel Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
KHDXL-PNL-100-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
KHDXL-PNL-100-15-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
KHDXL-PNL-200-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
KHDXL-PNL-200-25-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
KHDXL-PNL-200-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
KHDXL-PNL-200-35-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
KHDXL-PNL-300-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
KHDXL-PNL-300-25-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
KHDXL-PNL-300-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
KHDXL-PNL-300-35-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
KHDXL-PNL-400-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
KHDXL-PNL-400-25-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
KHDXL-PNL-400-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
KHDXL-PNL-400-35-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Kayak HD Mainframe Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Kayak HD Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
RamRecorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Supported Control Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Section 2 — Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Kayenne XL Package Configuration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Installation (Engineering Setups) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Config — Application Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Signal Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Inputs and Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Kayenne XL Package HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Source Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Button Assignment (Source to Button Mapping) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Key Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Buses and Crosspoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Shifted Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Source Scalars (HD Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Mix/Effects (M/E) Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Alternate Buses and Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Utility Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Kayenne XL Package — User Manual 5

Contents
Effects Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Kayenne XL Package Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Kayenne XL Package AUX Buses and Output Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Resource Sharing and Point of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Transition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Full Additive Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Additive Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Wipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Other Wipe Pattern Generator Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Preset Black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Fade to Black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Transition Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Flip Flop Background Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Look Ahead Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Current and Next Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Key Priority and Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Half M/E and DSK Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Matte Fill Key Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Shaping Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Key Control Signal Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Clip and Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
High Gain, Low Gain, and Unity Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Clip Hi and Clip Lo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
S-Shaped Key Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Additional Keying Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Key Invert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Opacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Key Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Key Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Coring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Show Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Linear Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Luminance Key and Self Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Chroma Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Primary and Secondary Color Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Flare Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Chroma Key Shadow Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Preset Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Split Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Properly and Improperly Shaped Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Downstream Keyers (Half M/E and DSK Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Flexible Chroma Keyers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3-D Digital Effects Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Definition of Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Translation and Transformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Spin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Contents
Perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Axis Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Source and Target Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Post Transform Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Front and Back, Near and Far . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Transform Numbering Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Screen Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Spin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Skew. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Spin and Rotation Relationship. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Path Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Tension, Continuity, and Bias Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Path Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Vector Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Tension Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Continuity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Bias Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Sure Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Parallel Mode Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Converge Mode Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Comparing Parallel and Converge Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Section 3 — Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Control Panel Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Touch Screen Menu Panel and PC Menu Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Kayenne XL Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Button Color Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Source Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Source Select Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Row Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Shift Level Delegation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Delegation to Aux Bus Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Delegation to Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Delegation to Routers Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Delegation to EMEM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Delegation to eDPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Delegation to Define Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Split Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
FAR Button Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Button and Bus Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Aux Bus Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Aux Bus Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Router Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Transition Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Transition Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Contents
Transition Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Performing Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Preset Black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Transition Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Transition Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Other Transition Control Interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Positioner Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Positioner Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Positioner Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
DPM (Digital Picture Manipulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Key Wipe, Wipe1, Wipe2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Axis Lock Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Local EMEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Panel Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Panel Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
DPM (Digital Picture Manipulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Recalling a Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Enabling and Disabling Direct Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Enabling Direct Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Disabling Direct Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Selecting a Register for Storing / Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Deleting a Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
RamRecorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
EMEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Enabling and Disabling Direct Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Selecting a Register While Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Selecting a Register While Recalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Storing a Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Deleting Snapshots and Timelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Dissolve Functions Depending on Snapshot or Timeline Preselection. . . . 126
Other Button Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Timeline Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Selecting a Register for Record Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Recalling a Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Panel Lock Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Master EMEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Define M/EMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Subgroup for PP, M/E1, M/E2, M/E3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Subgroup for M/Eh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Subgroup Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Subgroup Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Subgroup Ram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Subgroup Misc Int. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Subgroup Misc Ext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Page/Bank Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Half M/E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Feature Set of the Half M/E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Selecting Half M/E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Contents
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Operation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Machine Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Operational Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
External VTR Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Recorder Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
System Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Switched Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Macro Recording / Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Macro Building. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Macro Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Multiple Device Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Temporary Machine Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Machine Delegation Busses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Operational Example: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Prev/Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Cue/Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Timecode Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Multi Function Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Main (Home) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Menu History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Control for M/E Delegation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Key and Wipe Delegations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Auto Delegation (ADel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Joystick and Digipots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Keyer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Key 1...6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Key Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Key Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Chroma Key Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Strategy for Manual Chroma Key Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Automatic Key Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Automatic Chroma Key Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Main Mask Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Main Keyer Store Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Main Keyer Priority Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Pattern Key Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
iDPM (eDPM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
iDPM (eDPM) Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Locate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
iDPM (eDPM) Edit > Crop Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Skew Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
iDPM (eDPM) Edit - SpFX Special Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Misc - Default Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Misc - Priority Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Misc - Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Misc - Load / Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Misc - Use DPM Crosspoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Contents
iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Near - Input Crosspoint Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Near/Key - Input Crosspoint Selection . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Wipe and Key Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Home - Matt (Col Mattes) Selection - BGD (Background Color1) . . . . . . . . 214
Matt (Col Mattes) Selection - ColT (Test Signal Gen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Matt (Col Mattes) Selection - Fill (Key Fill Col) Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Matt (Col Mattes) Selection - Bord (Key Border Col) Key Wipe . . . . . . . . . 218
Matt (Col Mattes) Selection - Trans (Trans Border Col) Main Wipe1 . . . . . 219
Wipe Sel - Wipe Source = Main Wipe1, Mix = Delegated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Wipe Sel - Wipe Source = Main Wipe2, Misc. Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Media Players (MPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Machine Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Ram Recorder - Selecting a Clip or a Still . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Ram Recorder - Mode (Play Mode / Record Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Ram Recorder - Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Ram Recorder - Record Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Ram Recorder - Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Ram Recorder - Bout (Break Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Ram Recorder - Read (Read out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Ram Recorder - Trim (Trim Clip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
External Machines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
External Machines - Selecting a Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
iDPM / eDPM - Selecting an Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Input Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Input (M/E# Keys, Aux, Ram, eDPM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Input (M/E# Crosspoints) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Input (M/E# Keyer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Input (M/E-H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Input (Aux - Non Page Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Input (Aux Safe Title / Center Cross Delegation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Input (Aux Safe Title / Center Cross Modes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Input (Aux Page Mode”Page01”,”Page02”and”Page12”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Input (Aux - RamRecorder Inputs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Input (eDPM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
How to Disable Control Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Disabling single Controls or a Whole Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Section 4 — Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Menu Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Soft Knobs (Digipots) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Navigation Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Navigation Inside the Menu and Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Numeric Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Alphanumeric Keypad, Typewriter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Using a Mouse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Section 5 — Menu Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Menu Structure Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Startup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Selection of the Mainframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Contents
Selection of an Attached Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Manual Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Help Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Status Main Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Selecting the M/E Main Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Enable / Disable the Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
User Definable Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
M/E Mapping Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Install Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Install Main Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Save Installation and Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Install E-Box Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Aux CP Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Tally Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Input Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
GPI Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
GPO Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Extern DVE Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Editor Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Router Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Timing Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
UMD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Machine Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
P-Bus Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Extern Key Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Install Panel Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Fader Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Joystick Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Workplace and Driver Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Fader Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Joystick Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Install System Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
HW Option Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
SW Option Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Temporary Licenses Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Drives Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Devices Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Install Diagnose Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Device Control Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Config Main Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Application Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Copy Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Copy Config Detailed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Config E-Box Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Substitution Tables Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
M/E Couple Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Aux Bus Couple Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Aux Bus Save Title Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
DPM Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Misc Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Contents
Aux CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Tally In Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Input Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
GPI Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
GPO Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Ext. DVE Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Editor Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Router Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Config Panel Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Macro Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Macro Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Assignment Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Brightness Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
PMEM Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Panel Color Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Attached Macros Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Flexible Licenses Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Personality Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Personality Main Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Panel Subpage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Sidepanel Subpage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
M/E Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
M/E Main Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Subpage Keyer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Subpage Misc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Subpage Extern Keyer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
M/E Wipe Trans Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Offset Transi Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Key Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Key Main Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Key Matte Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Keyer Freeze Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Key Mask Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Mask Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Chr Key Main Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Chr Key Suppression Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Keyer Wipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Preset Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Keyer Priority Misc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Wipe Adjust Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Wipe Select Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Color BGD Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Color BGD 1 - 3 Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Test Signal Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Color Correction Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
YUV Input Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
YUV M/E Bus Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
YUV Aux-Bus Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
RGB Input Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
RGB Bus Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
RGB Aux Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Remote Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Remote GPI Out Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Remote P-Bus Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

Contents
Media Player Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

MP Clips Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
RamRecorder Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Memory Size versus Storage Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
RR Status Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
RR Clips Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
RR Stills Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
RamRecorder Transfer Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Transfer Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Single Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Multi Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Transfer from the RamRecorder to the PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Transfer from the PC to the RamRecorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Color Information for Multi Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Realtime Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Backup your Clips/Stills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Restore your Clips/Stills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
RR Image Converter Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Select Destination Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Source Pixel Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Destination Pixel Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Converting Size, Positioning, and Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Untangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
RR Audio Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Audio Play Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Audio Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Split Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Join Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Delay Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
RR Active Area Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Aux / Router Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
AUX / Router Main Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Scaler Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Input Scaler Submenu (MatchDef™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Setting Up Scaler Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Aux Bus Scaler Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Known Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Supported Scalar Conversions (Input and Auxbus Scalar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Aspect Ratio Conversion (Inputs and Auxbus Scalar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
DPM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
iDPM Main Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
iDPM Edit Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
eDPM Main Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
eDPM Edit Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
How to work with eDPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
eDPM Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating a Simple Zoom Effect Using eDPM Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Copying of DPM Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Copy a Channel Within an Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Copying DPM Channels Between Different Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

Contents
Copy Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

Transfer All Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
DVE Extern Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
EMEM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
EMEM Select Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
EMEM Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Function Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Selecting of the Modify All mode: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Object Overview and Parameter Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
EMEM Define Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Section 6 — Stand-Alone Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

Macro Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Main Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Main Dialog, Left Part - Offline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Main Dialog, Left Part - Online. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Main Dialog, Right Part - Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Creating, Modifying, Updating, Deleting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Create a New Command 'Classic' Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Modify an Existing Command 'Classic' Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Create a New Command 'Kayenne XL' Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Modify an Existing Command 'Kayenne XL' Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Create New Multiple Commands 'Kayenne XL' Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Update Parameters of Macro Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Image Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Select Destination Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Output File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Converting in AVI Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Source Pixel Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Destination Pixel Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Converting Size, Positioning, and Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Untangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

Preface
About This Manual
This Kayenne XL Package User Manual is designed as a reference manual
for operators of Kayenne XL Packages, which include the Kayenne XL
control panel and the Kayak HD video processor frame.
Software/Manual Version
• Kayenne XL / Kayak HD Software Release V703
• Kayenne XL / Kayak HD User Manual Version V703.xx
Standard Documentation Set

The standard Kayenne XL Package documentation set consists of:
• Kayenne XL Package User Manual (Control Panel)
• Kayenne XL Package Installation and Service Manual (Control Panel)
• Release Notes
The User Manual contains background information about the Kayenne XL

Package and describes operating procedures. This manual can be used
while learning about the Kayenne XL Package and for enhancing your
basic knowledge of the system.
The Installation and Service Manual contains information about installing,

configuring, and maintaining the Kayak HD mainframe and the control
panels.
The Release Notes contain information about new features and system
enhancements for a specific software version, and also include software
installation procedures. Always check the Release Notes for your current
system software before you begin operating your system.

Preface
Other Documentation
Communication protocols of Kayak HD Package are available upon
request for developers and software engineers to use to design editor and
other external interfaces to the Kayenne XL Package.

Section 1
System Overview
Introduction
The Grass Valley Kayenne XL Package is an affordable, compact, and flex-
ible digital production switcher system that offers an array of high-end fea-
tures for everything from live studio and mobile production to small
corporate studios and editing applications. The Kayenne XL Package lever-
ages many of the features found in the Grass Valley Kayak™ switchers. The
result is a compact system with superior image quality and features not
found in any other product.
Kayenne XL Control Panel Models
KHDXL-PNL-100-15
1 M/E Kayenne XL panel with Kayak keycap legends, with 15 button
source selectors, Panel Control Unit with rendundant power, menu panel,
1 license (KAYN-LIC-PNL-ME), manual set and cables (pick 7.5 meter or 15
meter). Includes one 15 button source select module (KAYN-PNL-SRC-15),
one Local E-MEM module (KAYN-PNL-LEM), one Master E-MEM module
(KAYN-PNL-MEM), one Transition Module (KAYN-PNL-TRM), one
Multi-function module (KAYN-PNL-MFM), and the System Bar. There are
no option slots available in the panel trays included.
KHDXL-PNL-100-15-A
Additional 1 M/E Kayenne XL panel with Kayak keycap legends, with 15
button source selectors, 1 license (KAYN-LIC-PNL-ME), manual set and
cables (pick 7.5 meter or 15 meter). Includes one 15 button source select
module (KAYN-PNL-SRC-15), one Local E-MEM module (KAYN-PNL-
LEM), one Master E-MEM module (KAYN-PNL-MEM), one Transition
Module (KAYN-PNL-TRM), one Multi-function module (KAYN-PNL-
MFM), and the System Bar. There are no option slots available in the panel
trays included. Does not include menu panel or Panel Control Unit.

Section 1 — System Overview
KHDXL-PNL-200-25
2 licenses (KAYN-LIC-PNL-ME), manual set and cables (pick 7.5 meter or
15 meter). Includes two 25 button source select modules (KAYN-PNL-SRC-
25), one 25 button local aux panel (KAYN-PNL-AUX-25), two Local E-MEM
modules (KAYN-PNL-LEM), one Master E-MEM module (KAYN-PNL-
MEM), two Transition modules (KAYN-PNL-TRM), one Multi-function
module (KAYN-PNL-MFM), and the System Bar. There are no option slots
available in the panel trays.
KHDXL-PNL-200-25-A
button source selectors, 2 licenses (KAYN-LIC-PNL-ME), manual set and
cables (pick 7.5 meter or 15 meter). Includes two 25 button source select
modules (KAYN-PNL-SRC-25), one 25 button local aux panel (KAYN-PNL-
AUX-25), two Local E-MEM modules (KAYN-PNL-LEM), one Master E-
MEM module (KAYN-PNL-MEM), two Transition modules (KAYN-PNL-
TRM), one Multi-function module (KAYN-PNL-MFM), and the System Bar.
There no option slots available in the panel trays. Does not include menu
panel or Panel Control Unit.
KHDXL-PNL-200-35
2 licenses (KAYN-LIC-PNL-ME), manual set and cables (pick 7.5 meter or
15 meter). Includes two 35 button source select modules (KAYN-PNL-SRC-
35), one 35 button local aux panel (KAYN-PNL-AUX-35), two Local E-MEM
modules (KAYN-PNL-LEM), one Master E-MEM module (KAYN-PNL-
MEM), two Transition modules (KAYN-PNL-TRM), one Multi-function
module (KAYN-PNL-MFM), and the System Bar. There are no option slots
available in the panel trays.
KHDXL-PNL-200-35-A
button source selectors, with 2 licenses (KAYN-LIC-PNL-ME), manual set
and cables (pick 7.5 meter or 15 meter). Includes two 35 button source select
AUX-35), two Local E-MEM modules (KAYN-PNL-LEM), one Master E-
MEM module (KAYN-PNL-MEM), two Transition modules (KAYN-PNL-
There are no option slots available in the panel trays. Does not include
menu panel or Panel Control Unit.

Introduction
KHDXL-PNL-300-25
source selectors, Panel Control Unit with rendundant power, menu, 3
licenses (KAYN-LIC-PNL-ME), manual set and cables (pick 7.5 meter or 15
meter). Includes three 25 button source select modules (KAYN-PNL-SRC-
25), one 25 button local aux panel (KAYN-PNL-AUX-25), three Local E-
MEM modules (KAYN-PNL-LEM), one Master E-MEM module (KAYN-
PNL-MEM), three Transition modules (KAYN-PNL-TRM), one Multi-func-
tion module (KAYN-PNL-MFM), and the System Bar. There is one option
slot available in the panel trays.
KHDXL-PNL-300-25-A
cables (pick 7.5 meter or 15 meter). Includes three 25 button source select
AUX-25), three Local E-MEM modules (KAYN-PNL-LEM), one Master E-
MEM module (KAYN-PNL-MEM), three Transition modules (KAYN-PNL-
There is one option slot available in the panel trays. Does not include menu
KHDXL-PNL-300-35
meter). Includes three 35 button source select modules (KAYN-PNL-SRC-
35), one 35 button local aux panel (KAYN-PNL-AUX-35), three Local E-
PNL-MEM), three Transition modules (KAYN-PNL-TRM), one Multi-func-
tion module (KAYN-PNL-MFM), and the System Bar. There is one option
slot available in the panel trays.
KHDXL-PNL-300-35-A
cables (pick 7.5 meter or 15 meter). Includes three 35 button source select
AUX-35), three Local E-MEM modules (KAYN-PNL-LEM), one Master E-
MEM module (KAYN-PNL-MEM), three Transition modules (KAYN-PNL-
There is one option slot available in the panel trays. Does not include menu

KHDXL-PNL-400-25
meter). Includes four 25 button source select modules (KAYN-PNL-SRC-
25), one 25 button local aux panel (KAYN-PNL-AUX-25), four Local E-
PNL-MEM), four Transition modules (KAYN-PNL-TRM), one Multi-func-
tion module (KAYN-PNL-MFM), and the System Bar. There are two option
slots available in the panel trays.
KHDXL-PNL-400-25-A
cables (pick 7.5 meter or 15 meter). Includes four 25 button source select
AUX-25), four Local E-MEM modules (KAYN-PNL-LEM), one Master E-
MEM module (KAYN-PNL-MEM), four Transition modules (KAYN-PNL-
There are two option slots available in the panel trays. Does not include
KHDXL-PNL-400-35
meter). Includes four 35 button source select modules (KAYN-PNL-SRC-
35), one 35 button local aux panel (KAYN-PNL-AUX-35), four Local E-
PNL-MEM), four Transition modules (KAYN-PNL-TRM), one Multi-func-
tion module (KAYN-PNL-MFM), and the System Bar. There are two option
slots available in the panel trays.
KHDXL-PNL-400-35-A
cables (pick 7.5 meter or 15 meter). Includes four 35 button source select
AUX-35), four Local E-MEM modules (KAYN-PNL-LEM), one Master E-
MEM module (KAYN-PNL-MEM), four Transition modules (KAYN-PNL-
There are two option slots available in the panel trays. Does not include

Introduction
Kayak HD Mainframe Standard Features

• Switchable between several HD formats
• Supports SD production
• Fully digital 10-bit, 4:2:2 inputs, outputs
• Compact 4 RU and 8 RU lightweight frames
• Low power consumption
• Hot swappable, front removable modules and power supplies
• Intuitive menu with touch screen
• One DPM Channel standard per M/E with planar 3D effects, remaining
channels optional, adding non-linear and lighting effects (Software
License Key (SLK)
• 2 high-quality chroma keyers standard
• Number of M/Es:
• 1 for Kayak HD 100C
• 1.5 for Kayak HD 150C
• 2 for Kayak HD 200, 200C
• 2.5 for Kayak HD 250, 250C
• 3 for Kayak HD 300
• 3.5 for Kayak HD 350
• 4 for Kayak HD 400
• 4.5 for Kayak HD 450
Note 0.5 M/E (that is, half an M/E) includes cuts and mixes, no wipes or iDPM, with
simple linear/luminance keyers and no chroma keys.

• Number of inputs:
• 24 to 48 for Kayak HD 100C, 150C
• 48 for Kayak HD 200C, 250C
• 48 to 96 for Kayak HD 200, 250
• 72 to 96 for Kayak HD 300, 350
• 96 for Kayak HD 400, 450
• Number of outputs:
• 24 to 48 for Kayak HD 200, 250
• 36 to 48 for Kayak HD 300, 350
• 48 for Kayak HD 400, 450
• Video outputs programmable as M/E, Program or AUX bus outputs
• GPI (General Purpose Interface) inputs:
• 16 to 32 for Kayak HD 200, 250
• 24 to 32 for Kayak HD 300, 350
• 32 for Kayak HD 400, 450
• GPI/Tally Outputs:
• 64 to 128 for Kayak HD 200, 250
• 96 to 128 for Kayak HD 300, 350
• 128 for Kayak HD 400, 450
• Four full-function keyers per full M/E, each with linear and luminance
keying
• Five background generators include black, white, and three color back-
grounds
• Test pattern generator
• Two analog reference inputs (tri-level sync and black burst) and
HD/SD serial digital input reference
• White or colored pushbutton keycaps (factory installed, choose when
ordering)

Introduction
• Freeze frame buffer on every full-function keyer

• Two main wipe generators and four keyer wipe generators per M/E
• YUV color correction on every keyer and background bus
• Internal four-port Gigabit Ethernet (10/100/1000 base T) switch
• Eight serial ports for external machine control

Kayak HD Options
• Internal six-channel RamRecorder option for video clips and stills
• Three additional iDPMs with 2D transforms and crops on keyers 2, 3,
and 4 per M/E
• DPM Kurl per M/E. Adds Kurl effects to all of the enabled DPMs in one
M/E. Includes Page Turn, Page Roll, Spheres, Ripples, Splits, Mirrors,
and Slits
• DPM Spektra Lighting, Defocus, Glow, and Output Recursives. Adds
Spektra effects to all of the enabled DPMs in one M/E.
• Four channels of eDPM with 2D transforms and crops that re-enter on
any M/E
• Kurl for eDPM
• Spektra for eDPM
• RGB color correction option on every keyer and background bus, or per
input
• Dual Chromatte™ chroma keyers, with flexible licenses allowing
assignment of Chroma keys to different keyers
• Remote monitoring and diagnostic support via NetCentral software
• KHD-PSU internal redundant power supply unit
• KDD-PSU rack-mounted remote power supply unit for remote (or
additional) control panels
• MatchDef™ Dual Video Source Scalar for converting 2 SD or HD
sources to the production format, maximum of four for up to eight
sources in the 4RU models, up to 16 sources in the 8RU models. One
Mix/Effects or IOXPAND option required for every four sources.
Scalars accept either HD or SD input and act as a frame-sync when not
converting or being bypassed.
• DSK (Downstream Keyer)/ Half M/E option for full M/E systems
(SLK)
• Adds four DSKs for up to 20 keyers for 4.5 M/Es in the 8RU frame
• Adds four DSKs for up to 12 keyers in the 4RU frame
• Or Half M/E Mode with A/B background mix and four Lin/Lum
keyers
• I/O Expander Module adds 24 SDI inputs, 12 SDI outputs, 8 GPI
inputs, 32 GPI outputs/tallies, and optionally 4 MatchDef™ scalar
inputs. Fits in any available M/E slot.
• Full M/E Upgrade Option. Adds one Mix/Effects module to any
Kayak HD chassis. Order one or more options to get the total M/Es
required. The 4RU chassis holds up to two M/E modules and/or I/O
Expander modules. One M/E upgrade option can be added to a Kayak

Introduction
HD 1-M/E or 1.5-M/E system if it does not also have an I/O Expander

module. The 8RU chassis holds up to four M/E modules and/or I/O
Expander modules. One or two upgrade options can be added to a
Kayak HD or SD 2-M/E system, less any I/O Expander modules in the
chassis.
• Upgrade Kit for minor modifications of XtenDD panels to enable
control of a Kayak HD/SD video processor frame.
RamRecorder
The HD RamRecorder is a solid state video server with six input/output
channels. All stills and clips are stored within a common data pool and may
be accessed by all six output channels. The HD RamRecorder supports
video standards: 525, 625, 720, and 1080i.
Note To use the RamRecorder, a new 6910000xx or 7710060xx Controller Board

in the Mainframe is required. The new 6910000xx or 7710060xx Controller
Board does not support software earlier than 6.8.8.
Total HD RamRecorder storage size is based on line rate units and the
installed memory size of 4 GB or 8 GB, as shown in the following table.
Table 1. HD RamRecorder Storage Sizes

4GB 8GB
Line Rate Units Frames Seconds Frames Seconds
525i59.9 4911 163 9822 326
625i50 4161 165 8336 332
1080i50/sf25 863 33 1726 68
1080i60/59.9/sf30/29.9 863 28 1726 57
1080sf24/23.9 863 35 1726 71
720p50 1941 38 3883 77
720p60/59.9 1941 32 3883 64

Supported Control Protocols

• VTRs (BVW-75)
• AMP (Advanced Media Protocol). For Profile PVS, XP, K2, M Series,
and Turbo DDRs. RS422 Serial supported
• Video servers (Louth VDCP, Odetics)
• Routers/Routing Control Systems (Trinix™, Venus™, Triton™, and
third party routers; Jupiter™ and Encore™ router control systems)
• Control Systems (Grass Valley Andromeda™ and third-party systems)
• Grass Valley Under Monitor Displays (Serial tally for UMD. Requires
Grass Valley Andromeda™ system or third-part tally box such as Tally
Display Corp. or Image Video.)
• Grass Valley external Remote AUX Panels (CP-300 Series)
• ESAM II for audio-follow-video applications
• Edit controllers (native and Grass Valley Model 100 and 200 or DD35)

Section 2
Concepts
Introduction
In general, any video switcher receives multiple video inputs, performs
signal processing on selected input signals, and then outputs the processed
video. Efficient real time switcher operation is essential for live production,
and can save valuable time in post production environments as well.
Several innovative concepts are employed in the Kayenne XL Package to

enhance its operational speed and flexibility. Understanding these con-
cepts, as well as basic switcher fundamentals, will help you take full advan-
tage of the exceptional power of the Kayenne XL Package.
Kayenne XL Package Configuration Overview

The Kayenne XL Package is designed for operational flexibility, and can be
configured to fit various applications. Different systems can have different
capabilities, or the same Kayenne XL Package can be re-configured to have
different capabilities at different times.
The way a Kayenne XL Package is wired into your facility affects the digital
production switcher’s capabilities. For example, the number of sources
physically connected to the system obviously determines what video the
system can handle. However, because Kayenne XL Package video/key
inputs and AUX Bus outputs can be configured, once video cables are phys-
ically connected they need not be moved. Configuration settings also
control many other capabilities that affect Kayenne XL Package behavior.
Kayenne XL Package configuration information is divided into three areas:

• Installation (Engineering Setups) (settings established by the engineer
in charge that affect the entire system, which never need to be changed
by operators),
• Configuration Settings (for example, a production that affect all the
operators working in that suite, that are designed to suit a particular
show or production style and ensure a consistent working environ-
ment), and

Section 2 — Concepts
• Personality Setting (settings that give the operator the ability to cus-
tomize his individual work surface to meet his personal preferences).
All Kayenne XL Package settings are non-volatile. Disk save and load oper-
ations are available via the display menu (Sidepanel) that enable users to
store configuration information on the hard disk of a PC or on a movable
media for easy transport and for use as backup copies.
Installation (Engineering Setups)

Engineering Setups control how the Kayak HD Digital Production
Switcher’s major components behave and interact, and how the Kayenne
XL Package interacts with the rest of the facility.
Engineering Setups are not likely to change on a daily basis and so are
grouped separately from Configurations and Personality Settings. Facility
maintenance personnel or the engineer in charge of a production truck gen-
erally manages Engineering Setups. These parameters are usually set
during installation.
Engineering Setups information includes:

• Networking (IP addresses),
• Timing, type of reference signal
• External device interfaces (DDRs, VTRs, DPM, Router, AUX Control
Panels, etc.),
• Various other system functions
Config — Application Control

The configuration defines how the control surfaces associated with a
Kayenne XL Package suite behave. A configuration can substantially
change system behavior, not just a user’s view of the system. The configu-
ration is saved in applications and is intended for day-to-day or session-to-
session changes in system operating behavior. Applications are open for
modification by operators.
Loading and Storing applications can be performed using the control panel
or side panel operation menu (Config).
Config Applications include:

• EMEM
• Macros
• Key Memory
• Pattern Memory

Installation (Engineering Setups)
• Safe title behavior

• Video specifications (such as aspect ratio)
• Various other suite functions
Personal Settings
Personal Settings enable users to customize a Kayenne XL Package control
surface to suit their personal operational style. User Preferences do not
change Kayenne XL Package capabilities. Loading and Storing Personal
Settings is possible via the Sidepanel Program
Personal Settings include:

• Menu delegation behavior,
• Shift preferences
• Various other user functions.
General Rule:
• All setup changes, which will not work without a physical change of a
device, are part of Installation (menu).
• All setup changes, which will work without a physical change of a
device, are part of Configuration (menu).
Setting up the type, the address, and the connection port for an auxiliary
control panel is part of Installation. Configuring the behavior and the
button assignment of this AUX CP is part of a configuration.

Signal Routing
Inputs and Sources
Kayenne XL Package HD
Incoming video signals are connected to the digtal video processor system
via BNC connectors on the rear of the digital video processor frame. All
inputs are serial digital (SMPTE 274M, SMPTE 296M, SMPTE RP211).
Signals from external devices not operating in this standard will need to be
converted.
Some devices (for example, a camera providing serial digital output) may
provide a video signal that can be received on a single connector. However,
other devices may output multiple signals.
For example, a character generator usually provides a signal with two com-
ponents (commonly called video and key). Some incoming signals may also
originate from devices the Kayak HD system can control (Router, DPM,
DDR).
For a Kayak HD Digital Production Switcher, the term source refers to all the
video signals and other attributes associated with a device. This is a funda-
mental concept. The Kayenne XL Package is based on sources, not input
signals or crosspoints. Each source can be given a descriptive name, but has
an ID Number for absolute identification. The system uses ID numbers, not
source names or input connectors, to identify each source. Defining each
source is an important aspect of the Kayak HD system.
Source Definition
The source definition process includes assigning a name to each input
source. Once sources are defined, you can then select the source by name in
the control panel menu. Sources that use separate video and key signals are
coupled in the Input menu to enable a single button to select the video-key
pair from the switcher control panel. Tally relays can be assigned to the cor-
responding inputs in the Config - GPO/Tally menu. All these settings are part
of a configuration and may change from production to production.
Button Assignment (Source to Button Mapping)

Source to button mapping makes it possible to organize sources on
Kayenne XL Package control panels to suit your personal preferences. For
example, cameras can be grouped into a set of buttons on the left side or the
right side of a button row, or in any way that is desired or convenient.

Signal Routing
Source mapping is distinct from source definition, as source mapping only

involves the location of sources on the control panel and does not affect the
inputs or names defined for the sources.
Note EMEM effects store Source IDs, not the source select buttons, so remapping
sources does not change the appearance of recalled effects.
You can also assign sources to buttons using the Sidepanel program.
Key Memory
Key parameters can be saved to a separate key memory for every Kayak
HD system source. These parameters can be applied automatically when-
ever that source is selected.
Buses and Crosspoints

A bus is technically defined as a signal path where one of several available
inputs can be selected to feed a single output. A crosspoint is an electronic
switch that enable a signal to pass when the switch is closed. On video
switchers, a bus can be constructed containing a series of crosspoints,
which permits selecting which one of several incoming signals will be sent
out the bus. In Figure 1 on page 31, source 2 has been selected on the back-
ground A bus. This signal can now be called background video and is avail-
able for further processing.
Figure 1. Buses with Crosspoints
8447_01r0
Buttons on a control panel can be used to control the switching of cross-

points. The buttons are usually arranged horizontally, making it easy to
imagine the available signals coming in from the top, and the single bus
output signal going out the right side. In earlier generation switchers, the
terms crosspoint button and crosspoint bus have been used in reference to
control panel source selection.
For a Kayak HD system, the terms source button and source bus will be used.

These terms better reflect a system operating philosophy that is source

rather than crosspoint based.
The Kayak HD system does not directly associate a source select button
with a physical crosspoint. The association goes first through source to
button mapping, then through source definition to find the physical inputs.
A single source button can control crosspoints on different buses simulta-

neously. For example, during keying, both the video and key signals of a
source can be selected with a single button press.
In this case two different crosspoints on separate buses (key fill bus and key
cut bus) are actually switched when the button is pressed.
In the upper part of Figure 2 below, the video component of source 2 in the
figure has been selected on the key fill bus and becomes the key fill signal
for subsequent keying. The key component of source 2 selected on the key
cut bus becomes the key cut signal for keying. The lower part of Figure 2
below shows how the same source (source 4) can be selected for both the
key fill and key cut signals.
Figure 2. Multiple Crosspoint Control
8324_07_r1
Shifted Sources
An operator may need to quickly access many sources during a production.
However, a control panel has size limitations, since all the source selection
buttons must remain within reach. The Kayenne XL control panel provides
shifted buttons to enable access to more input sources from the control
panel.
For example, on the Kayenne XL Package 400 system, up to 35 sources can

be mapped at one time, 14 to the unshifted source selection, and 14 to the

Signal Routing
shifted buttons. A dedicated Shift button is provided as the farthest right

crosspoint button (Crosspoint 15) for every bus. Two shift modes are avail-
able: Normal and Latched.
• In Normal mode, shifted or unshifted status of the bus is indicated by
the state of the Shift button light. Holding down the Shift button while
pressing a source button always selects the shifted source for that bus.
The Shift button will light when the buttons of the row to its left are
shifted.
• In Latched mode, the Shift button toggles on and off in a manner similar
to the Caps Lock button on a standard keyboard. When on, it lights to
indicate that the subsequent selection(s) on the crosspoint selector row
will be made from the shifted set of sources (15 through 28). When off,
the subsequent selection(s) come from the unshifted set (1 through 14).
If the user toggles the Shift button to the state that is opposite from the
shift state for the currently selected input, then the crosspoint selector
button blinks to indicate this “out of sync” condition.
A useful configuration is to have sources normally used for backgrounds

(for example, VTRs) mapped to unshifted buttons, and sources normally
used as keys (for example, character generators) mapped to shifted but-
tons. Then you can then set all the background buses to an unshifted pref-
erence, and all the key buses to a shifted preference. All normal source
selections can then be made without having to use the shift modifier but-
tons.
It is also possible to have a different assignment for background and key

buses.
Source Scalars (HD Only)

Each Mix Effects (M/E) has 4 scalars that can be used for scaling video
sources of the same frame rate but different resolutions than the video
being processed.
The scalars are software enabled options. Two scalars are enabled on one
option, up to 2 options per M/E maximum. The scalars are fixed to a spe-
cific M/E.

Mix/Effects (M/E) Stage

Each M/E of the Kayak HD system can create a composite of two or more
pictures. It includes multiple source selection buses and provides transition
(mix and wipe) and keying capabilities on the selected signals.
The M/E can be organized with the keying circuitry separate from the
mixing circuitry, which permits Effect Send capabilities (see Effects Send on
page 35 for more information).
A simple basic M/E used in a typical switcher will be used as an example

in the following discussion. The Kayenne XL Package M/E has added
capabilities, but the basic principles described here will apply.
Figure 3. Simplified Mix Effects (M/E) Subsystem

Source Signal Inputs
Wipe
Generator
Key Fill M/E

Key Cut Keyer Outputs
Crosspoint M/E Program
Mixer
061_00_22_r1
Matrix M/E Preview
Background A
Background B
The basic M/E shown in Figure 3 on page 34 has an A and a B background

bus. These buses select the background video signals sent to the output of
the M/E.
Generally the source on the background A bus is the current background

output, and the source on the background B bus is the background video
that will be used next. During most transitions, portions of both back-
grounds are output simultaneously. The keyers in the M/E enable the
inclusion of additional material over the background. Wipe generators also
exist, which create patterns used by the mixer for wipe transitions, or used
by the keyers to modify the signals it sends to the mixer.
The processed signal in an M/E is then sent to an M/E output, typically

program or preview (or can be selected as input in the second M/E).
Alternate Buses and Delegation

Many earlier generation switchers had M/Es equipped with two keyers,
and each M/E could accept two background sources. This permitted
mixing or wiping between two backgrounds, and keying up to two addi-
tional sources over the background. Dedicated rows of control panel
buttons were used to select these key and background signals.
The Kayak HD system M/E actually has four keyers, each handling a fill
and a key signal, and it can accept three background sources (A, B, and

Mix/Effects (M/E) Stage
Utility). Providing individual source selection rows for each bus is imprac-
tical, as the panel would become too large. For ease of use, Kayenne XL
Package panels have alternate buses accessed by delegation, using Key and
PVW/AUX delegation via the Miscellaneous Bus selection subpanels.
Utility Bus
Besides the standard A and B background inputs, each Kayenne XL
Package also accepts two Utility inputs. The Utility buses can be used to
select signals for special purposes, and have no relation to the background
buses. For example, a video signal selected on the Utility bus can be used
to feed a custom pattern into a wipe generator, or create a custom border
wash pattern.
Effects Send
Effects Send provides a method of integrating digital effects devices into
the M/E. Effects Send switches the key cut and key fill outputs of the keyer
of the M/E to a digital effects device for manipulation. The manipulated
key cut and key fill outputs are then received and sent directly to the inputs
of the mixer circuits of the M/E. Effects Send enable you to process a key
effect as though the digital effects circuits were located inside the M/E
itself.
On the Kayak HD system, Effects Send is integrated into the M/E and is an
extension of the keying control system.
Figure 4. Effects Send Diagram
Digital
Source Signal Inputs Effects
System
Source Keyer M/E

Selection Mixer Outputs
Buses
0618_00_24
M/E
If the system is equipped with the optional Digital Picture Manipulator

option, the effects become part of the internal M/E’s mixer.

Kayenne XL Package Outputs

Video production switchers generate several different video outputs (such
as Program, Preview, AUX buses, and others). A final program output
(Main or DSK) is typically sent to the transmitter for broadcast and/or to
output devices for recording.
AUX Bus outputs may also be used for special purposes.
Kayenne XL Package AUX Buses and Output Assignments

Kayenne XL Package switchers provide 12 outputs per M/E. This means
you can have up to 24 outputs in the compact frame and up to 48 in the
large frame. For installed M/E boards the rear BNC outputs are active.
Any internal source can be assigned to these AUX bus outputs for moni-
toring. Safe Title can also be enabled on any of these AUX buses.
Resource Sharing and Point of Use

The Kayak HD system can share some resources for use at different loca-
tions. The location where a resource is being used is called a point of use.
The wipe pattern generator resources can be used for an M/E wipe transi-
tion, as a preset pattern, as a mask, or at other points of use. It is also pos-
sible to assign the output of the same wipe pattern generator to different
points of use at the same time.
For efficient operation, the Kayak HD system has divided the parameters
controlling wipe pattern generators and related utility bus functions into
two categories: shared generator parameters and point of use parameters.
The set of parameters for the shared generator are used by all points of use,
so changing one of these parameters will affect all locations where that
wipe pattern generator is being used at that time. Separate sets of point of
use parameters, however, are maintained for each system point of use.
These settings are used only by each individual point of use, so changing
them will not affect any other point of use.
For example, a wipe shape (box, circle, etc.) is a generator parameter, but
the softness of the shape’s edges is a point of use parameter. If the same
wipe generator is used by both an M/E wipe transition and a preset pat-
tern, adjusting softness at one point of use will not affect the other’s soft-
ness settings. However, changing the pattern shape affects both locations.

Transition
Transition
A transition is a change from one image to another. The Kayak HD system
supports three basic types of transitions:
• Cut
• Mix
• Wipe
• DPM (optional)
A transition can be applied to the entire picture, or to only the background

or keyed elements of the picture, and can include multiple elements.
Cut
A cut is an instantaneous switch from one image to another (between suc-
cessive video fields or frames). The simplest type is a hot cut, accomplished
by selecting a different source on a bus feeding an M/E output. This only
changes that bus’s contribution to the output, and does not change what
elements may be involved in the output (the same buses are involved).
The system also provides cut transitions, where the elements involved in a
composite can be changed instantaneously. Different buses can be included
or excluded, causing changes in the resulting composite image. Back-
ground cut transitions on the M/E are first selected on the Background B
bus to enable previewing the upcoming picture before it is cut On Air.
Mix
A mix is a transition from one picture to another where the new picture
fades in as the existing picture fades out. During a standard mix transition
a superimposition of both pictures, each at a lower intensity, is visible.
The Kayak HD system enables mixing from one background to another and
to mix up to four separate keys on or off over a background. Background
and key mixes can be done separately or simultaneously.
Full Additive Mix

Full Additive Mix (FAM) is a special mix transition that the Kayak HD
system supports besides normal crossfade transitions. Picture elements in
FAM transitions are composited differently through the time of the transi-
tion.

Figure 5. Normal and FAM Mixes
8447_05r0
FAM transitions first fade a new picture to full intensity and then fade the
old picture out, but both full intensity pictures are mixed together to the
output during the transition. The resulting signal is clipped at white level
to prevent generating illegal video.

Additive Transition
Additive Transition
As of software version V694, Kayenne XL Package features the Additive
Transition mode.
Additive Transition (ADD) is a special mix transition that Kayenne XL

Package supports besides normal crossfade transitions. Picture elements in
Additive Transitions are composited differently through the time of the
transition.
Figure 6. Normal and ADD Mixes
ADD
Additive transitions first fade a new picture to full intensity and then fade
the old picture out, but both full intensity pictures are mixed together to the
output during the transition. The resulting signal is clipped at white level
to prevent generating illegal video.
Additive transitions can be selected either with the ADD button in the Tran-
sition modules of the control panel or the ADD button in the side panel's M/E
Main menu.
Wipes
A wipe is a transition from one picture to another in which the edge of a
shape moves across the screen, revealing the new picture. Wipe transitions
can be applied to backgrounds, to keys, or to both simultaneously. A wipe
transition shape can be selected from a variety of patterns, and these pat-
terns can be adjusted in several ways (position, aspect ratios, edge attri-
butes, etc.).
Each Kayenne XL Package M/E has two separate transition wipe systems,
each of which can be assigned a different wipe pattern and be adjusted
independently. These systems can each use one of the two available
complex wipe pattern generators with advanced capabilities. It is also pos-
sible to combine these wipes to create extremely complicated wipe transi-
tion shapes, and generally this is used only by advanced operators. Utility

bus video signals can also be used to generate a custom pattern for a wipe
transition or other purposes.
Other Wipe Pattern Generator Uses

Wipe pattern generator circuitry can be used for purposes that do not
involve transitions. Each Kayenne XL Package M/E has the two complex
wipe pattern generators described above, and each of its four Keyers also
has a simple pattern generator and a box pattern generator, making a total
of six wipe generators. These pattern generators can also be used for Preset
Pattern, Masking, and Matte Washes.
Preset Black
Preset Black is a special type of transition, where the picture transitions to
black, and then transitions out of black to the new picture. Preset Black is
really two transitions, one to and one from black, and so requires two oper-
ator commands to complete. Preset Black can be used with any transition
type (cut, mix, or wipe). The entire picture goes to black, even if all the tran-
sition elements involved in the picture were not selected.
Fade to Black
The Fade to Black control in the DSK enable the Program output of the
switcher to be brought down to black at a predetermined transition rate.
Transition Rate
Cut transitions are instantaneous, but mix and wipe transitions have dura-
tions.
Transition durations can be set in advance to a specific transition rate, and

be initiated by pressing a button on the control panel. It is also possible to
manually control transitions using a lever arm.
On the Kayak HD system, one transition rate can be assigned to the main
transition of the M/E. This type of transition can be controlled by that
M/E’s lever arm. Each of the four keyers on the M/E can also be assigned
its own transition rate, initiated with a separate Key Mix button.
Flip Flop Background Buses

At the completion of a transition, the background buses swap their source
selections (flip-flop). This makes the upper bus always act as the on-air bus,
and the lower bus act as a preset bus. The operator can reliably setup the

Additive Transition
next source on the lower bus without disturbing the source selected on the
on-air upper bus.
For example, if a transition begins with source 1 on Background A and goes

to source 2 on Background B, as soon at the transition to source 2 completes,
source 2 will be taken to the Background A bus (without disturbing the
output of the M/E). The source 1 selection will also be immediately taken
to the Background B bus.
Look Ahead Preview

If a preview monitor is configured for Look Ahead Preview mode, the end
result of the upcoming transition can be viewed on that monitor. This lets
the operator know in advance what will occur for that next transition.
Current and Next Stack

Kayenne XL Package uses a current and next stack approach for transitions
that involve multiple elements. The current stack is the current M/E output
including any keys that are on. The next stack is defined by the current
stack and whatever next transition elements have been selected. Look
ahead preview always displays the next stack. Next transition elements
affecting stacks are Keys 1 - 4, background, and key priority.
Transitions always occur from the current stack to the next stack.
For example, if the current stack has Key 1 over Background A, and the next
stack specifies Key 2 over Background B, a mix transition will occur
between the composites (Key 1 over A to Key 2 over B). This is different
from mixing Key 1 off, Key 2 on, and mixing between A and B at the same
time, which would cause the keys to go transparent over their background
during the transition.
On the Kayak HD system, opacity is retained throughout the transition, so

midway through this example Key 1 remains fully keyed over Background
A, and Key 2 is fully keyed over Background B. The transition occurs
between these two fully keyed composites.
If multiple keys are faded in or out using the separate Mix button each keyer
has it is opacity changed with relation to all other keys. This means that
keyer transitioned this way are no longer considered part of the composite
and will show transparency.
Key Priority and Transitions

The four keyers on a Kayenne XL Package M/E can be assigned priorities.
This determines the layering of the keys. The highest priority key appears
on top, while keyers with lower priority may be partially or fully hidden

behind those with higher key priorities. The backgrounds always have the
lowest priority. Changes in key priority can be included as a part of a tran-
sition.
Like any other transition, the current stack will transition to the key priority
of the next stack. For example, suppose the current stack has Keys 1, 2, and
3 in that key priority order over Background A, and the next stack specifies
key priority order 3, 2, 1. A mix transition will occur between the 1, 2, 3
composite order to the 3, 2, 1 composite order. All three keys will remain
fully keyed over the background, and will mix to their new key priority
order.
Half M/E and DSK Option

The Half M/E and DSK option is available to add an additional M/E with
cuts and mixes on backgrounds and keyers. The output of this Half M/E
can be re-entered into any other M/E, and/or be assigned to an Aux
output. The Half M/E is controlled by delegating any switcher bank with
a single button press.
DSK capability that adds four extra keyers is also included with this option.
Half M/E and DSK functionality cannot be used simultaneously, however.

Keying
Keying
Keying inserts part of one picture into another to create a composite pic-
ture.
Keying involves three signals:
• Background,
• Key cut, used to specify where to cut a hole in the background, and
• Key fill, used to fill the hole in the background.
The fill can be an incoming video signal or it can be an internally generated

matte fill. A separate key cut input signal is not necessarily required for
keying. For example, a self key (also called a video key) uses the same input
signal for both key cut and key fill.
The Kayak HD system supports the following types of keys:

• Additive Key
• Luminance Key
• Linear Key
• Chroma Key
• Preset Pattern
The system also supports self keys and split keys.
Matte Fill Key Example

One of the earliest keying techniques was to use an art card and camera to
perform a luminance key with a matte fill. This type of key is a good
example for explaining basic keying principles because three separate and
independent incoming signals are used.
To insert a green logo into background video, the logo can be printed in
white on black paper and a camera can be focused on it. The signal from the
camera can be selected as the key cut signal and green matte video can be
selected as the key fill signal sent to the keyer. The key cut signal is then
adjusted (clipped) to ignore the black paper and use only the white logo
shape to cut a hole in the background video. The keyer then shapes the key
fill to precisely match the logo-shaped hole cut in the background and fills
it with green matte video. This creates a green logo inserted into the back-
ground (Figure 7). Because luminance values of the key cut signal are used
to cut the hole in the background this is called a luminance key.

Figure 7. Matte Fill Luminance Keying Example
Background
LOGO
LOGO
LOGO
LOGO
Key Cut
0618_00_32_r1
Background with Matte Key Inserted
Key Fill
In this keying discussion illustrations rather than actual screen images are
used for simplicity, and because the printing process has difficulty cap-
turing the subtleties of soft key edges.
Shaping Video
In the matte key example above, the key fill signal was a full raster color
that did not match the shape of the key cut signal. This key fill signal is
accurately called non-shaped video, but may also be referred to as unshaped
video since both signal types are processed identically during keying.
Some external devices (for example, character generators) provide a key

cut signal and an already processed companion key fill signal. A key fill
signal that correctly matches the key cut signal is called shaped video.
During keying, properly shaped key fill video can be summed with a back-
ground signal (with a hole cut) and achieve the desired result.
The appropriate key mode for this type of signal is the additive key.
If a key fill does not match the hole in the background (like in the matte key
example above), the key fill needs to be shaped by the switcher. By multi-
plying the key fill signal with the key control signal the unwanted areas of
the fill can be made black, shaping the video to match the hole before it is
summed with the background. Key fill video must be shaped using the key
cut signal actually used to create the hole in the background. Video shaped
with a different key cut signal will not key correctly.
The appropriate key mode for this type of signal is the Linear key or Lumi-
nance Key.

Keying
See the section on Properly and Improperly Shaped Video on page 54 for more
information.
Note that an unshaped signal viewed directly will show harsh edge arti-
facts due to dividing by a small number. This is normal and expected.
Keying this signal will clean up its appearance.
Key Control Signal Adjustment

During keying, the selected key cut signal can be converted into a key
control signal. It is the key control signal that actually cuts the hole in the
background video. Adjusting the key control signal (Clip and Gain) is
essential in the keying process. The art of setting up a good key is to use just
enough Gain to suppress any imperfections in the incoming key signals.
Setting Gain too high can cause ragged key edges.
The Kayak HD system provides two methods for adjusting the key control
signal, Clip and Gain, and Clip Hi and Clip Lo. Note that the same basic
keying process is controlled by either of these methods.
Clip and Gain

The Clip and Gain operation selects a threshold of the selected key cut
video that will be used to cut the hole in the background video. Clip con-
trols the threshold, and Gain controls the softness of the key edges and any
translucent areas. High portions of the key cut signal specifies what video
is retained, and low portions determine what video is removed. Interme-
diate levels specify a soft blend of the background and fill video.
Figure 8. Key Clip, Gain, and Key Control Signal

Background Video
Removd
Video
Retained
Mix of Gain
Background Clip
and Fill Video
Key Control
Video Signal
Removed Key Control Inverted
Key Cut
0618_00_31_r1
Signal (Hole Cutter)

Signal
Background Video
Retained
Clip and Gain control is appropriate for high gain keys (see below), to
easily adjust where the relatively hard transition from background to fill
occurs. In this mode, changing the Clip control moves the threshold up and

down without affecting Gain, which is adjusted separately with its own
Gain control.
High Gain, Low Gain, and Unity Gain

A high gain key has a narrow range, creating harder key edges. A low gain
key has a wider range, creating softer key edges. Linear keys typically use
minimal gain (also called unity gain) to completely preserve the soft edges
of the keys (Figure 9). Note that the Kayak HD system also supports keys
that go below unity gain.
Figure 9. Keying Gain Values
Clip Hi
Gain
Clip
Clip Lo
0618_00_29
Key Cut
Signal
On the this system, Gain has a percentage value. A Gain value of 50%
requires a luminance change of 50% of the distance between black and
white to produce a keying signal ranging from transparent to opaque. A
gain value of 100% (unity gain) uses the entire range between black and
white for this transparent to opaque transition. A gain value of 0% pro-
duces the hard key edges (a high gain key).
Clip Hi and Clip Lo

The Kayak HD system also supports a Clip Hi and Clip Lo mechanism.
With Clip Hi and Clip Lo, two thresholds are established. The upper
threshold specifies at what point video will be completely removed from
the background, and the lower threshold determines at what point back-
ground video will be retained completely intact.

Keying
Figure 10. Key Hi, Clip Lo vs. Clip and Gain
Clip Hi
Gain
Clip
Clip Lo
0618_00_29
Key Cut
Signal
In this mode, Gain changes when either control is adjusted. The difference
between the upper and lower keying thresholds is equivalent to gain:
• Clip Hi = Clip + Gain/2
• Clip Lo = Clip – Gain/2
Clip Hi and Lo control is more appropriate for low gain keys, to enable
independent control of the two thresholds. For example, when adjusting a
linear key the operator wants to control where the fill becomes opaque
(Clip Hi) and where the fill becomes transparent (Clip Low). In Clip Hi/Lo
mode adjusting the point of opacity does not change the point of transpar-
ency, and vice versa.
Clip, Gain, Clip Hi and Clip Low adjustments always interact. Changing
one always results in changes to two other values. Changing Clip Hi or Clip
Low changes both Clip and Gain, not just Gain.
S-Shaped Key Signals

On the Kayak HD system, an S-shaping function is applied to the edges of
luminance keys. S-shaping smooths the sharp corners of a luminance key
control signal, which helps prevent banding artifacts. S-shaping a signal
minimally affects the key edges, and does not move key thresholds or affect
the overall gain of the key.
Figure 11. S-Shaped Luminance Key Control Signal

0618_01_33_r1
Key Control Signal S-Shaped

Key Control Signal

S-shaping is generally not applied to linear keys because the external

device usually applies an S-shaping function when it generates the key cut
and key fill signals. S-shaping should not be applied twice.
Additional Keying Controls

The following additional controls are available for keying.
Key Invert
Keys can be inverted, causing holes to be cut in the background where a
normal key retains the background, and vice versa. Key invert makes the
white areas of the key cut signal produce transparency, and the black areas
produce opacity, the opposite of a standard key.
Masking
Masking defines areas that are protected from keying (Inhibit Mask) or
always key (Force Mask). The shape of the mask can originate from a wipe
pattern generator or by a selected mask signal (typically a key fill signal
delivered via the Utility bus).
With the Kayenne XL Package RamRecorder (Still Store), the mask signal
can be a frozen page of video or a key fill. Complex mask shapes are often
easier to draw by hand than to create with multiple wipe patterns.
Opacity
The opacity of a key can be adjusted. When opacity is reduced below 100%,
some background video is allowed to show through areas where it is nor-
mally excluded. Key opacity is an adjustment to the overall intensity of the
key, and is separate from Clip and Gain controls. Note that a common
mistake is to set opacity to zero and forget that adjustment was made,
which can cause confusion later when that key is selected but not visible.
Key Positioning
Key positioning enable slight adjustment of the horizontal position of the
key cut signal relative to the key fill signal. This is useful if the timing of the
two signals at the switcher inputs are not matched properly. This is gener-
ally only a problem if the cut or fill follow analog paths from source to
switcher or if the source has video/key timing adjustments which have
been set to compensate for other delays within the facility.
Key Size
Key size enable the key cut signal to be narrowed slightly. This can greatly
enhance self keys and chroma keys that have been reshaped.

Keying
Coring
Coring helps reduce video noise in chroma keys. Coring is used when a key
fill signal has noise in areas that are supposed to be transparent. When
noise exists in these areas, it can appear in the background portion of the
keyed composite. Coring replaces the noisy black areas outside the shaped
fill with clean black before it is summed, eliminating the noise.
Show Key
Although the key control signal is not directly visible in the final video
output, this signal can be previewed as a black and white image using the
Show Key function. White areas of a show key indicate areas of complete
opacity, black indicate complete transparency, and gray areas indicate
translucent areas of the key. The whiter the show key signal, the more
opaque the key will be. This key preview signal reflects all the adjustments
that have been made to the key control signal.
Linear Key
A linear key typically uses separate key cut and key fill input signals that
are intended to be used for linear keying. The key cut and key fill are
usually anti-aliased (soft edged) shaped signals created by a character gen-
erator or graphics system. There may also be translucent areas intended to
enable some background to show through the key (watermarks). The level
of the key cut signal determines where and how deeply the hole will be cut
into the background. The intended soft edge and translucency of the key
can then be faithfully reproduced.

Figure 12. Linear Keying
LOGO
LOGO
Background Video Key Hole in Background
x
Invert
LOGO
LOGO LOGO
LOGO
Key Cut Key Control
Clip
Gain
(typically unchanged)
+
LOGO
Completed
Linear Key
LOGO
0618_00_61
Key Fill
Note The soft edges in the illustrations in this part of the manual are simulated. The
key edges are actually gradients, which enable these edges to blend
smoothly with the background. In the Kayak HD System the Linear Key is just
a special parameter setup of the Luminance Key

Keying
Luminance Key and Self Key

A luminance key uses the luminance of an incoming source to specify
where to cut the hole in the background. The earlier example of a matte fill
key is a type of luminance key. Luminance keying is typically done on
sources that do not have an accompanying key cut signal, like a video
camera. The key cut signal must be generated from the incoming video
signal, using clip and gain controls. When only one source is used for both
key cut and key fill, the key is called a Self key or Video key. The same key
source signal is multiplied by the key cut signal to create the key fill, and
then the signals are summed.
Figure 13. Luminance Keying (Self Key)

x
Invert
Key Control
Clip
Gain +
Key Source
(video only) Completed
Luminance Key
0619_00_62
Key Fill
x
Clip and Gain (or Clip Hi/Lo) controls for luminance keys offer wide
adjustment ranges. On the Kayak HD, an S-shaping function is also applied
to the edges of luminance keys.

Chroma Key
A chroma key is a key that detects color (rather than luminance) in a video
image and replaces it with a new background. For example, a reporter may
be in a studio sitting in front of a backdrop with a blue or green backing
color, and the new background can be a mountain scene. The completed
chroma key consists of the mountain scene replacing the backing color, cre-
ating the illusion that the reporter is sitting in front of the mountain.
Figure 14. Chroma Key (Additive or Multiplicative)

x
Invert
Chroma Key Source Backing Colors Selected Key Control

(video only)
Chroma Key
Primary
Suppression
Invert Clip
Gain +
Completed
Chroma Key
Chroma Key
Secondary
Chroma Key Fill Suppression
Backing Color Removed
Chroma Key Fill
x Multiplicative Chroma Key
0618_00_63
Backing Color Suppressed
Additive Chroma Key
The terms foreground and background are often a source of confusion

when used for chroma keys. Foreground refers to the people or objects in a
chroma key scene that are in front of the colored backdrop. Background
refers to the scene that will replace the backing color (same as a linear or
luminance key) in the final picture. Background does not refer to the back-
drop of the foreground scene.

Keying
Chroma keys are performed by suppressing the backing color in the fore-
ground scene, cutting a hole in the background, and then combining the
two processed signals. When conditions are ideal, complete suppression of
the backing color is possible and the hole cut in the background will match
the suppressed foreground, permitting these two signals to be added suc-
cessfully.
This is called an additive chroma key (used when the system Foreground
Reshaping feature is off). When conditions do not permit adequate backing
color suppression, the foreground with its backing color suppressed can be
multiplied by the keying signal to prevent contaminating areas of the back-
ground outside the keyed area. This is called a multiplicative chroma key
(used when the system Foreground Reshaping feature is on). Setting up a
successful chroma key setup involves many more adjustments than other
keys. No amount of adjustment, however, can overcome problems caused
by an improperly set up studio chroma key scene.
Primary and Secondary Color Suppression

As described above, chroma key primary color suppression replaces the
old backing color with black before replacing it with the new background
video. It usually has a very low selectivity and therefore suppresses a wide
range of colors. The goal is to suppress as much of the backing color as pos-
sible without affecting foreground regions.
Secondary suppression is essentially a second chroma keyer that can be

used to deal with areas where the backing color passes through some trans-
lucent portion of the foreground object, like smoke or liquid. This also
includes hair since fine detail often mixes with the backing color. The goal
of secondary suppression is to restore the natural color of the foreground
object. In general, medium to high selectivity values will be used.
Primary and secondary suppression adjustments are used to select the hue
to be replaced and for adjusting the luminance and chrominance levels in
the areas of the picture where suppression is applied.
Flare Suppression
Flare suppression can be used to compensate for backing color reflected
onto foreground objects, or for lens flare (backing color reflections within
the camera lens). In these cases, the foreground object will take on a slight
greenish or bluish tint. Flare suppression subtracts a slight amount of the
primary suppression color from the foreground.
Chroma Key Shadow Generator

The Kayak HD system has a shadow generator that can be used to include
shadows that fall on the backing area of the scene in the background.

Shadow offset, range, and density controls are also available that offer
control over the placement and appearance of the added shadow.
Preset Pattern
A preset pattern uses a wipe pattern generator, rather than an incoming key
cut signal to define the hole cut in the background. Key clip and gain con-
trols are not available for a preset pattern, but controls over the location,
size, border, opacity, and edge softness are available.
Figure 15. Preset Pattern
Background
Pattern Key Cut
0618_00_71_r1
Background with Preset Pattern Inserted
Key Fill
Split Key
A split key uses an alternative key cut signal for keying. On the Kayak HD
system, a key split is performed by holding down the Key Split button and
selecting the desired key cut signal.
Split keys should normally treat the fill as unshaped since by definition a
split key uses a fill that is not related to the cut; that means the normal mode
for keying is Luminance or Linear Key Mode.
Properly and Improperly Shaped Video

The following illustrations show the results of using correctly and incor-
rectly shaped video. In these examples, the video fill comes from a DPM
that provides both a key signal and a fill video signal (a linear key). The

Keying
DPM’s key signal, fill video that has been set as a shaped output, and fill
video set as unshaped is shown in Figure 19 on page 56.
Figure 16. Video and Key Signals from DPM
8447_03r0
When the shaping is done properly (using either shaped (Additive Key) or
unshaped (Luminance Key) key fill), the desired output is the result
(Figure 13 on page 51).
Figure 17. Correctly Shaped DPM Key Example
8447_04r0

Figure 18. Incorrect Key with Dark Halo
8447_06r0
Figure 19. Incorrect Keying with Shaped Input
Background Key Hole in Background Correct Key

x
Invert
Key Control
+ Incorrect Key
with Dark Halo
x
Shaping Circuit On 0618_00_34
Shaped Doubly-Shaped
Key Fill Video
In this case the shaped input is incorrectly shaped again, sometimes called
a double-multiply. Luminance Key was used for shaped key fill signal.
When the DPM provides an unshaped video output but the key is pro-
cessed as though it were shaped, excessive luminance occurs where the key
fill video and key hole edges overlap, producing a white halo around the
key. Additive Key was used for unshaped key fill signal.

Keying
Figure 20. Incorrect Key with White Halo
8447_07r0
In this case the unshaped video fails to be shaped at all.
Figure 21. Incorrect Keying with Unshaped Key Fill
Background Key Hole in Background Correct Key

x
Invert
Key Control
+ Incorrect Key
with White Halo
Shaping Circuit Off 0618_00_35
Unshaped Unshaped
Key Fill Video
Recognizing the appearance of improperly shaped video helps you know

how to correct the problem should it occur.
Downstream Keyers (Half M/E and DSK Option)

Besides the six standard full-function keyers, an additional four simple
(Linear and Luminance only) Downstream Keyers are available as an
option (as part of the Half M/E and DSK Upgrade). These DSKs can be
coupled to any M/E in the system to operate downstream of that M/E. The
DSKs do not support chroma keys or DPM effects.

A Half M/E that provides additional mix and cut functions is also included
with this option. Half M/E and DSK functionality cannot be used simulta-
neously, however.
Flexible Chroma Keyers

Additional Dual Chromatte flexible chroma keyers are also available as an
option. Two chroma keyers are included with each option. Each chroma
keyer can be flexibly assigned to any desired keyer in any M/E.

3-D Digital Effects Concepts

The Kayak HD Digital Picture Manipulator options provide 3-D planar
image translation and transformation from within each M/E of the system.
Image translation has special basic concepts and terminology you should
understand in order to get the most out of using the option.
Definition of Terms
• iDPM - internal Digital Picture Manipulator using M/E resources
• eDPM - expanded (external) Digital Picture Manipulator without using
M/E resources. The Kayenne XL Package 8 RU mainframe provides an
expansion slot that can house a single M/E Board. This hardware
option can be utilized to provide up to 4 channels of Expansion
Video/Key DPM (DVE) known as eDPM.
Translation and Transformation

Translation is a subset of transformation, and involves picture movement
along the X, Y, and Z axis. The picture is simply relocated to a different
place and does not change in actual size or shape.
Figure 22. Picture Translation
0865_10
Y Y Y
X X X
Z Z Z
X AxisTranslate Y AxisTranslate Z AxisTranslate

(moved fartheraway)
Transformation includes translation, and also includes these other func-

tions:
Size
Enlargement and reduction of the picture area while it remains in the same
plane in 3-D space. This is different from picture translation in the Z axis,
where the picture retains its original size, but appears smaller when moved
away, and larger when moved closer.

Rotate
Picture rotation about the reference axis in the X, Y, and Z dimensions
(Figure 23). Rotate is limited to ± one half revolution, and will always take
the shortest path to the new position. Rotate uses Quaternion mathematics
to calculate the move with increased accuracy. Multiple rotations are per-
formed with the Spin function.
Figure 23. Rotate
0865_12_r1
Y Y Y
X X X
Z Z Z
X Rotate Y Rotate Z Axis Rotate

(Around Y Axis) (Around X Axis)
Spin
Supports multiple rotations about the reference axis in the X, Y, and Z direc-
tions. Spin supports fractional values, and is similar to Rotate when the
move is less than ± one half revolution. Spin uses Euler mathematics to cal-
culate the move, which is not quite as precise as Quaternion, but permits
multiple rotations. Spin applies transform values in Z, X, Y order, so editing
effects in this axis order provides the best control of the effect.
Note Following broadcast conventions, moving the Joystick forward or back along
the Joystick’s Y axis rotates the top of the picture forward or back (a rotation
about the X reference axis). Similarly, moving the Joystick left or right along
the Joystick’s X axis rotates the side picture left or right (a rotation about the
Y reference axis).
Figure 24. Aspect, Skew, Perspective
0865 11
Y Y Y
X X X
Z Z Z
Aspect Skew Perspective
Aspect
Scaling the X or Y components of the picture. X axis changes affect hori-
zontal size, Y axis changes affect vertical size (Figure 24). Z axis changes
affect both X and Y dimensions, and is the same as Size.

Skew
Slanting the picture in the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) directions
(Figure 24).
Perspective
Changing the viewer’s apparent viewpoint of a picture. This only applies
when a picture is tilted so part of it is farther from the viewer.
The farther portion appears smaller than the closer portion, and the
amount of perspective controls how much smaller the distant part is
(Figure 24 on page 60). Multi-channel perspective is discussed later in this
section.
Axis Location
The axis location of the channel determines the center point of translations,
spins, and rotations for that channel. You can move the axis to a new loca-
tion to change the behavior of that channel. The axis location can be within
or outside the screen area.
Z Axis Rotation at Different Axis Locations
Figure 25. Frame of Reference Axis Locations

Z Axis Rotation at
Different Axis Locations
0865_08
Y Y
Y
X X
X
Z Z
Z
Axis at Axis Off Axis Off Screen

Center of Picture Center of Picture
Source and Target Space

The Kayenne XL Package Digital Picture Manipulator uses source and
target space frames of reference.
• Source space for a control channel uses that channel’s coordinate
system for reference.
• Target space for a channel uses the next higher level’s coordinate 
system for reference.

Being able to use both source and target space can help make effects editing
easier. One frame of reference may offer a simple and easy to understand
context for a picture transform, while in another frame of reference the
same transform may be difficult to understand and control. Kayenne XL
Package Digital Picture Manipulator effects can also employ both source
and target space directed transforms simultaneously, which can create
complex and beautiful effects.
The simplest example for source and target space concerns a channel that
has been rotated while the global channel remains unchanged.
Figure 26. Source and Target Space
0865_03
Z
X
Source Y
Transformed X
Picture
Target
Z Monitor Screen
In this example the source space for the channel is referenced to the picture
itself (tilted back at an angle) while the target space is referenced to the
monitor screen (straight). X axis translations will move this picture differ-
ently, depending on whether source or target space is being used.
Figure 27. Source and Target Space Translation

0865_04
Z Y
X
Z
Source Translate Target Translate
Along X Axis Along X Axis
If the channel is controlled by a global channel, and the global channel itself
has been rotated, an X axis translation will depend on whether the channel
itself or the global channel is being manipulated, and whether source or
target space is being used. Note that the target translate of the channel is the
same as a source translate of the global channel.

Figure 28. Channel Translate with Global Rotated
0865_05
Z
Y
X
Glo Glo
bal bal
Cha Cha
n nel nnel Y
Z
X
Logical Channel Source Translate Logical Channel Target Translate

Figure 29. Global Channel Translate with Global Rotated
0865_06
Glo Glo
bal bal
Cha Cha
nnel Y
Y n nel
X
Z Z
X
Camera Channel
Global Channel Source Translate Global Channel TargetTranslate

Post Transform Space

Post transform (Post Xform) is a special transform function that only affects
size and location operations. It does not change the perspective of the
image (Figure 30). This can be used as a convenient method to quickly
project pictures onto new locations of the screen. For example, if an image
has the right perspective but is partially off screen, it can be brought back
on screen without changing the perspective.
Figure 30. Post Transform Translation

0865_09
X Axis Translation X Axis Translation

with Locate 3-D with Post Xform

All post transform functions are made relative to the monitor screen frame
of reference. For example, a positive X post transform always moves to the
right side of the screen.
Front and Back, Near and Far

Pictures manipulated by a Kayak HD Digital Picture Manipulator have
front and back sides, each of which is revealed in turn as the picture spins
or rotates. After a picture has been translated it can be difficult to determine
which side was originally on the front and which was originally on the
back. This distinction can be important when, for example, different
sources are being selected for different sides of an effect.
The system uses a Near and Far convention to ease system operation. Near
is always the side of the picture that is visible (facing toward the viewer),
and Far is the hidden side of the picture (facing away from the viewer). The
current Near side can be either the front side or the back side of the picture,
depending on orientation. For example, to change the source on the visible
image, just change the Near side. To change the source on the hidden side,
change the Far side. You do not need to know whether the image being
changed is actually the front or back side.
Transform Numbering Systems

The Kayenne XL Package Digital Picture Manipulator uses the following
numbering systems to precisely define picture locations, picture size, and
picture rotation and spin.

Screen Coordinates
The Kayenne XL Package Digital Picture Manipulator accommodates two
different aspect ratios, 4 x 3 and 16 x 9, selectable via the Video Standards
menu. In 4 x 3 mode, the screen is six units high and eight units wide. In 16
x 9 mode, the screen is 18 units high and 32 units wide. The numbering
system begins in the center of the screen, and has the standard horizontal X
axis and the vertical Y axis (Figure 31). For simplicity, examples in this
manual use the 4 x 3 aspect ratio.
These coordinates can be used for monitor screen locations (channel target
space with default global channel), or they can be applied to picture loca-
tions (channel source space).
Figure 31. Screen Coordinates
0865_01
+3Y
+9Y
-4X 0 +4X -16X 0 +16X
-9Y
-3Y
Screen units are also used to define Z axis dimension depth in 3-D space.
Positive Z axis values are back behind the picture, and negative values are
in front of the picture (Figure 32).
Figure 32. Viewer Location in 3-D Space
Source
+Z
its
Source Un
en
S cer
7
X .6
Target 16
+
-Z
0865_02
its
Un
n
S cere
67
6.
Viewer -1
For perspective calculations the factory default viewpoint places the

viewer -16.67 screen units from the monitor screen surface (4 x 3 aspect

ratio). In this case, moving a full screen image 16.67 screen units back
behind the screen makes the picture appear half its normal size to the
viewer.
Size
Picture size is defined relative to picture screen units. A size of 0.50 indi-
cates a picture is one-half its full size in linear edge measures. It is one
quarter of its full size area.
Rotation
Rotation is measured fractionally with respect to 360°. A value of 0.25 indi-
cates a rotation of 90 degrees; 0.50 indicates 180 degrees (maximum rota-
tion).
Rotation values can be positive or negative, which determines the direction

of rotation.
Spin
Spins are measured in number of 360° rotations (up to 999). Fractional spin
values are also supported. A single axis 0.50 spin is the same as a single axis
0.50 rotation. Spin values can be positive or negative, which determines the
direction of spin.
Skew
Skew supports values of ±999, though extreme values will probably rarely
be used.
Aspect
Aspect values are in percentage of the original size, with 1.0 = 100%, 
0.5 = 50%, etc.
Perspective
Perspective supports values from 0-100, with 0.06 as the default in 4x3
operation and 0.015 in 16x9.
Spin and Rotation Relationship

It is possible to use both Spin and Rotation at the same time in an effect.
When both are used, the transforms are nested so that the values of one
transform are applied after the previous transform values have been calcu-
lated.

This nesting provides increased control of the effect dynamics. Source and
Target space also affects the transform nesting order.
Figure 33. Spin and Rotate Transform Nesting
Spin Rotate Rotate Spin

Source Source Target Target
0618_04_138_r0

Path Control
Paths
Keyframes specify parameter values at specific times in an effect. Most of
the duration of an effect, however, occurs between these keyframes. The
Kayak HD system interpolates parameter values between keyframes (in-
betweening).
The trajectory, or path, a manipulated picture travels between keyframes is

determined by how these in-between values are interpolated. The system
offers you several path controls (Figure 34 on page 68):
• HOLD — No interpolation. Keyframes hold their values for their dura-
tions, then change all at once for the next keyframe.
• LINEAR — Applies a linear interpolation between keyframes; no accel-
eration or deceleration is applied. Movement is mechanical with a con-
stant velocity.
• S-LINEAR — Applies a linear or straight line motion between keyframes,
with acceleration and deceleration applied at the beginning and end of
each keyframe. At each S-Linear keyframe the motion is stopped for
two fields.
• CURVE — This selection causes a rounded path through the keyframe.
Paths are user adjustable with path modifiers (tension, continuity, and
bias) described below.
Figure 34. Path Types
KF2 KF2
KF1 KF1
Constant
Speed
KF3 KF3
Hold Linear
KF2 KF2
KF1 KF 1
Fast Slow
Fast Stop Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Slow Slow
0721_06_45_r1
KF3 KF3
S-Linear Curve

The path concept can also be applied to functions that do not move a
picture across the screen, like matte hue changes. For these functions, the
rate of change of the parameter follows the same path types above. For
example, an S-Linear hue rotation will accelerate and decelerate the speed
of the hue change at the beginning and end of the keyframe.
Tension, Continuity, and Bias Controls

When the Curve parameter is selected, additional fine-tuning path controls
become available:
• TENSION — Controls the length of the tension vector. At a setting of 0.0,
this imaginary line extends an equal distance into and out of the key-
frame, and the path through the middle keyframe is curved.
• CONTINUITY — Determines the angle of the path into and out of the key-
frame.
• BIAS — Determines whether the path will be pulled towards the pre-
vious or the following keyframe. In the following examples, a physical
path is shown between three keyframes. The first keyframe (KF1) is the
upper left square; the last keyframe (KF3) is the lower right square. The
adjustments in these examples are applied to the middle keyframe only
(KF2).

Path Vectors
With respect to the path between keyframes, each keyframe is made up of
three vector parameters as shown below. The soft knob controls act on these
vector parameters to adjust the path into (entry) and out of (exit) the key-
frame. The path through KF2 is parallel to an imaginary line drawn
between KF1 and KF3.
Figure 35. Path Vectors

Tension
Vector +
–
+ Bias
KF1 KF2 Vector
–
Continuity
Vector
0721_06_46_r1
KF3
Vector Values
Path vector setting values of ± 1.0 are available, same as the Thomson Grass
Valley Kaleidoscope DPM.

Tension Control
In the example below, the keyframes comprise a right angle, so the TENSION
control operates on a 45° line drawn through the keyframe. This line is
referred to as the Tension Vector and is parallel to a line drawn between
adjacent keyframes (Figure 36).
The TENSION soft knob controls the length of the tension vector. The length
of the tension vector is inversely proportional to its parameter value. For
example, at a Tension setting of 0 (zero), this imaginary line extends an
equal distance into and out of the keyframe, and the path through the
middle keyframe is curved. The unmodified KF2 is said to have a correc-
tion value of 0.0.
Figure 36. Tension Control Setting Zero

Tension
Vector
KF1 KF2
Tension = 0.0
0721_06_47_r0
KF3
In the example below, the TENSION control is increased to 1.0, so that the
Tension vector is shortened to non-existence through KF2 (Figure 37). The
path enters and leaves the middle keyframe in a straight line as it takes on
an S-Linear motion; decelerating as it enters the middle keyframe and
accelerating as it leaves.

Figure 37. Tension Control Setting 1.0

No Tension Vector
KF1
KF2
Tension = 1.0
0721_06_48_r0
KF3
In the example below, the TENSION control has been set to -1.0. This
lengthens the Tension vector, causing the path through the middle key-
frame to be longer and broader (Figure 38). The longer path will appear to
make the image speed up through KF2 as it travels from KF1 to KF3.
Figure 38. Tension Control Setting - 1.0

Tension
Vector
KF1 KF2
Tension = -1.0
0721_06_49_r0
KF3

Continuity Control
The continuity adjustment determines the angle of the path into and out of
the keyframe. It is represented by a vector 90 degrees to the tension vector
(Figure 39). The unmodified path shown is identical to the unmodified
path of the other controls.
Figure 39. Continuity Control Setting Zero

+
KF1 KF2
Continuity
Vector
–
Continuity = 0.0
0721_06_50_r0
KF3
With continuity set to 1.0, the entry path through the keyframe is pulled
positively along the continuity vector. The effect of 1.0 continuity is that of
motion dropping into and then out of the keyframe, similar to a bouncing
ball (Figure 39 on page 73).
Figure 40. Continuity Control Setting 1.0

+
KF1
KF2
Continuity
Vector
–
Continuity = 1.0
0721_06_51_r0
KF3

With continuity set to -1.0, the paths between the keyframes become
straight lines, accelerating into the keyframe and decelerating as it leaves
the keyframe.
Figure 41. Continuity Control Setting - 1.0

+
KF1
KF2
Continuity
Vector
–
Continuity = -1.0
0721_06_52_r0
KF3

Bias Control
The BIAS control determines whether the path will be pulled towards the
previous or the following keyframe. With extreme settings, all of the
biasing will occur either before or after KF2. With bias set to 0 (zero), the
curve through the keyframe is gentle as shown in Figure 42.
Note A Tension vector must be present for Bias control to be available.
Figure 42. Bias Control Setting Zero

-
Tension
Vector
+
Bias
Vector
KF1 KF2
Bias = 0.0
0721_06_53_r0
KF3

With the bias set to 1.0, the path is pulled towards the following keyframe.
Entry into and exit from the keyframe is a straight line from the previous
keyframe, and the path of the effect travels completely through KF2 before
turning towards KF3.
Figure 43. Bias Control Setting 1.0

-
+
Entry
Bias
KF1
KF2
Tension
Bias = 1.0 Vector
0721_06_54_r0
KF3
With the bias set to -1.0, the path is pulled towards the previous keyframe.
Entry into and exit from the keyframe is a straight line to the following key-
frame.
Figure 44. Bias Control Setting - 1.0

Tension Exit Bias
Vector -
KF1
KF2
Bias = -1.0
0721_06_55_r0
KF3

Sure Touch
Sure Touch changes the way in which effects behave during recall and play-
back, providing more control and flexibility. An effect can be safely recalled
using two new modes which eliminate abrupt changes: hence the name
Sure Touch is being used. When using a Sure Touch mode, the effect adapts
itself to the switcher’s current state. Upon recall of any effect, no changes
are made to the current state, regardless of the nature or the composition of
the effect. Then, when the effect is run, the relative changes from the inter-
polated effect are applied instead of the traditional absolute output. Only
elements which changed over the course of the original effect are affected.
One way of thinking about safe touch is to think of it as running an effect

in “relative” mode.
These changes can be applied in different ways, allowing the effect to inter-
polate on a path parallel to the original effect (Parallel mode), or on a path
that converges the changing state smoothly to the actual end state of the
original effect (Converge mode). A safe touch mode can be “forced on” just
prior to recalling an effect, or it can be saved with the effect to be used auto-
matically.
This feature changes the paradigm of control for effects, allowing effects to
be applied under more flexible set of conditions and also to be used as spe-
cialized functions to perform specific actions.
Within the DPM timeline system, when an effect is first created, a snapshot
of all values is saved. For any subsequent keyframes, only values which
have changed are then saved. Those values that have changed are referred
to as “bound elements” and are subject to interpolation as the effect runs.
When an effect is recalled in a sure touch mode, the current states of the
bound elements are read by the timeline system. These values are com-
pared with the original first keyframe (snapshot) of the effect, and an
“offset” or “new zero” is established for each bound element of the effect.
This “offset” is then applied during all subsequent fields of the effect. A
new “offset” is established each time the effect is recalled. The result is that
a “new effect” is established each time the effect is recalled.
The essential result is this: When an effect is recalled in a safe touch mode,
only those values which underwent changes after the first key-frame of the
original effect are touched, and only changes in values are applied.

Parallel Mode Example

For example, suppose we have the following effect.
• Effect 3: The channel is at 50% size and on screen in the upper left. It is
moved off screen to the right.
• Keyframe 1: locate X = -2.0, locate Y = 1.0, size = 50%.
Keyframe 2: locate X = 8.0.
Figure 45. Parallel Mode Example
KF-1 KF-2
KF-1 KF-2
8447_08r0
Now suppose that the image is centered and size = 30%. Next, effect 3 is
recalled in sure touch “parallel” mode.

Converge Mode Example

Sure touch converge mode begins in the same way as parallel mode, but the
effect converges to the absolute end state of the effect over the course of the
effect.
• Effect 2: Starts with the image centered and 30% size. Image is spun off
screen to the right and down
• Keyframe 1: size = 30%
• Keyframe 2: locate X = 8.0, locate Y = -6.0, spin Z = 1.875.
Figure 46. Converge Mode Example
KF-1
KF-2
8447_09r0
Now suppose the starting image is moved up and right and then effect 2 is
recalled with sure touch “converge” mode. The result would appear as
shown here. The effect converges towards the original effect over the dura-

tion of the effect. The final keyframe of the effect would set the location and
spin Z to exactly the same values as in the original effect.
Figure 47. Converge Mode Example (continued)
KF-1
KF-2
8447_10r0

Comparing Parallel and Converge Modes

Suppose we have an effect 5 which is as follows:
• Effect 5: The channel is 5% size, off screen to the left, and moves in a
sweeping path towards the lower left screen and finally ending in
upper right at 25% size.
• Keyframe 1: size = 5%, locate X = -6.0.
• Keyframe 2: size = 15%, locate X = -2.0, locate Y = -2.0.
• Keyframe 3: size = 25%, locate X = 2.0, locate Y = 1.5.
Figure 48. Comparing Parallel and Converge Modes
KF-3
KF-1
8447_11r0
KF-2
The result of moving the starting image location and recalling this effect in
parallel mode (red) and converge mode (green) is shown here.
Figure 49. Comparing Parallel and Converge Modes (continued)
KF-3
KF-1
8447_12r0
KF-2
Obviously, there are ways to use sure touch which would create a bad
result, as in the red case.


Section 3
Control Panel
The Grass Valley Kayak HD family of multi-format digital production
switchers provides powerful, ground-breaking features designed to meet
the widest range of requirements for live studio, mobile, and post-produc-
tion applications. Available in configurations ranging from 1-M/E to 4.5-
M/Es, Kayenne XL Packages combine features available in the Grass Valley
Kalypso and Kayak HD switchers along with additional capabilities previ-
ously unavailable in any video production switcher by any manufacturer.
A Kayenne XL control surface consists of a Control Panel, a Menu Panel

with an included articulated support arm, a Panel Control Unit frame, and
optional Satellite panels. This control surface has an innovative modular
design, permitting customized operator control layouts.
Control Panel Modules

The following Kayenne XL Control Panel and Satellite modules are 
available:
• KAYN-PNL-TRM - Transition Module, used to control M/E transitions
and keying.
• KAYN-PNL-LEM - Local EMEM Module, used to control EMEM effects
on that M/E stripe.
• KAYN-PNL-M/EM - Master EMEM Module, used for delegated
EMEM control of any or all system M/Es.
• KAYN-PNL-MFM - Multi-Function Module, used for delegated control
of various functions.
• KAYN-PNL-DCM - Device Control Module, used for internal and
external .
• KAYN-PNL-SRC-35, 25, 15 - Source Module, available in 35, 25, and 15
button widths, used for M/E source selection.
• KAYN-PNL-BAR-35, 25, 15 - Panel Bar, available in three sizes to match
various control panel widths, used for device control and macros.

Section 3 — Control Panel
• KAYN-PNL-AUX-35, 25, 15 - Local Aux Module, available in 35, 25, and

15 button widths, used for Aux Bus control.
Representative Kayenne XL 4M/E control surfaces are shown in the

Figure 50 on page 84.
Figure 50. Overview of Kayenne XL Package Control Panel
Aux Control Panel Local EMEM Transition Panel Display Panel
Row D
Row C
Row B
Row A
M/E1 M/E2 M/E3 PP Machine Control Panel

Crossbar Selection Multi-Function Panel
Master EMEM Panel
• Row A:
• 35 button source and bus select
• Transition
• Local EMEM
• Master EMEM

• Row B:
• Transition
• EMEM
• Multi-function module with joystick
• Row C:
• Transition
• EMEM
• Machine control
• Row D:
• Transition
• EMEM
• Optional panel
• System bar with 6 device control sections
• 35 buttton source for local aux panel
• Display panel
Touch Screen Menu Panel and PC Menu Control

Each Kayenne XL control surface includes a Menu Panel that features a
wide format touch screen display. An articulated arm is also included,
offering a wide variety of installation options.
An additional touch screen Kayenne XL Menu Panel is available as an

option. It is also possible to run the Kayenne XL menu application on a
standard PC, permitting mouse and keyboard control from a laptop, or
remote control from any location on the network.

Kayenne XL Features
The following features are available:
• up to 4.5 M/E switcher
• 6 keys per M/E (half M/E 4 keyer)
• 2 frames of V/K storage per keyers on M/E1/M/E2/M/E3 and PP
• 16 integrated DPMs (4 per M/E on M/E1, M/E2, M/E3 and PP)
• 4 channels of expansion DPM (M/E board in the Expansion slot)
• 1000 EMEMs
• 1000 macros
• Multi-format input and output conversion (MatchDef and SetDef)
• FlexiKey (4 PGM, 2 PVW per M/E 2PGM 1 PVW on the half M/E)
• Define EMEM
• Macro Editing

Button Color Definitions
Green low/highlight
• Static function selection/toggle with indication when function is
enabled (On/Off).
Yellow lowlight
• Available functions with subselection (2nd page) via button "Next"
or double-click.
Yellow highlight
• Function is enabled but not delegated.
Orange lowlight
• Available sub-selection(s) (2nd page) with On/Off status indica-
tion.
Orange highlight
• Sub-selection(s) (2nd page) are enabled but not delegated.
Blue lowlight
• Delegation buttons for embedded menu controls.
Blue highlight
• Indicates selection.
Magenta lowlight
• Indicates preselection and available digipot delegations. Enables
next level of controls.
Magenta highlight
• Indicates activated/enabled selection and digipot delegations.
White lowlight
• Available selection and static On/Off.
White highlight
• Confirmed selection.

Source Selection
Figure 51. Kayenne XL Source Select Panel
Overview
The functionality described in this section refers to the following groups of
buttons groupings and status displays:
• Source select buttons
• Source name displays (SNDs)
• Shift buttons
• Hold buttons (not yet implemented)
• Row delegation buttons
• Row select buttons:
• M/E bus select buttons: K1, …, K6, A, B, U1, U2
• Aux bus select button: Aux
• Macro select button: Macro
• Router select button: Rtr
• EMEM select button: EMEM
• eDPM select button: eDPM
• Define Memo select button: Define Memo
• Other buttons: Far, Key Split

Source Selection
Figure 52. Kayenne XL Source Select Panel Right Part
Hold Key Key Key Macro

1 3 5
RAM5 RAM5
BLCK BLCK AXDL Key Far eDPM Define Aux
BLCK BLCK
3RD 2RD Split Memo
AUX1
RAM5 RAM5
Hold Key Key Key Router

2 4 6
RAM5 RAM5
BLCK BLCK AXDL 3rd 2nd EMEM
BLCK BLCK
3RD 2RD
AUX1
RAM5 RAM5
Hold A U1 Direct Auto

Trans Trans
Hold B U2 Direct Auto

Trans Trans
Source Select Buttons

Depending on the panel type modules are available with 15, 25 or 35 source
selection buttons per row.
The source select buttons can be mapped as:
• Switcher sources
• Shift function
• Row delegation function
By convention, it is assumed (but not required) that starting from the right
and working to the left source select buttons will be mapped as:
• 0 or 1 row delegation buttons
• 0 to 3 shift buttons
• Primary source select buttons

The default mapping of a 4M/E switcher will be, from right to left:
• Button 35: Row delegation button
• Buttons 33 and 34: Shift buttons
• Buttons 30, 31, and 32: M/E re-entry buttons
The button of the selected input is highlighted. If the input is assigned to a
button in a non-selected level, the button is blinking. That feature can be
disabled ("Shift level hidden source blinking").
Row Delegation
• Row delegation buttons are generally mapped to the rightmost source
select button.
• The color of each delegation button is set to indicate the current delega-
tion. Its color is set to match the color of the bus select button, aux select
button, macro select button, router select button, etc.
• The Source Name Display associated with the row delegation button
indicates the name of the bus or the function (for example KEY2, MCRO,
BGDB, UTIL2).
• Initially the rows are delegated as follows:
• Row 1: KEY1
• Row 2: KEY2
• Row 3: BGDA
• Row 4: BGDB
The following rows can be selected by pressing the corresponding row
selection button: Macro, Aux, Router, Define Memo, eDPM
The previous selection occurs by pressing that button again.
For KEY1...KEY6, BGDA, BGDB, UTIL1, UTIL2, EMEM the row will be delegated
temporarily as long as the selection button is pressed. A static delegation
can be done by pressing the row delegation button and the row selection
button simultaneously.
Shift Level Delegation

Standard Latch Mode
• If a shift level button is pressed, the row will be permanently delegated
to that shift level.
• If the 4th level button is not assigned, both shift level buttons (2nd and
3rd) have to be pressed to reach the level.

Source Selection
Manual Latch Mode

By pressing a shift level button, the row will be temporarily delegated to
that level. For a static delegation a double-click has to be done.
The 1st level can be reached by pressing the selected shift level button (tem-
porarily) or bye double-clicking on it.
If the 4th level button is not assigned, the level can be temporarily reached
by pressing the 2nd and 3rd level button at the same time.
For a static delegation of the 4th level a double-click of the 2nd level button
and a double-click of the 3rd level button have to be done.
To reach the 1st level, one of the selected shift level buttons has to be
double-clicked twice.
Auto Latch Mode

In auto-latch mode, taking a source at a certain shift level automatically
causes a delegation of the source row (and source name displays) to the
new shift level and tallies the shift buttons for the new shift level. This
means the bus stays delegated to the shift level.
To delegate a bus to a shifted level, push the shift button. The shift button
is high tallied and the source name displays show the source names for the
selected shift level. The bus now remains in this shifted state.
Delegation to Aux Bus Selection

Aux bus delegation supports the selection of sources for any aux bus,
eDPM, iDPM and RamRecorder bus.
To functionally delegate the row 1 and/or 2 to aux bus selection:
• Press the aux bus select button (toggle it on).
For each set of controls:
• Pressing a button on the top row of buttons selects an aux bus (destina-
tion).
• Pressing a button on the bottom row selects a source for the aux bus
selected on the top row.
The source name display between these two buttons has four lines dis-
playing the following:
• Line 1: Aux bus number
• Line 2: Aux bus name
• Line 3: Current Aux Bus source
• Line 4: Sources

Holding down the aux bus select button and pressing the row delegation
button (or vice versa), delegates that row to an aux source row. In that case
the aux bus can be selected by holding down the row delegation button.
The source selection buttons will be switched to the aux bus selection and
an aux bus can be delegated.
Delegation to Macros
• To delegate both rows 1 and 2 to macros, press the Macro button (tog-
gling macro on).
• To delegate a single row (either row 1 or row 2)
• Hold down the Macro button and then press a bus delegation
button.
• Or, hold down a bus delegation buttons, and then press the
MACRO button.
Macros are shown in groups depending on the shift level, row, and M/E.
For each M/E, each shift level for rows 1 and 2 is assigned a macro starting
number. The default condition is that all shift levels for all M/Es are
assigned to start with macro 1.
• Pressing the Macro button a second time, turns it off and the bus (or
buses) revert to previous delegations.
Delegation to Routers Source Selection

Router control involves selecting a router destination and then being able
to select a router source for this destination.
• To delegate both rows 1 and row 2 to router selection, press the Router
button (toggling router on).
• The top row shows all configured router delegations (external aux
buses).
• The bottom row shows available router sources for the router destina-
tion selected on the row above.
• So multiple source selections can be made for the same destination
if wanted.

Source Selection
Delegation to EMEM Selection

• Pressing the EMEM button where there are bus delegation buttons
defined causes temporary delegation of rows 1 and 2 for quick EMEM
selection/recall.
• Pressing the EMEM button and then row 1 or row 2 bus delegate button
delegates the row to EMEM selection. One or both rows may be dele-
gated at the same time.
• Pressing the EMEM button and then either the row 3 or row 4 bus dele-
gation button causes BOTH rows 3 and 4 to be delegated to EMEM
selection.
• Delegated rows show the names of the EMEM on the source name dis-
play.
• The functionality differs depending on which rows are delegated.
Delegation of rows 1 and 2 to EMEM selection enable EMEM to be directly

recalled.
Delegation of rows 3 and 4 puts the system into 'transitional EMEM selection
mode' where EMEM selection and recall can be controlled in conjunction
with the transition module.
• Selection on row 3 is equivalent to selection on rows 1 or 2 as already
described.
• Selection on row 4 prepares the EMEM.
• Pressing the Cut button on the transition module causes the EMEM
to be recalled, as already described
• Pressing the Auto button on the transition module causes an effects
dissolve to the EMEM register at the auto transition rate.
• Moving the lever arm on the transition module causes a dissolve to
the EMEM with a percentage related to the lever arm position, that
is, a manual effects dissolve.
EMEMs which are parked on the first keyframe, can now be run using the
local EMEM panel.

Delegation to eDPM
When the eDPM is delegated, the upper key row is used to show the eDPM
channels.
On the lower key row the sources for each channel can be selected.
Delegation to Define Memo

When the define memo delegation button is pressed, both key rows will be
delegated to the local EMEM. In this case the source select buttons are used
to select the parts of the switcher whose signals be stored in the EMEM. The
assignment of the buttons corresponds to the EMEM/Define Memo menu
(local EMEM).
Split Key
To create a split key, select a source for the fill signal, hold down the key-
split button, and select a source on a row delegated to the key bus. The
selected source will become the key (cut) selection for that key bus using
the currently selected keyer mode.
• If a bus is temporarily delegated to control a keyer, then the split key
button becomes an on/off toggle, so that again source selection can be
made using two hands.
FAR Button Operation

• When Far is off (inactive), taking a source sets both near and far sides.
• The Far button is active when held down.
• The Far modifier is used for DPM rotation transitions. During DPM
operations the side that is seen by the user is defined as the near-side,
the invisible other side is defined as the far-side.
• To set the far side for the current delegation of a bus, press and hold the
Far button, select a shift level if necessary, and make a source selection
for that side.

Source Selection
Button and Bus Indication

On Air
Input buttons and the bus row delegation button which are involved in the
output picture are indicated with a red.
Uncalibrated /Asynchronous Sources

Asynchronous sources will slowly flash their source name displays
between normal text and reverse-video text.
Sources which are uncalibrated will be indicated by having the source name
underlined.
M/E Delegation Indication

• There is a four character LED display between the K4 and U1 buttons.
• This display shows the current delegation of the panel row to the
logical M/E:
• M/E1, M/E2, M/E3, PP, M/E-H
Corrected Inputs or Buses

In the source displays corrected buses or corrected inputs are marked with
an underline! For details refer to Color Correction Menu on page 445

Aux Bus Control

There are two identical sets of aux bus controls, the upper and the lower.
Both sets operate identically.
Figure 53. Kayenne XL AUX Control Panel
Aux bus mode of operation is the default for the two sets. If Macro, and Rtr
are off, the set of controls is in Aux Bus control mode, the default mode.
Figure 54. Kayenne XL AUX Control Panel - Right Part
Hold Macro
RAM5 RAM6
BLCK BLCK AXDL
BLCK BLCK
3RD 2RD Key
Split
Far Gang Aux
AUX1
M3 A MEhA
Direct Auto Rtr

Trans Trans
Hold Macro
RAM5 RAM6
BLCK BLCK BGDA Key Far Gang Aux
BLCK BLCK
3RD 2RD Split
BGDB
M3 A MEhA
Direct Auto Rtr

Trans Trans

Aux Bus Control
For each set of controls:

• Pressing a button on the top row of buttons selects an aux bus (destina-
tion).
• Pressing a button on the bottom row selects a source for the aux bus
selected on the top row.
• The source name display between these two buttons has four lines dis-
playing the following:
• Line 2: Aux bus name
• Line 3: P = permanent input (if selected)
• Line 4: Sources
• The Split button acts in the same way to modify source selection as
described in Split Key on page 94 when the eDPM is selected.
• The Far button acts in the same way to modify source selection as
described in FAR Button Operation on page 94 when the eDPM is
selected.
• The two four-digit displays show the selected aux bus.

Aux Bus Transitions

Aux Bus Transition is a new feature introduced with software version V703.
It offers the possibity to execute up to two AUX-AUTO-MIX transitions
simultaneously from any Kayenne XL or Kayak control panel. The AUX
transition control settings Transition Mode and Transition Duration can be
enabled individually per AUX Bus of the video frame and are stored with
the frame's configuration settings.
During an Aux transition, the transition amount is displayed in the LED

display of that module.
Button designation (up to now these buttons were unused):

• Direct Trans
• Auto Trans
Refer to Figure 55 on page 99 and Figure 56 on page 99.
In the Aux Transition module, the preset source name is displayed in the so
far unused (empty) OLED row.
• Line 2: Inverted, shows the current source visible at the AUX outputAux
bus name
• Line 3: Inverted, shows the AUX Transition preset source. A Transition
to this source is executed if the transitions AUTO button is pressed in the
GUI or in Direct Mode when the Auto Trans is pressed.
• Line 4: Shows the AUX source that is switched to when source button is
pressed while AUX Transition is OFF or transitioned to in case of Tran-
sition Direct Mode.
Note Please note, that Aux Transition is not available in 4.5 M/E configuration with
SD video standard.

Aux Bus Transitions
Figure 55. Kayenne XL Source Select Panel - Right Part
Hold Key Key Key Macro

1 3 5
RAM5 RAM5
BLCK BLCK AXDL Key Far eDPM Define Aux
BLCK BLCK
3RD 2RD Split Memo
AUX1
RAM5 RAM5
Hold Key Key Key Router

2 4 6
RAM5 RAM5
BLCK BLCK AXDL 3rd 2nd EMEM
BLCK BLCK
3RD 2RD
AUX1
RAM5 RAM5
Hold A U1 Direct Auto

Trans Trans
Hold B U2 Direct Auto

Trans Trans
Figure 56. Kayenne XL AUX Control Panel - Right Part
Hold Macro
RAM5 RAM6
BLCK BLCK AXDL
BLCK BLCK
3RD 2RD Key
Split
Far Gang Aux
AUX1
M3 A MEhA
Direct Auto Rtr

Trans Trans
Hold Macro
RAM5 RAM6
BLCK BLCK BGDA Key Far Gang Aux
BLCK BLCK
3RD 2RD Split
BGDB
M3 A MEhA
Direct Auto Rtr

Trans Trans

General
Auto Trans button is low tally when AUX Transition is enabled for an AUX
bus. The Direct Trans button is low tally only if AUX is enabled and Direct-
Mode is enabled. Always an AUX bus has a known preset source which is
'BLACK' by default.
Operating Modes
There are only two ways to operate the AUX Transition:
• Direct Mode: 
In Direct Mode pressing the low tally Auto Trans executes an AUX tran-
sition with the known preset source. While this transition is executed,
the Auto Trans button light switched to high tally. When this transition
has reached the end, the Auto Trans button light switched back to low
tally and the mainframe swaps PGM and PST sources. As a result, sub-
sequent Auto Trans button presses toggles the transition in this mode.
• Auto Mode:
In Auto Mode the Direct Trans button is OFF and the Auto Trans button is
low tally. Pressing the Auto Trans button, it starts to flash. If you push a
source button at that AUX bus now, the preset source will be newly
preset and the AUX transition will be executed which is indicated by
the high-tally Auto Trans button while the transition is running. At the
end of the transition, PGM and PST swaps again and the Auto Trans
button goes back to low tally. Doing this, you have executed a single
shot AUX transition by pushing an AUX source button. 
The Auto Mode can be used to decide during operation if the dedicated
AUX buses executes a CUT when pushing an AUX bus source - or - exe-
cutes an AUX transition if you preset this mode using the flashing Auto
Trans button prologue.
Note The running transition can be finished by pressing the Auto Trans button
again. A pause of the running transition is not possible.
Note During transition it is possible to change the source (Pst) by simple pressing
another source button. The transition will be completed in the remainig time.
Refer Section 5-AUX / Router Main Submenu for more details.

Router Control
Router Control
There are two identical sets of router controls, the upper and the lower.
Both sets operate identically as described in the source select section.
Macros
• Pressing each of the two Macro buttons delegates two rows of source
selectors to macro functionality.
• Pressing a macro causes it to execute.
• To learn a macro, use the macro editing buttons on the system bar.
• The two four-digit displays show MCRO.
Note The other buttons are not used.

Transition Control
Overview
Figure 57. Kayenne XL Transition Panel
Limit User DPM EMEM Trans

Next Rate
Key1 Key1
Cut Auto
Key2 Key1
Cut Auto
Key3 Key2
Cut Auto
Bgd Key Key Key Key Key Key
1 2 3 4 5 6
Key4 Key3
Cut Auto
Misc Misc Key Blk Loop Trans
1 2 Prior Pst PVW
Key5 Key5
Cut Auto
Mix Wipe K- Add iDPM eDPM eDPM
Wipe 1 2
Key6 Key6
Cut Auto
Cut Auto
Figure 58. Kayenne XL Transition Panel - Module Detail 1
Dedicated buttons for Cut and Auto

Keyer transitions.

Transition Control
• Limit 
Set , Enable and disable Transition Limit.
• User Next
Not yet implemented.
• DPM
Delegate DPM Transition to Lever/Fader Arm.
• EMEM
Delegate EMEM Transition to Lever/Fader Arm.
• Trans Rate
Enable Transition entries.
Split Lever/Fader Arm with

progress bars.
Available Transitions Types.
Note Key Wipe is only available when Multimix is enabled.

• Key Prior
Dissolve from ”Current” to ”Next” Priority stack.
• Blk Pst
Enable ”Black Preset transition”.
• Loop
Determines if eDPM transitions remain in signal path.
• Trans PVW
Enables Transition PVW for the next transition on designated PVW out.
Source Name Display for selected crosspoint on designated Bus/M/E .

Source on Program-Bus, Preset-Bus, Utility1- and Utility2-Bus.
Source Name Display for selected crosspoint on designated Bus/M/E.

Source on : Key-Fill Bus 1-6 and Key-Key Bus 1-6.

Transition Control
Selectable Transition Components. Misc 3 - 6 components are available via

Menu. For multiple selections press designated buttons simultaneously or
you can select and deselect multiple components while pressing and
holding one of the components and add others by single selections.
Transition Type for Background Transition.
Keyer indicators for ”On Air” and DPM Loops.

Display shows the Key Priority.
Individual Transition Types for Key Transitions while MultiMix is enabled.
Key-Key Bus 1-6

Transition Control
Cut and Auto Transition for all selected components enabled/selected

for ”Next Transition”.
Transition Duration Rate (used by Auto) for selected components

enabled/selected for ”Next Transition”.
Transition Elements
The Key 1 – 6 and BGD buttons select the elements that will change during
the next transition. Pressing these buttons does not change the current
output of the switcher, but prepares for a change (the next transition).
Pressing one transition element button automatically turns off the others in
this group. More than one transition element can be selected by holding
down one button while pressing another in the group. Elements not
selected remain in their current state when the transition is performed. For
example, if Key 1 is on and is not selected as part of the next transition, it
will remain on during and after the transition.
The BGD button selects a change in the background buses. The result will be
a transition from the current source on the PGM bus to the source selected
on the PST bus. After the transition, the buses will flip-flop, so the PGM bus
always remains the on-air bus. The PGM bus selection remains the back-
ground source if this button is not selected as part of the next transition.
The Key 1 - 6 buttons select the keyers that will be involved in the next tran-
sition. The keys currently visible on the output of the switcher are identi-
fied by the On indicator lights below each button. Note that a key may be on
but not visible (for example, half way through a preset black transition).
The Key Prior button selects a change in the key priority. The layering order
(stack) of the keys will transition from the current stack to a new stack spec-

ified by the operator. The new key priority stack is defined using the Keyers
subpanel or via a menu.
Transition Types
The DPM, Mix, and Wipe transition type buttons select what type of transi-
tion will be used on the elements selected above for the next transition.
Pressing these buttons does not change the appearance of the current
output of the switcher. Only one transition type can be selected at a time.
• The DPM button is only available for Key Transitions. If the Background
is selected for next transition in combination with keyers, the back-
ground will perform an add/mix/wipe transition, depending on the
last transition type selected prior to the DPM selection. This type will
be indicated in the display above the BGD button.
The behavior of a DPM Key Transition is as follows:
In a mix/wipe transition the Lever Arm or the Auto Trans control the video
amount of the keyer. In a DPM transition the Lever Arm or the Auto Trans con-
trols the timeline of the DPM effect selected for this keyer.
When the key was off at transition start, the video amount of the keyer is
fully switched on at transition start, allowing to fly the key in.
When the key was on at transition start, the video amount of the keyer is
fully switched off at the end of the transition, allowing to fly the key out.
Note The DPM effects used for transitions should be built in a way that the last key-
frame is out of screen or size zero.
• The Mix button selects a mix as the next transition.

• The Wipe button selects a wipe as the next transition. Each wipe is pre-
defined using either the complex wipe generators or the Utility buses
as the wipe shape. Wipe pattern selections are made in the Wipe menu.

Transition Control
Performing Transitions
The Cut and Auto Trans buttons and the Transition Lever Arm are used to
perform main transitions. After a transition completes, the background
source selections flip-flop, readying the PST bus for the next source selec-
tion. The progress of a transition is indicated by the LED bars beside the
lever arms.
The Cut button instantaneously replaces the selected elements with their
new sources or states, regardless of the transition type selected. The button
will light briefly to confirm the operator's action.
The Auto Trans button starts an automatic transition of a predetermined

rate. The button will light during the transition. Pressing Auto Trans a
second time during a transition stops the transition at that point. The tran-
sition can then be completed by pressing the button a third time or by
moving the Transition Lever Arm to its opposite limit or by pressing the Cut
button.
The Transition Lever Arm is used to manually perform a transition. You can
move the lever in either direction to run a transition due to the flip-flop
architecture of the buses. Moving the lever from one limit to the other per-
forms a complete transition. It is possible to start a transition with the lever,
then stop moving the lever at any point, reverse its direction, and even
return it to the original limit without completing the transition.
If the Transition Lever Arm is not in an end position when recalling an effect
or performing an Auto Trans, the lever arm is resynchronized by recalcu-
lating the resting lever arm way to complete the transition in the direction
of the arrow. Moving the lever arm in the opposite direction enable the
operator to resynchronize the arm to an end position without affecting the
output signal.
Preset Black
The Preset Black button modifies a main transition so that it will go through
black, instead of going directly to the new state. This is an alternate action
button (pressed to turn it either on or off). The Preset Black button lights
when it has been selected.
Two successive transition commands (Auto Trans button, or Transition Lever

Arm action) are used for a complete preset black transition.
The first command transitions the switcher to black (first stage). When in
black, both the PGM and PST bus selections will go low tally. The second
command transitions from black to the final stage, completing the preset
black transition.
The preset black function is canceled automatically at the end of the second
transition.

The transition type can be changed when the M/E has reached its first
preset black stage, allowing for example a wipe to and a mix from preset
black. While in preset black, the key ON indicators report the states the
keys will have when the second transition command completes. The keys
involved can be changed at this time, if desired. The source on the PST bus
can also be changed while in the preset black stage.
A preset black transition can be canceled by pressing the Preset Black button
a second time. If cancelled while at the preset black stage, the system will
switch back the original signal. Pressing a source button on the PGM bus
will also cancel a preset black transition. The source pressed on the A bus
will immediately be placed on air without any keys, even if the next transi-
tion had specified key changes.
Transition Preview
The transition preview feature enable a main transition to be previewed
without affecting the program output. A transition preview cannot be per-
formed if the Transition Lever Arm or main transition is off limit, if an auto
transition is in progress, or when Preset Black has been selected.
Pressing Trans Pvw routes the main transition video to preview output and
disables program transitions on that M/E, leaving the existing program
output unchanged. Pressing Auto Trans or moving the Transition Lever Arm
with Trans Pvw active will show the transition only on preview, allowing the
setting of wipe parameters or adjusting auto transition times before actu-
ally performing that transition. Transition preview overrides whatever
preview mode is currently selected.
Transition preview may be canceled at any time by pressing the lit Trans
Pvw button. If an auto transition preview is in progress, it will be aborted.
If the transition lever arm was used for the transition preview, canceling the
preview part way through will cause the lever arm to resynchronize by
recalculating the resting lever arm way to complete the transition in the
direction of the arrow. Moving the lever arm in the opposite direction
enable you to resynchronize the arm to an end position without affecting
the output signal.
Transition Rates
Auto transition rates are set using the Trans Rate button at Transition panel
and keypad located at the Local EMEM panel.
When the Trans Rate button is pressed, the Auto button in the Main Transi-
tion subpanel and the six Key1 - 6 Mix buttons will flash and the display in
the local EMEM subpanel prompts ”select component”. A flashing button
indicates the status of this component unselected. Select the components
where you would like to change the Transition Duration, enter the new

Transition Control
Transition Rate using the numeric key pad at local EMEM panel and press
the save button. All selected components (Status for selected is a none
flashing button) are now changed to the new Transition Rate.
Other Transition Control Interactions

The Transition Lever Arm can be used in combination with the Auto Trans or
Cut button to perform a main transition. For example, you can start the tran-
sition by moving the lever off its limit, and finish the transition by pressing
Auto Trans. Moving the lever part way, then pressing Cut will complete the
transition with a cut. The lever arm will be resyncronized by recalculating
the resting lever arm way to complete the transition in the direction of the
arrow. Moving the lever arm in the opposite direction enable you to resyn-
cronize the arm to an end position without affecting the output signal.

Positioner Subpanel
Figure 73. Multifunction Panel
The Positioner subpanel is used to control positioner functions of the

Digital Picture Manipulator image and wipe pattern placement, size, angle,
and other attributes in conjunction with the menus for the Digital Picture
Manipulator.
The positioner is particularly suitable for adjusting position and rotation

parameters and can also be used to select a color from an image (for
example, chroma key backing color) using an on-screen cursor.
Operating the positioner subpanel involves delegating a resource and a set

of associated parameters to the positioner. The positioner then provides
control of the delegated parameter values.

Positioner Subpanel
Positioner
The system positioner is a precision three-axis device. Moving the posi-
tioner towards or away from you controls the Y-axis, moving the joystick
left and right controls the X-axis, and rotating the joystick controls the Z
axis.
Figure 74. Positioner

Y Axis
Joystick Button
X Axis
Z Axis
0618_02_73_r0
Positioner Button
The Positioner button on the top of the Joystick can be used to accelerate the
change of the delegated parameter, to enable quicker placement on the
screen. The Positioner button is also used to pick a backing color when auto
setting up a chroma key.
Positioner Delegation
Because the Positioner is used for many different functions, multiple stages
of delegation can be required to access and control a specific set of param-
eters.
There are two ways of delegation:

• Delegation by menu: A selection in the menu delegates the corre-
sponding digipots parameters to the positioner, if the parameters are
suitable to be positioner controlled.
• Delegation by hardware buttons: The Positioner subpanel has 4 main
delegation buttons. These buttons are used for delegation in combina-
tion with delegation buttons in other subpanels of the switcher.

DPM (Digital Picture Manipulator)

The DPM button can be combined with the delegation buttons Key1 - 6 in the
Keyer Subpanel. To toggle through the different sets of parameters of an
corresponding DPM channel (Digital Picture Manipulator), just press the
DPM button or the relative Key Delegation button several times. Since there
are a lot of sets of parameters per DPM channel, it can be more efficient to
use the menu delegation to delegate a specific set of parameters.
Key Wipe, Wipe1, Wipe2

These wipe generator buttons can be combined with the delegation buttons
Key1-4 in the Keyer Subpanel and the Wipe button in the Transition Sub-
panel.
There are different location/size parameters per wipe generator for every
point of use. For example, Wipe1 can be used as background transition color
wash control for the background wipe border pattern key inhibit or force
mask color wash control for the keyer matte.
If you combine a wipe generator button with one of the other delegation
buttons, the system checks whether there is a point of use for the corre-
sponding wipe generator. In this case the corresponding set of parameters
is delegated to the Positioner.
Pressing the Keyer Delegation button (or the wipe transition button) repeat-
edly toggles through the different points of use of the wipe generator for
the selected delegation.
Pressing the wipe generator button repeatedly toggles through all points of
use of the delegated wipe generator.
Pressing down more than one delegation button at the same time delegates
the Positioner to control multiple objects simultaneously.
The display in the Positioner Subpanel always shows the delegated set of
parameters and the point of use.
The Auto Delegation Function can be disabled by the Delegate Lock button.
Axis Lock Buttons

Activating the X, Y, and Z axis lock buttons individually or in any combina-
tion locks parameter changes for the selected axes. For example, if the X
button is active while the Positioner is moved, then only Y and Z axis deflec-
tion can be performed. Axis locking also applies to centering functions.
The Center button is used to apply the default (center) value to the delegated
parameter.

Local EMEM
Local EMEM
Figure 75. Local EMEM Kayenne XL Package
The Local EMEM subpanel is a multi-purpose section of the control panel.

To perform the different tasks, the subpanel has six delegation buttons:
• EMEM
Store, edit, recall EMEM registers
• DELG
Delegation of the panel row to the logical Mainframe M/E
• DPM
Store, edit, recall DPM effects
• MaKe
Record, play macros
• Ram
Store, recall RamRecorder stills, play RamRecorder clips
• Key Hold#
If enabled the Key cross bar (key and fill sources) will not changed by
EMEM recall
• Bgd Hold#
If enabled the program and preset cross bar will not changed by EMEM
recall
• Auto Recall
If enabled EMEMs will be recalled and played as they were stored or
edited. The EMEM will play to that Define Memo which is stored
within EMEMs. 
If disabled EMEM will play according to the current setting of Define
Memo.
• Undo
Undo recalls the state before the last EMEM recall.
• Auto/Abort
If a EMEM is selected and then the Auto button is pressed, the selected
EMEM will be played in the Trans Rate given Transition Duration.
Abort will stop a current running time line.
• Cut/Pause
Cut recalls a selected EMEM immediately.
Pause pauses a running time line at the current position and if Pause is
pressed again the timeline will continue their end position.

Local EMEM
Panel Delegation
Figure 76. Panel Delegation
Figure 76 on page 117 shows a Local EMEM module delegated to Panel

Delegation. This module is in a 2 M/E Panel and connected to and 2.5 M/E
Kayak HD.
Pressing the light blue colored DELEG button delegates the module to Panel
Delegation mode, showing M/E1 through M/E4 plus PP for the four
bottom most rows of the panel surface. If there are less than 4 stripes, then
only the appropriate number of rows will be shown. If there are more than
four stripes, then a push of the DELEG button will show the M/E delega-
tions for those additional stripes.
In Panel delegation mode all buttons are colored low tally white if the M/E
exists in the suite, otherwise the buttons are off. Current selections are high
tallied with the defined M/E color.
All button rows are radio buttons. Pressing a button delegates that row of
the panel to the selected M/E.
It is possible to have the same selection on more than one row.

Panel Memory
Figure 77. Panel Memory
Figure 77 on page 118 shows a local EMEM module delegated to Panel

Memory, and Register 2 was recalled in Direct Mode.
The local EMEM module is delegated to the panel memory function by
pressing the Panel Mem button. Panel Memory can be used to readily
change bus row delegations for a single M/E stripe, or to change M/E del-
egations and M/E bus row delegations for several (or all) M/E stripes
simultaneously.
There are 99 panel memory registers which are shared for the workplace.
The use of the Panel Memory is similar to EMEM operation (recall, store,
Direct Mode, etc.).

Local EMEM
DPM (Digital Picture Manipulator)

In DPM mode the local EMEM panel serves for recalling and editing DPM
effects. For general information on the DPM structure in the Kayak HD
system, refer to DPM Menu on page 510.
Recalling a Register
Effects can be recalled in two different modes:
• Register Mode is an input mode for the register number in the Effects
subpanel, in which the number is entered in one-digit (0 ... 9) or two-
digit format (10 ... 99) Subsequently the Cut button is pressed. Do not
use the Enter button for confirmation.
• Direct Mode is an input mode for the register number in the Effects sub-
panel. The bank number 0 ... 9 corresponds to the tens digit of the reg-
ister number. When the units digit of the register number is entered, the
corresponding effect is recalled immediately.
To run an effect in either mode, just press the Cut button.
Note In register mode the first press of the Cut button (after you have entered the
digits) recalls the effect. The next press of the Cut button runs the effect.
While the effect is running, consecutive pressing of the Cut button toggles
between Pause and Play.
For more detailed run controls please use the menu.
Enabling and Disabling Direct Mode

The Direct Mode permits access to a stored effect with a single key (hotkey).
The bank number is the tens digit of the register. The hotkeys are the units
digits of the register. The Direct Mode may be enabled during storing, but
this does not have any particular benefit.
Enabling Direct Mode

The Drc button toggles between on and off. If the direct mode is on, the Bnk
button becomes active. Press this button to select a bank.
Example: EFF 05 eff05 ----
Disabling Direct Mode

Press the lighting Drc button.

Display
If no editing function or store function is selected, the ?? digit display of the
subpanel may show the following indications:
• Register 24 is selected. The register is empty: iDPM24 ----
• Register 5 is selected. The register contains an effect and has no partic-
ular name: iDPM05 eff05
• Register 5 is selected. The register contains an effect with the name
ABCDEFGH: iDPM05 ABCDEFGH
Note The name can only be entered in the menu.
Selecting a Register for Storing / Editing

When you press the Store or the Edit button, the current register is
prompted in the display. If you want to use this register, just press the Enter
button for confirmation. Or select another register by entering a one- or
two-digit number onthe numeric keypad and press the Enter button.
If you wish to select the next free register, press the FREE button.
Edit
Select the register as the current one.
Store
Select the register as the current one, clear the register and insert one key-
frame with the current state of the enabled Digital Picture Manipulators.
During edit mode the digit buttons of the numeric keypad have the fol-
lowing functions (see figure below):

Local EMEM
Figure 78. Editing Mode
To leave the edit mode, just press the Save or Cnl button.
Deleting a Register
1. Press Clear.
2. Select other register (0 ... 99). Only if not already displayed.
3. Press Enter
The buttons Auto Recall, Undo, Auto/Abort do not have a function in DPM
mode.
RamRecorder
In Ram Mode, the Effects Subpanel serves to control the internal RamRe-
corders.
To select the desired RamRecorder channel for control, either toggle
through the channels by repeatedly pressing the Ram button, or hold down
the Ram button and select the related channel number.

EMEM
In EMEM mode the subpanel serves for storing and recalling switcher sta-
tuses and processes.
Figure 79. Local EMEM
EMEM thus permits storing and recalling individually prepared operating

statuses and timelines with different background, key sources, borders,
wipe pattern positioning, coloring, etc.
The memo system is used for storing and recalling static settings (statuses,
snapshots) and interpolated timelines.
The snapshots and timelines are identified with numbers (Register 0 ... 99).
EMEM can be operated in two ways:

• Operation via the buttons of the Effects panel section
• Operation via the menu panel
The number of keyframes in a timeline is only limited by the storage

capacity of the respective switcher computer and the number of mixing
levels and storable functions. The operator can edit a timeline in order to
produce more sophisticated effects.

Local EMEM
Definition of Terms
Table 2. Terms and Definitions

Term Definition
SNAPSHOT (SNAP) Switcher status or the status of a switcher part.
KEYFRAM/E (KF) Static switcher status within one timeline.
TIM/ELINE (TIML) Stored sequence of switcher statuses (keyframes).
DISSOLVE Dissolve between static switcher statuses.The analogue values are dissolved,
the switching functions are switched at the end of the dissolve procedure.
DISSOLVE TIM/E Time for dissolving between two static switcher statuses.
STORE Storing of a static switcher status.
RECALL Reproduction of a stored static switcher status.
EDITING (EDIT) Creation or the processing of a timeline outside real-time.
PLAY Play of a stored timeline.
TRAJECTORY “Trajectory” between keyframes.
REGISTER Memory location where a snapshot or a timeline can be stored. Registers are
identified with a number between 0 ... 99.
REGISTER MODE Input mode for the register number in the Effects subpanel, in which the
number is entered in one digit (0 ... 9) or in two digits (10 ... 99) followed by
functional selections such as Enter, Cut or Auto.
Direct Mode Input mode for the register number in the Effects subpanel. The bank number
0 ... 9 corresponds to the tens digit of the register number. When the units
digit of the register number is entered, the corresponding snapshot or time-
line is triggered immediately.
The Store, Bank and Edit buttons have different functions in the various
operations.

Display
If no editing function or store function is selected, the ?? digit display of the
subpanel may show the following indications:
Register 24 is selected REG 24

Register 05 is selected. The register SNAP 05 SN05 ----
contains a snapshot and has no
particular name.
Register 05 is selected. The register SNAP 05 ABCD EFGH
contains a snapshot with the name
“ABCDEFGH”. The name can only
be entered in the menu.
Register 16 is selected. The register TL 16 TL16 ----
contains a timeline and has no
particular name.
Register 16 is selected. The register TL 16 KLMN OPQR
contains a timeline with the name
“KLMNOPQR”. The name can only
be entered in the menu.
Enabling and Disabling Direct Mode

The Direct Mode in the EMEM panel permits access to a stored snapshot or
timeline with a single button (hotkey). The bank number is the tens digit of
the register. The hotkeys are the units digits of the register. The Direct Mode
may be enabled during storing, but this does not have any particular ben-
efit.
Enabling Direct Mode

The Drc button toggles between on and off. If the direct mode is on, the Bnk
button becomes active. Press this button to select a bank.
Example: snap b05 sn05 ----
Disabling Direct Mode

Press the lighting Drc button.

Local EMEM
Selecting a Register While Storing

During the storing of snapshots or timelines the register to be used for
storage must be selected. The procedure is the same for both cases.
However, the indication in the display differs:
For Snapshots STOR
For Timelines EDIT
If the register number is to be taken over that was shown before the actua-
tion of the Store or Edit button, no further selection is necessary.
During storing, the contents of the register is overwritten.
If you wish to select the next free register, press the FREE button.
If you wish to select a particular register, enter a one- or two-digit number

with the numeric keypad. Errors can be deleted with Clear.
Note Should the register be assigned, the contents is overwritten when storing.
Selecting a Register While Recalling

When a snapshot or a timeline is recalled, there are several ways to select a
corresponding register.
If the register shown in the display is to be used, no further selection is nec-

essary.
To select the next used register, press the NEXT button.To select a particular
register, enter a one- or two-digit number with the numeric keypad. If a
two-digit number is entered (for eyample, 15), the related register (1)
appears in the display when the first digit (1) has been entered. The desired
register (15) appears after the input of the second digit.
The input of the figures need not be confirmed with Enter.
Storing a Snapshot
1. Set the switcher in the desired operation mode.
2. Set Define memo.
3. Press Store.
4. Select register with numeric key pad.
5. Press Enter.

Deleting Snapshots and Timelines

1. Press Clear.
2. Select other register (0 ... 99). Only if not already displayed.
3. Press Enter.
Dissolve Functions Depending on Snapshot or Timeline Preselection
Table 3. Table Dissolve Functions

Button Snapshot preselected Timeline preselected
Auto Dissolve to the snapshot in the time Playing the timeline in the time set
set with Trans dur. with Trans dur.
Cut or Hotkey in Direct Mode Recall the snapshot Playing the timeline in the stored time.
Note Timelines that contain an endless loop or that are waiting for an event (GPI,
Time) can be recalled only with Cut.
Other Button Functions
Trans Dur
Entry of the Auto transition duration.
1. Press T-Dur button.
2. Select transition components in Transition Module.
3. Enter transition duration with numeric keypad.
4. Complete the entry with Enter or cancel the operation with Cancel.
Auto Recall
When Auto Recall is active, the recall of a snapshot or timeline will restore
the Define Memo in the same state, which was active when the register was
stored.
Undo
If you press this key, the status before the last recall of a snapshot or a time-
line can be restored even if several other operations have been performed
in the meantime.

Local EMEM
Cut / Pause
Function of the button:
• If the EMEM is not playing a timeline and a snapshot register is
selected, Cut recalls the snapshot.
• If the EMEM is not playing a timeline and a timeline register is selected,
Cut starts playing the timeline.
• If the EMEM is playing a timeline, Cut pauses playing the timeline;
another Cut continues playing the timeline.
• If the EMEM is playing a timeline and the timeline is waiting, Cut con-
tinues playing the timeline.
Auto / Abort
Function of the button:
• If the EMEM is not playing a timeline and a snapshot register is
selected, Auto interpolates to the snapshot in a fixed period of time (Set
by Trans Dur).
• If the EMEM is not playing a timeline and a timeline register is selected,
Auto starts playing the timeline in a fixed period of time. This only
works if the timeline has no endless loops or waits and a transition
duration other than 0 has been selected.
• If the EMEM is playing a timeline, Auto aborts playing the timeline. A
timeline played with Auto cannot be stopped/continued with Cut.
Timeline Editing
Components of a Timeline
A timeline is stored as a chain of keyframes with related transitions
between the keyframes and other timeline objects (for example, waits, trig-
gers).
Figure 80. Components of Timeline
Keyframe 2 Keyframe n
Keyframe 1 Keyframe 3
t H = Waiting or Hold Time

tH
8447_24r0
t T = Transition Time

The dissolve between the keyframes is set to linear for default.
In the display of the Effects subpanel the following components of a time-

line can be displayed:
Timeline start symbol Start

Timeline end symbol End
Internal stored keyframe Kfnnn
Ext. stored keyframe, snapshot in SNnn
register nn
Ext. stored timeline, timeline in TLnn
register nn
Loop begin symbol Loop
Loop end symbol ELoop
Wait for a user input User
Wait for a number of frames Hold
Wait for a special time of day TOD
Wait for a special timecode of a conn. TC
machine
Trigger MaKE Memo nn of the panel MaKnn
where the timeline was stated
Wait for GPI n GPIn
Wait for GPO n GPOn
Trigger external GPO n EGPOn
Wait for panel GPI n PGPIn
Trigger panel GPO n PGPOn
Trigger GPI n TGPIn
TMC stop Stop
TMC play Play
TMC record Rec
TMV variable Var
TMC fast rewind Frew
TMC fast forward Ffwd
TMC cue to specified timecode Cue
TMC cue to in point CueIn
TMC cue to out point CueOut
TMC joggle Jog
TMC step Step
Due to a limited number of buttons only some of the objects described

above can be inserted and edited by the Effects subpanel. For full timeline
edit control please use the menu panel.

Local EMEM
Generating a Timeline
To generate a timeline, the following steps must be done:
1. Ensure that no transition or anything else is running at the EMEM.
2. Press Edit.
3. Select register.
4. Press Enter.
5. Insert timeline objects (such as keyframes or loops).
6. Press Edit.
The timeline is stored as a chain of keyframes, snapshots, or loops with

related dissolves (transitions) between the keyframes.
Modifying a Timeline
The following procedure is used for all modifications of a timeline:
1. Ensure that no transition or anything else is running at the EMEM.
2. Press Edit.
3. Select Register.
4. Press Enter.
5. Insert, delete, or modify timeline objects (such as keyframes or loops).
6. Press Edit.
The timeline is stored as a chain of keyframes, snapshots, and loops

with related dissolves (transitions) between the keyframes.
Note Modifications of an existing timeline always relate to the last timeline object
indicated in the display.

Functionality of the Buttons in the Edit Mode
Note Modifications of an existing timeline always relate to the last timeline object
indicated in the display. This object is the currently selected timeline object.
Table 4. Edit Mode Button Functions

Button Functionality
INS Inserts a keyframe (with the related transition) in the timeline.
The functionality depends on the type of the currently selected timeline object.
KF: The selected keyframe is changed to the current state of the switcher.
LOOP: Change of the loop counter 
MOD (000 = endless loop).
ELOOP: Change of the loop counter 
(000 = endless loop).
Deletes the currently selected timeline object. Depending on the type of the timeline object
there are the following relationships.
DEL LOOP: The related ELOOP object will also be deleted.
ELOOP: The related LOOP object will also be deleted.
Changes the hold time of the selected snapshot or keyframe. The default hold time is always 0
HTM frames.
Changes the transition time of the selected keyframe object. The default transition time is set
TTM to the current transition duration of snapshot dissolves.
Changes the trajectory of the selected transition object. Possible are Linear, S-Linear, Curve,
TRJ S-Linear to Pause, and Curve to Pause.
The button permits a successive selection of the individual objects of a timeline. Changes the
<-- cursor position to the previous object.
With the VIEW function enabled (button lights up) the switcher is switched to the status stored
VIEW in the keyframe.
The button permits a successive selection of the individual objects of a timeline. Changes the
--> cursor position to the next (following) object.
BEG The button BEG enables you to jump to the begin of a timeline.
If the currently selected object is not inside of a loop (button LOOP is off), a loop
object will be inserted before the currently selected object. The related ELOOP object is
LOP inserted before the next LOOP or ELOOP object or at the end of the timeline. The cursor will be
set to the ELOOP object. If the currently selected object is inside of a loop, the ELOOP object
is moved to the current cursor position.
The button END enables you to jump to the end of a timeline. While changing times, etc. it
END serves always for confirmation.

Local EMEM
Changing the Hold Time of a Snapshot or Keyframe

The following procedure is used:
1. Select Keyframe / Snapshot (button <-- and -->).
2. Press HTM.
3. Enter hold time with numeric keypad.
4. Press Enter.
Note Errors can be deleted with Clear.
Changing the Transition Time of a Snapshot or Keyframe

1. Select transition object.
2. Press TTM.
3. Enter transition time with numeric keypad.
4. Press Enter.
Inserting a Loop in a Timeline

If a loop is inserted in the Effects subpanel, always an endless loop (loop
counter = 000) is inserted for default. To change the loop counter, follow the
steps in the section Modifying a Loop in an Existing Timeline on page 132.
Note It is possible to insert loops (max. 99) into other loops. This functionality is
only available with the menu operation.
Entering a Loop During the Generation of a Timeline

1. Enter last timeline object before the loop.
2. Press LOOP.
3. Enter first timeline object in the loop.

Note The loop end is before the next ELOOP or LOOP object or the end of the time-
line if no other loop follows. If the button LOOP is pressed before the end of
the loop, the ELOOP object is moved to that position in the timeline. If the
loop is an endless loop, the timeline ends with the end of the loop.
Inserting a Loop in an Existing Timeline

1. Select the timeline object after which the loop should start, or select the
transition before which the loop should start.
2. Press LOOP.
Note The loop end is before the next ELOOP or LOOP object or the end of the time-
line if no other loop follows. If the button LOOP is pressed before the end of
the loop, the ELOOP object is moved to that position in the timeline. If the
loop is an endless loop, the timeline ends with the end of the loop.
Modifying a Loop in an Existing Timeline

1. Shift LOOP or ELOOP indication to the end of the display.
2. Press MOD.
3. Enter the loop counter value with the numeric keypad.
4. Press Enter.
If the loop counter is 000, the loop is an endless loop.
Delete a Loop in an Existing Timeline

1. Shift LOOP or ELOOP indication to the end of the display.
2. Press DEL.
Note The related end or the begin of the loop is also deleted.

Local EMEM
Delete a Timeline object in an Existing Timeline

1. Shift the timeline object to delete to the end of the display (Buttons <--
and -->) Press DEL.

Macro
In Macro mode the Effects Subpanel serves for recording and playing Panel
Macros. The total number of registers available for macros is 96.
Figure 81. Kayenne XL Local EMEM
Selecting a Register for Record Start

For record start of a macro the register to be used for storage must be
selected.
Press the Store button.
The display prompts.

RECORD
• If the register number is to be taken over that shown before the actua-
tion of the Store button, no further selection is necessary.
Note During recording the contents of the register is overwritten.
• If you wish to select the next free register, press the FREE button.
• If you wish to select a particular register, enter a one- or two-digit
number with the numeric keypad. Errors can be deleted with Clear.

Local EMEM
Note Should the register be assigned, the contents is overwritten.With the start of
the recording
Confirm the register selection by pressing the Enter button.
Now the recording of the macro starts, while the Store button starts
blinking. All keystrokes executed on the panel are recorded. Pressing the
blinking Store button again stops the recording.
Note When you execute any macro action in the Misc Bus Section, the recording
is stopped automatically. Changing the delegation of the Effects Subpanel to
for example, EMEM does not stop the recording. This enable you to include
EMEM recalls and machine control commands into the macro.
Note Recorded macros are named by default as M001 – M096.
Recalling a Macro
For recalling a macro there are two basic ways to select a corresponding
register.
Register Mode
If the register shown in the display is to be used, no further selection is nec-
essary.
• To select the next used register, press the NEXT key.
• To select a particular register, enter a one- or two-digit number with the
numeric keypad. If a two-digit number is entered (for example, 15), the
related register (1) appears in the display when the first digit (1) has
been entered. The desired register (15) appears after the input of the
second digit.
After the selection press the Cut button to play the macro.
Direct Mode
In Direct Mode registers are treated in groups of ten. Such a group is called
a bank. The display below shows, for example, register 7 of bank 4. This is
equivalent to register 47 in Register Mode. Each digit button in the keypad is
now a hotkey. Pressing digit button 3 will directly recall macro 43. To select
another bank, press the Drc button and press one of the digit buttons,for
example pressing digit button 2 would switch to bank 2, giving direct
access to the macros 20 through 29.
In Direct Mode the NEXT button advances to the next used register in the
bank, but in contrast to Register Mode the macro is directly recalled. This
enable you to recall a stack of up to ten macros by repeatedly pressing the
same button.

The Direct Mode may be enabled during recording but this does not have
any particular benefit.
Pressing the Drc button toggles between Register Mode and Direct Mode.
Note Buttons Edit, Auto Recall, Undo, Auto/Abor: No functionality in Make Mode.
Panel Lock Function

The local EMEM Module provides also a Lock function for the complete
workplace (Control Panel and Kayenne XL Menu):
• Hold down the EMEM button and press the unlabled button left to the
Cut/Pause button.
• You can enter 0 (no digit) to 8 digits for your personal locking code and
press ENT.
• The panel will turn to Locked.
• To unlock the panel, enter your locking code again and press ENT.
In case you forgot the locking code there are two ways to unlock the panel:
• There is a universal unlocking code available, please contact our service
department.
• Reboot or power cycle the CPU.

Master EMEM
Master EMEM
In addition to the Master EMEM, EMEM system provides individual
EMEM systems for each M/E. Since the Local EMEM Modules are too lim-
ited, the Master EMEM module provides the possibility of delegating this
module to the local EMEMs, allowing extended editing capabilities.
The following two pictures show the different delegation modes for the
Recall Layouts.
Figure 82. Master EMEM Panel
Figure 82 on page 137 shows the Master EMEM button highlighted.
In this mode the buttons M/E1 through PP all are colored according the
M/E-colors, and in this example M/E2 is selected, allowing to set the
"DefineMemo" for the modules of M/E2. See for more details of Define-
Memo.

Figure 83. Master EMEM - Local EMEM Delegation
Figure 83 on page 138 shows the situation for Local EMEM delegation.
When you press the Local EMEM button, the last selected local EMEM dele-
gation is remembered. There are two ways to change the delegation to
another Local EMEM:
1. Press the Local EMEM button again to toggle through the M/Es.
2. Hold down the Local EMEM button: all available M/Es are low tally
colored.
3. Select a M/E and release both buttons.
For general EMEM operation see Local EMEM on page 115.

Master EMEM
The module has two delegations for the left part. You can delegate the
module to Define Memo using the DefM button (Figure 83 on page 138) or
you can delegate the module to page/bank selection (Figure 84 on
page 139) by pressing the DefM button again.
Figure 84. Master EMEM

Define M/EMO
The buttons M/E1 - PP and Aux - Misc Ext in the columns 1 and 2 are used to
delegate the softkeys of column 3 - 7 to the according subgroup of the
define memo. The buttons lit when at least one member of their subgroup
is selected. All subgroup members are on/off-toggles.
The All button toggles a complete subgroup on/off. When this button is
pressed while only some members are "on", the first press turns all
members "off".
Subgroup for PP, M/E1, M/E2, M/E3
Figure 85. Define Memo - Subgroup for PP, M/E1, M/E2, M/E3

Master EMEM
Subgroup for M/Eh
Figure 86. Define Memo - Subgroup for M/E-H

Subgroup Aux
Figure 87. Define Memo - Subgroup for Aux
There are more Sublevels available than buttons. You can toggle through
the pages by pressing the more button in that subgroup.

Master EMEM
Subgroup Router
Figure 88. Define Memo - Subgroup for Router

Subgroup Ram
Figure 89. Define Memo - Subgroup for RamRecorder

Master EMEM
Subgroup Misc Int
Figure 90. Define Memo - Subgroup for Misc Int

Subgroup Misc Ext
Figure 91. Define Memo - Subgroup for Misc Ext
Page/Bank Selection
This delegation is only available when the EMEM part of this module is in
Direct Mode.
The Page selection is currently disabled (reserved for future use); the 10
buttons in the last 2 rows show the currently selected bank.

Display Panel
Display Panel
Figure 92. Kayenne XL Display Panel
For details, refer to Menu Panel Description on page 256and Menu Structure
Overview on page 265.

Half M/E
The Half M/E is used as an additional M/E. In terms of routing it offers the
same possibilities as a full M/E. This includes the reentries in other M/Es.
The main restrictions are due to features not implemented, which is also the
reason to call it “Half M/E” (also referred to as “M/E-H”).
Feature Set of the Half M/E

Table 5. Feature Set of the Half M/E
Feature Set Not implemented Features
Field Dominance Wipe Transition
M/E Couple iDPM
Key Drop Chroma Key
Mix Transition Preset Pattern
DSK Transition RGB Correction
Black Preset (no Utility Inputs)
Transition Preview
Luminance Key
Memo (Master and M/E Memo)
Transition Abort
FTB Cancel
Clean Feed
Input Correction
Key Preview
FTB
eDPM Transition

Half M/E
Selecting Half M/E

Figure 93. Selecting Half M/EMachine Control
The Machine Control serves for controlling external machines. This can be
any type of device, which can be controlled by one of the machine control
protocols, such as video/audio tape machines, hard disk recorders, etc.
In addition all internal switcher components that behave like a tape

machine can be controlled (RamRecorder, eDPM, iDPM).

Overview
Figure 94. Machine Control Module
In status mode the display shows the current delegated machine/device,

the current loaded clip and the current timecode position. Dependening on
the delegated device type (for example, RAMRecorder) it shows additional
device related information.

Half M/E
Control Buttons
Figure 95. Machine Control Module Detail 2
After a device is assigned and a clip has been

pre-selected the Load button is used to load te
clip for playing.
Device assignment and clip selection is described later.
Device motion control functions (Rewind, Reverse, Still, Stop, Play, FastFor-
ward, Record) . The buttons Jog, Var and Shuttle will delegate the control
wheel automatically. To disable the wheel, press any other motion
command button.

• Goto 
Numeric Timecode entry. To cue to an IN or OUT mark, hold the Goto
button and press the related Mark In resp. Mark Out button.
• Mark In/Out 
Opens the numeric keypad with actual timecode displayed, which can
be confirmed or overwritten with a numeric entry. The default value for
the new mark is the current timecode position of the loaded clip. 
In addition the numeric keypad contains an entry to clear/reset the IN
or OUT mark. Use SOM (start of material) to clear the IN and EOM (end
of material) to clear the OUT mark.
Figure 98. Machine

Control Modul Detail 5
Indicates an activated Loop and/or Breakout-Mode. An activated Breakout

can be overruled with this button, once activated for a loaded clip inside a
RamRecorder channel.
Note These two buttons are currently only operational when the module is dele-
gated to a RamRecorder channel.

Half M/E
When a clip server or RamRecorder is selected, Prev and Next enable you to
step through the related clip list. Once a clip is selected, it is loaded imme-
diately.
Device selection section,

where former assigned
devices can be selected
for individual control.

Device settings buttons for changing device specific parameter. The func-
tion of these buttons depends on the type of selected device. For example a
RamRecorder device has other settings to control than an external disk
server.
• Page delegation buttons 1 - 4, 15 positions each individual MF selection

(not yet implemented).
• Clip Info for more detailed clip information.

Half M/E
Operation Modes
Machine Selection
Figure 103. Machine Control - Device Selection
Start with a blank Machine Control Module.
To assign a device to a certain device selection button, press and hold one
of the device selection buttons (marked with red dots).

Figure 104. Machine Control - Digipots
Turn upper digipot to select available devices. Confirm selection by

pressing the digipot.
• none = Delete current assignment.
• cncl = Cancel current dialog.

Half M/E
Operational Examples
Figure 105. Machine Control - Selected Device
Example for the delegation of an external machine (for example disk

server). In the example above, an external machine called "MP-1" is cur-
rently selected.
Device Setting buttons related to external devices:

• List
Update cliplist of selected device.
Note If a new clip has been locally created on an external device, or an existing clip
has been deleted, the cliplist has to be updated.
• Loop
Enable or disable Loop Mode for AMP controlled devices.

External VTR Delegation

The Kayenne XL Package supports control of up to 4 external VTRs (e.g.
disk server, betacams etc.) via a serial connection (RS422) and in addition
the control of up to 32 external VTRs over LAN (AMP protocol using
TCP/IP). All of these external VTRs can be fully controlled by the Machine
Control Module.
Before an external VTR becomes available in the device assignment section
of the module, it has to be selected in the installation menu of the Kayenne
XL Menu. For serial controlled VTRs, a port and a protocol has to be
selected. For VTRs which are controlled via LAN, the IP address and the
video channel of the external machine has to be selected. In addition a pro-
tocol has to be chosen (currently only the AMP protocol is available).
Within the Machine Control Module the short identification name for serial
controlled VTRs is "MS[1-4]". The long identifier is the name of the control-
ling protocol (e.g. "amp_v694", "vdcp_v670"). The short name for VTRs
which are controlled via LAN is "ML[1-32]". The long identification name
is "M-LAN[1-32]".
Figure 106. Machine Control - External VTR Delegation
Example for the delegation of an external machine which is controlled via

LAN (for example a K2 disk server).

Half M/E
Loading a Clip
While turning the upper right digipot the list of available clips in the
current working folder is shown (4 clips visible at once). The clip that is
showed on the first line is always the one that is currently pre-selected (also
marked by the "<-" sign). To load the pre-selected clip, the Load button has
to be pressed. To cancel the clip selection dialog without loading a clip,
press the upper right digipot.
Note While selecting a clip, the currently loaded clip is marked by the "*" sign.
For serial controlled VTRs press the List button when no clips are showed
while turning the upper right digipot.
Changing the Working Folder
Note This feature is only available for machines which are controlled over LAN.
While turning the lower right digipot the list of available folders is shown
(4 folders visible at once). The folder showed on the first line is always the
one that is currently pre-selected (also marked by the "<-" sign). To make the
pre-selected folder to the current working folder, press the LOAD button. To
cancel the folder selection dialog without changing the working folder,
press the lower right digipot.
Note While selecting a folder, the current working folder is marked by the "*" sign.
Device Settings buttons related to external VTRs:

• List
Update cliplist of selected device. This function is mainly used for serial
controlled VTRs. By pressing this button, the names and durations of
all clips which are available in the current working folder are trans-
ferred to the switcher XL system. This has to be done for instance on
system startup or after the working folder has been changed. 
For devices which are controlled over LAN, the cliplist is updated auto-
matically in most cases (e.g. change of working folder, startup).
Note If a new clip has been locally created on an external device, or an existing clip
has been deleted, the cliplist has to be updated manually - even on VTRs con-
trolled over LAN.
• Loop

Note On serial controlled VTRs (using the AMP protocol), the current IN and OUT
marks are ignored for the loop. In other words, a clip is always played from
SOM (start of material) to EOM (end of material) or vice versa. This also
applies to LAN controlled VTRs when the "Mark Control" feature is disabled.
If "Mark Control" is enabled (see "MCtl" section for details), the IN and OUT
marks are taken into account for the loop.
• ACue
When "Auto Cue" is enabled, a clip is automatically cued to its IN mark
after it is loaded by a snapshot or timeline recall.
• MCtl
The "Mark Control" feature is only available for VTRs which are con-
trolled over LAN. When "Mark Control" is enabled, the IN and OUT
marks stored within the metadata of a clip are controlled directly. In
other words, metadata of a clip can be changed. In combination with
the loop mode, a clip can be played in loop between its IN and OUT
marks. This kind of loop is completely controlled by the external
machine and therefore 'absolute accurate'.
Some More Details About IN/OUT Mark Handling

On serial controlled VTRs and on LAN controlled VTRs where "Mark Con-
trol" is disabled, the IN and OUT marks are totally clip independent and
stored within the Kayak frame once per machine. It's possible to set them
per keypad input or by grabbing the current timecode (see description of
related buttons for details). By holding the Goto button and pressing Mark
In or Mark Out, the machine cues to the related timecode. The IN and OUT
marks are not considered in loop mode.
On a LAN controlled VTR where "Mark Control" is enabled, the IN and

OUT mark handling is clip dependent. When a mark is changed (setting,
grabbing), the new value is stored within the metadata of the current
loaded clip. When a new clip is loaded, the stored marks are read from the
clip and copied to the current mark entries. The IN and OUT marks are
fully considered in loop mode.
Note When the current loaded clip is not located in the current working folder (e.g.
working folder has been changed after clip was loaded) and an IN or OUT
mark is changed, the working folder is also changed back to the one where
the clip is located.

Half M/E
Temporary Machine Delegation

A machine that has been assigned to a machine control group of the Sys-
tembar can be temporary delegated to the Machine Control Module for full
control:
• Select the desired device on the related machine control group.
• Press and hold Prev and Next simultaneously and press the Clip/Info
button on the Machine Control Module.
• To bring back the module to standard delegation, just select a device
within the device assignment section.

Recorder Delegation
Figure 107. Machine Control - RamRecorder Delegation
• Turn upper digipot to browse available clips.

• Turn lower digipot to browse available stills.
• Load selected clip/still by pressing the Load button.
• Clip position which will be loaded after confirmation of Load.

Half M/E
Figure 108. Machine Control - Clip Selection
Figure 109. Machine Control - Loaded Clip
Mark In/Out Loaded Clip TC-Position

Figure 105 on page 157 shows the indicator for audio groups available for
selected clip and playout assignment.
Example: "C > C" = Audio Group "C" exist's and played out (>) on group
"C".
Figure 110. Machine Control - Clip Info
While button Clip Info is pressed and held down, the status display is
showing additional clip information. The type and amount of information
depends on the selected device type. Figure 110 on page 164 shows the clip
information for an RamRecorder channel:
• Top row: Length of loaded clip.
• Upper middle row: Loop count, Bounce mode, Breakout mode.
• Lower middle row: Readout while in "Still" position, Readout while in
Play.
• Bottom row: Present Audio groups, Ram Channel Play mode.

Half M/E
Figure 111. Machine Control - Slow Motion
Live Slomo mode - not yet implemented!
Individually selectable Play modes per RamRecorder Channel.
Available modes are:

• Lower selection: VTR, Clip, Loop, Extended
• Upper selection: SuperSlomo speed 2x, 3x, 4x, 5x, 6x

Figure 112. Machine Control - Record
Individually selectable Record possibilities/adjustments for each RamRe-

corder Channel.
• New: Record new clip on next available position using specified RLen
(Record length).
• Edit: Allows to overwrite/append new content to existing clip using
specified Record length.
• ID: Preselecting clip record position.
• Dlay: Using selected channel(s) as Delay Line. Delay time = Record
length.
• Grab: Grabbing a still using selected channel(s) video input(s).

Half M/E
Figure 113. Machine Control - Loop
Adjustments for
Loop count (0 = endless/infinite), Loop on/off, Bounce on/off

Figure 114. Machine Control - Breakout
Adjustments for Breakout mode:

• Off: Breakout disabled
• In: Breakout forced to Mark In TC
• Out: Breakout forced to Mark Out TC
• Any: Breakout possible on Mark In and Mark Out TC

Half M/E
Figure 115. Machine Control - Readout
Readout modes for Still and Play:

• P-F1: Play Field-1
• P-F2: Play Field-2
• P-Fr: Play Frame
• P-12: Play Field-1/2
• S-F1: Still Field-1
• S-F2: Still Field-2
• S-Fr: Still Frame-3
• S-12: Still Field-1/2

Figure 116. Machine Control - Trimming
Adjustments for trimming:

• In: Allows you to Trim/Delete the "Inner" part between Mark In and
Mark Out.
• Out: Allows you to Trim/Delete the "Outer" part before Mark In and
after Mark Out

System Bars
System Bars
Overview
There are three lengths of system bar to accommodate the four basic
models of panel.
The System Bar is used for

• Switched Preview selection
• Macro Recording / Editing
• Machine Control
Figure 117. System Bar
Cue/ Play Prev Next ME ME ME ME PGM eDPM Attch Show Repl Delete Ins Rec
Load 1 2 3 h Enable Attch Attch Pause
Machine Control Group Switched Preview Macro Recording /Edting
The Kayenne XL control panel types are different:

• The 4, 3 and 2 M/E control panels (35 sources) have 6 machine control
groups.
• The 2 M/E panel (25 sources) has 6 machine control groups.
• The 1 M/E panel (15 sources) has 2 machine control groups.

Switched Preview
Before the Switched Preview feature can be used, an Aux Preview Bus has to
be defined and Auto Aux Preview has to be enabled. These parameters are set
within the Config/EBox menu. The Switched Preview buttons are used to
select the M/E output which is routed to the defined aux preview bus.
Figure 118. Switched Preview
When pressing the Switched Preview buttons (M/E1, M/E2, M/E3, M/E4,
PGM, eDPM), the following outputs will be 'toggled' per M/E:
• Main
• Out B
• Out C
• Out D
• Preview 1
• Preview 2
The button of the currently previewed M/E will be tallied high.
The last two buttons of the Switched Preview group are currently not used.

System Bars
Macro Recording / Editing

The macro editing buttons, described below work in conjunction with
source select rows delegated to macros. This delegation is performed by
using the MACRO button and the BUS SELECT buttons in the Source Selec-
tion Module. Further details of the row delegate processes is found in the
description of this module.
Figure 119. Macro Editing Section
Macro Building
• Record: 
Pressing this button enables the record process. Pressing a button on a
bus delegated to macros starts the recording. To be compatible with the
XTen/Kayak style of recording macros, it is also possible to hold the
Record button and press a button on a bus delegated to macros. While
the recording process the Record button blinks. It is terminated by
pressing the Record button again, or pressing the selected macro button
again.
• Insert Delay: 
While recording a macro, pressing this button changes the delegated
macro row to display time delay on the source name displays in incre-
ments of seconds and tenths of seconds (unshifted), or fields (shift level
1).
• Delete: 
To delete a recorded macro, hold this button and press a button on a bus
row delegated to macros. The related macro will be deleted, which is
indicated by a 'blank' macro name display.

Macro Attachment
• Attach Enable: 
Pressing this button turns the macro attachments ON and OFF macro
attachments. When OFF, all attached macros are disabled, and the
buttons revert to their original functionality.
• Show Attach: 
An ON/OFF toggle. When ON, all buttons which have a macro
attached flash.
• Replace Attach: To replace-attach pre-defined macros to a button:
1. Delegate the required bus rows to macros as needed.
2. Press the Replace Attach button. The Attach button tallies high.
3. Hold down a macro button.
4. Hold the button to which the macro is to be attached.
When the replace-attachment is done, the ReplaceAttach button tallies low.

To attach further macros, repeat steps 2 to 4.
To pre-attach a macro:
2. Hold down a macro button.
3. Hold the button to which the macro is to be attached for two seconds.
4. To check if the macro is attached, press Show Attach.
To post-attach a macro:
2. Hold down the button to which the macro is to be attached.
3. Hold the macro button for two seconds.
4. To check if the macro is attached, press Show Attach.
To delete a pre-attached macro:

1. Hold down the Delete button in the macro editing section.

System Bars
2. Hold down the button to which the macro is attached for two seconds.
3. To check if the macro has been deleted, press Show Attach.
To delete a post-attached macro:

1. Hold down the button to which the macro is attached.
2. Hold down the Delete button in the macro editing section for two
seconds.
3. To check if the macro has been deleted, press Show Attach.

Machine Control
Figure 120. Machine Control
There are 6 machine control groups on the system bar for panels with 35-
button source selectors.
Each machine control group has a 16-character display showing:

• Short machine identifier
• Selected clip/effect (in clip selection mode)
• Selected still (in still selection mode for RamRecorder channels)
• Selected folder (in folder selection mode for VTRs controlled via LAN)
• Current timecode (in timecode display mode)
Multiple Device Assignment

It is possible to associate one or more devices with a machine control group.
There are two ways to assign a device to a machine control group:
• Hold down Prev and Next buttons together and press (not hold) the
device selection button on the Machine Control module where the
device is assigned to.
• Hold down Prev and Next buttons together and press a source where a
machine is attached to in the Source Selection Module. Attaching a
machine to a source is done with the Kayenne XL Menu
(Config/EBox/Input/General).
If there is more than one device assigned to a machine control group, use
Prev, Next and Play to select a device for control ('bring it on top'):
• To select the next device in the list of assigned devices, hold Next and
press Play.
• To select the previous device in the list, hold Prev and press Play.

System Bars
Note The machines within the list of assigned devices are sorted in alphabetical
order
To remove a device from the list, do the following:

• Select the device ('bring it to top') as described in the previous section.
• Hold down Prev and Next buttons together and press (not hold) the
device selection button on the Machine Control module where the
device to remove is assigned to.
• Alternatively hold down Prev and Next buttons together and press a
source where the device to remove is attached on the Source Selection
Module.
Note Device assignments on machine control groups can be saved/loaded to/from

a Panel Memory registers.
Temporary Machine Delegation

A machine that has been assigned to a machine control window of the Sys-
tembar can be temporary delegated to the Machine Control Module for full
control. This feature is described in details within the Machine Control sec-
tion.
Machine Delegation Busses

In addition to the manual selection of machines within a list of assigned
device, it is possible to bring a device on top of a machine control group for
controlling by the 'Machine Delegation Busses' feature:
A Machine Delegation Bus is a ME or an Aux bus where sources (con-

taining attached machines) can be associated. This source association is
done in the Kayenne XL Menu (Config/EBox/Input/MachineDelegationBusses).
In the association process one ore more Machine Delegation Busses can be
assigned to an input source.
When an input source is selected on a ME or an Aux, the system checks if

the related bus is associated with the selected source and in addition it ver-
ifies if the source has a machine attached. If this is the case, it searches all
machines assigned to the machine control groups in the Systembar for the
attached machine and if found, it is brought on top for control.

Operational Example:
• Attach all RamRecorder channels to the related RamRecorder output
sources
• Assign all RamRecorder channels to one machine control group in the
Systembar
• Associate the desired ME bus (e.g. ME2 PGM) to the RamRecorder
output sources
From now on a RamRecorder channel can immediately be controlled on the

machine control group right after the related output source is selected on
ME2 PGM.
Prev/Next
• When there are clips on the assigned machine available, the Prev and
Next buttons are used to navigate through the list of clips.
• The clips are pre-selected (not loaded).
• When a RamRecorder channel is assigned to the machine control
group, pressing Prev and Next simultaneously changes to still selection
mode. In that mode the buttons are used to preselect RamRecorder
stills.
• When a machine that is controlled via LAN is assigned to the machine
control group, pressing Prev and Next simultaneously changes to folder
selection mode. In that mode the buttons are used to navigate between
the available folders on the external disk server. Pressing Prev and Next
again changes back to clip selection mode.
Cue/Load
• Pressing this button after a clip/still/effect/folder has been pre-
selected by Prev or Next causes a load command to be sent to the
device.
Note In folder selection mode, the selected folder will become the current working
folder. After switching back to clip selection mode, the machine control group
will then show the clips of the new working folder.
• The button is high-tally when the selected clip/still/effect is loaded

resp. when the selected folder is the current working folder.

System Bars
Play
• Pressing the Play button causes the device to play.
• Pressing the Play button while the device is playing causes the device to
Pause.
• The button high-tallies while the device is playing and goes low tally
when it stops.
• In clip and folder selection mode, Play has no function.
Timecode Display Mode

To bring a machine control group into Timecode Display Mode for the
current controlled device
• change to clip selection mode
• then hold Prev (or Next) and press Cue/Load
• do the same to switch back to clip selection mode.
Note Display modes are stored per assigned device (not per machine control
group).

Multi Function Control
Overview
The Multi Function module (MFM) gives access to the main parts of the
switcher. Each function in the Multi Function module is also available in
the Kayenne XL menu.
Figure 121. Multi Function Modul
In the Home menu those displays remain blank, except the display right
beneath the Joystick, which shows Home.
Once entering any Main Menu, the control philosophy is built from bottom
row selections, up to the top row selections - reflecting the control levels in
the inbuilt hierarchy.
The Multi Function module is displays controllable resources, reflecting the

actual installed hardware and software options.

Main (Home) Menu
Figure 122. Multi Function - Home
Last
Menu item not yet implemented.
Figure 123. Multi Function - Main Menu Buttons
Last
Main Menu selection and Home Menu.

Main menus are (in the order left to right / top to bottom):
• Keyer, Mask, Mattes (Fill, Border, Transition, Background), Wipes
• iDPM, eDPM, ext. DVE, Machine Control
• Input (Program, Preset, Utility, Fill, Key, Aux, eDPM, RamRecorder),
Router (not yet implemented), Copy, Swap
• YUV Correction (Input, Bus, Aux), RGB-Correction optional (Input, Bus,
Aux)
• CAMera, Panl (Brightness controls for Lowlight Tally, Highlight Tally,
OLED's, Text displays and button/modul disabling), Home Main
menu
Menu History
Figure 124. Multi Function - Last/Next Menu History
Last
Last/Next menu (2nd page menu), also used for menu history system.

Control for M/E Delegation
Figure 125. Multi Function - M/E Delegation
Last
Control panel M/E# delegations.
These buttons delegate the Multi Function Control to a different M/E of the
mainframe. Selecting M/E-3 causes the status of M/E3 to be shown, and the
setting to be sent to M/E3 in the mainframe. The M/E-H is reachable by
deselecting the currently highlighted M/E. All buttons have to be off.
M/Es without a licence are disabled.

Key and Wipe Delegations
Figure 126. Multi Function - Key/Wipe Delegation
Last
The Key delegation (button K1 ... K3) delegates the Multi Function Control
to the Key of the mainframe. The determination of the key is a combination
of the M/E delegation and the Key delegation. Since the M/E-H supports
four keyers, the key delegation 5 and 6 are inactive.
The Wipe delegation button leads directly into the Main Menu of the Tran-
sition Wipe setting. Therefore the displayed wipe depends on the status of
the Transition Wipe settings. The determination of the Transition Wipe is
done by the selection of the M/E. The color of the Wipe delegation buttons
is the same as the currently selected M/E.
The M/E-H does not have a Transition Wipe, consequently the delegations
are disabled for this M/E.
Auto Delegation (ADel)

The ADel function activates the auto delegation of the multi function
module. When enabled, the MFM is delegated by other modules of the
control panel, e.g. via the keyer butttons of the Transition Module, as well
as by the Sidepanel Menu, e.g. in the iDPM / eDPM edit menu. This dele-
gation does not only presets the according subdelegation but also activates
the according Keyers and ME's.

Joystick and Digipots
Figure 127. Multi Function - Joystick
Joystick and related displays.
Figure 128. Multi Function - Digipots
Digipots and related displays.
All displays filled with the word "Test" are just an example regarding the
number of characters available in each display.

Figure 129. Multi Function - Overview
Last
In general, the last selected function or delegation will automatically force

control to the 5 digipots and/or joystick on the right side of the Multi-Func-
tion Module as well as to the 6 buttons located underneath the Joystick.

Keyer Control
Figure 130. Multi Function - Keyer Control
Mode= Clip/Gain toggle for Clip High/Clip Low controls
Last
Keyer delegations/selections PVW/Preview button
When the Main Keyer menu is entered, the Multi-Function module repre-
sents the actual settings of the selected Keyer.
Key Preview
The PVW button is used for viewing the key control signal. This button does
not affect the output of the M/E. Pressing the button once shows, on the
preview output, the key signal in front of the background. Pressing the
button a second time shows the key signal.
When changing any M/E's preview mode from "Look-Ahead Preview" to

"Combined Key Signal", press and hold the PVW button in a Keyer Main
menu of related M/E# and select/deselect the Keyers which should be dis-
played on that M/E preview output. After finishing selection, press the
PVW button in order to cycle through available M/E-Preview output states.
Note While an M/E# PVW output is configured to be in "Combined Key Signal"

mode (Config/E-Box/M/E/Preview Output), the PVW button in Keyer Main
menu at the Multi-Function modul of the related M/E# will stay lit perma-
nently.

Key 1...6
These buttons delegate the Keyers Panel and indicate which keyer is cur-
rently delegated to the Keyers Panel.
Due to the Auto delegation the keyers panel is automatically delegated to the
appropriate keyer when it makes sense.
When Auto Menu is enabled, the menu display of the attached side panel will
switch to the appropriate Key Menu and sub-menu. Parameter adjustment is
performed by the menu digipots.
Key Sources
Matte Fill
The Matt button serves to select a color matte as a fill signal for the respec-
tive key in place of the fill bus signal.
Self - Couple - Split Key Buttons

When the Miscellaneous Bus is delegated to a keyer, a source selection
always selects the Fill signal for the corresponding keyer.
The Self - Coup and Splt buttons define the way in which the key signal is
selected.
• If Self is selected, the selected fill signal is also used as key signal.
• If Splt is active, the key and fill sources can be selected separately.
• If Coup is active, the operator selects a Key Fill source on the Key Buses
row, and the switcher automatically selects the Key Source signal using
the Coupled Key table. 
The Coupled Key table is defined in the menu.
The default table entry for Coupled Key is White. For DVEs, character
generators, graphics, etc., the input where the Key signal from such an
image source is connected should be coupled to the input where the
video signal is connected.
Key Types
Add Key
The Add button serves to select the additive key mode. In this mode, an
external unit (for example, modern caption generators, paint systems) gen-
erates and supplies the key signal and the associated fill signal.

The background signal is multiplied with the key control signal and added
to the supplied fill signal. This mode ensures that the supplied fill signal is
not influenced and that all details contained in it are reproduced true to the
original.
Note Please note that the supplied fill signal must be on top of a black background.
Otherwise, the addition of the signals will yield a discolored background
signal.
Lum Key
The LUM button selects the luminance key mode. The key control signal is
derived from the luminance component of the key source signal. The key
control signal controls the transition between background and foreground
(=fill) signal.
Lin Key
The LIN button sets the luminance key to a linear mode. The key control
signal corresponds to the non-amplified and unlimited luminance signal.
Preset Pattern Key

The Patt button selects Preset Pattern, which cuts the hole in the back-
ground using an internal wipe pattern generator (or Utility Bus video),
rather than a source’s key cut signal.
Wipe pattern selection and other preset pattern adjustment such as softness
of the preset pattern edge and size of the preset pattern shape can be
adjusted in the Wipe menu. The Joystick in the Joystick subpanel, when
properly delegated, controls the location of the preset pattern on the screen.
The Preset Pattern and Masking features share common keyer hardware.
When a Preset Pattern is being used by a keyer, masking will be disabled
for that keyer.
Key Over
The Over button changes the current key priority of the delegated keyer.
With each press of the button the priority is advanced by one. When top pri-
ority is reached, the next press of the button set the key priority to the
lowest level.
Key Invert
The Inv button reverses the sense of the key control signal. When Key Invert
is active (button lit), black areas of the key cut signal cause replacement of
the background, and the white key cut areas cause the background to be
retained.

Chroma Key Main Page
Figure 131. Multi Function Chroma Key Page
Strategy for Manual Chroma Key Setup

1. Turn Selectivity to minimum.
2. Set Clip Lo/Hi to “midrange values” (we recommend Clip Lo/Hi, but it
is also possible with Clip/Gain).
3. Set primary suppression with PriChr to max.
4. Set primary suppression with PriLum to min.
5. Turn primary suppression PriHue until the background (the key color)
becomes very noisily affected. Adjust for maximum.
6. Increase the Selectivity until the background is completely keyed off but
foreground stays unaffected.
7. Adjust PriChr and PriLum so that the background color and luminance
appears as in the original.
8. Adjust Clip Lo/Hi. Adjust Clip Lo to make the foreground opacity and
adjust Clip Hi to suppress noise/shadows in the background. To help
with this adjustment, turn on show key using the PVW button.
9. If necessary, start tweaking as after and Auto adjustment.

Figure 132. Multi Function Chroma Key Primary Page
Automatic Key Adjustment

The Auto button serves to start various automatic functions in the different
key modes.
• In ADD, the key control is switched to 1:1 transfer so that key signals for
example, from the caption generator are effective without change.
• In LUM, clip and gain are adjusted so that the key source signal is ampli-
fied to become a full-range signal with minimum of 0% and maximum
of 100%.
In LIN, clip and gain are set to unity.
• In CHR (Chroma Key), the Auto button starts an automatic key adjust-
ment.
Note After all automatic key adjustments, the corresponding parameters may still
be changed manually.

Automatic Chroma Key Adjustment

The first step of setting up most chroma keys is to use Auto Setup. Auto
Setup automates the first steps to achieving a chroma key. Auto Setup per-
forms the following:
• Calculates primary suppression Hue and Luminance.
• Sets primary suppression Selectivity and Chroma to defaults.
• Calculates Clip Low, and sets Clip Hi to default.
• Sets all the secondary suppression values to duplicate the primary sup-
pression values, but turns secondary suppression off.
• Changes Opacity temporarily to 100% to permit an accurate backing
color sample, and then returns it to its original setting.
• Sets Key Position and Size values to default (0).
Two different Auto Setup algorithms are available, one for well designed
and lighted sets (FGD Fade off), and the other for more challenging sets (FGD
Fade on). Depending on individual circumstances, additional manual
adjustments may be required after you use Auto Setup.
After an Auto Setup has been initiated by pressing the Curs button, you can
cancel it by pressing the Curs button again, but the chroma key will retain
the default settings imposed.
If the result of the Auto Setup is not satisfactory, further fine tuning can be
made in the chroma key menu as described below:
1. Adjust Selectivity to ensure that no foreground color is affected by the

keying process.
2. If there is still some transparency left, adjust Clip Lo to make the

foreground opaque, and adjust clip Hi to suppress noise/shadows in
the background. To help with this adjustment, turn on Show Key using
the PVW button.
3. Adjust Flre (Flare) suppression if needed, to reduce flare created in the

camera lens.
4. Adjust Foreground (secondary color) suppression if needed, due to

direct reflections in foreground objects.
FGD Fade
If the set is lit unevenly or has other problems, FGD Fade is available to help
solve the problem. A better alternative, if time permits, is to adjust the
lighting on the set to even out the backing color. This may improve the key
so that FGD Fade is not needed.

Figure 133. Multi Function Chroma Key Pattern Page
Border
The border function enables you to provide the key signals with a border
effect which can be adjusted individually.
The border selected in the Keyer menu can be switched on with the Bord on
button. For further information, please refer to the section Key Menu. The
border functionality is not supported in the first software releases.

Main Mask Menu
Figure 134. Multi Function - Mask Page
Last
Mask tools for Inhibit Mask and Force Foreground Mask
Mask / Force Delegation Buttons

Masks help clean up keys by defining picture areas that are prevented from
keying (inhibit mask) or are forced to key (force mask). Separate inhibit and
force masks may be set up for each keyer. Masks can be created by pattern
generators, or can be based on a video source that has been clip and gain
adjusted to create the mask control signal. Masks cannot be applied to
preset patterns.
The Inhb and Forc buttons delegate the keyer to control one of these two
mask types. Changes to the masking controls affect only the selected mask
type of the keyer delegated in the keyers subpanel. A high button tally indi-
cates which mask is being controlled. If the other mask is also active, its del-
egation button will low tally. Masking parameters can be controlled by the
digipots.

Main Keyer Store Menu
Figure 135. Multi Function - Store Page
Last
Within this delegation the Key Store readout can be selected.
The button underneath the joystick gives the possibility to select the live
signal or to freeze the Signal. The Freeze Signal depends on the Readout
which is set in the Store menu.
• F-Lv: Fill Live
• K-Lv: Key Live
• VS1F: Video store 1 Fill
• VS1K: Video store 1 Key

Main Keyer Priority Menu
Figure 136. Multi Function - Key Priority
Within this delegation the Key Priorities for C = Current Priority and
N = Next Priority can be adjusted by selecting the resource (C1 - 6 and/or
N1 -6), and change actual position with designated digipot at the right end
of related button row. Beneath both digipots for Current and Next a graphical
representation of the actual priority status is displayed.
Key Prior
The Prior button enable the user to set the next priority stack of the four
keyers. To set key priority, hold down the Prior button and press the Key 1 –
4 buttons in the keying order desired, from top to bottom priority. This will
set the next priority stack. After key priority has been set, select the Prior
button in the Transition subpanel to use this next priority selection as part
of the next key transition.

Pattern Key Main Menu
Figure 137. Multi Function - Pattern Main
Last
On the digipot in lower right position the pattern size can be adjusted.

iDPM (eDPM)
The iDPM (eDPM) menu has a hierarchical structure. The lowest button
row divides the DPM in the Main Group; Edit Group; Misc Group. The Near
and Far button gives access to the sources of the buses. The Num button
enable you to recall the effect directly with the corresponding register
number.
More information is available in each section below.
iDPM (eDPM) Main Menu

While "Banks" in iDPM (eDPM)Main is selected, the former displayed
button Next changes to Page, in order to toggle between Banks 00 - 04 and
05 - 09 . Bank - 00 is selected, and button 0 in upper left corner indicates the
loaded DPM effect . It is also reflected on all digipots which effect number
is loaded to which channel. The top digipot displays the last recalled effect.
When you turn this digipot, you step through the list of available effects. To
load an effect, push the digipot.
Buttons 1, 2, 3, 9 are empty effect numbers, and buttons 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 are

effects which exist but are not loaded.
Figure 138. Multi Function - DPM First Page
Last
Page/Next button

Figure 139. Multi Function - DPM 2nd Page
Last
Page/Next button
All effects are empty in Bank 05.

iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Locate Menu
Figure 140. Multi Function - DPM Edit - Locate Menu
Last
The digipot in the lower right corner in most menus is delegated to the Size
parameter. Inside "Locate" there are delegations for Axis and Spin available.
Note The lowest button row beneath the Joystick delegates to the control plane for
example: SRC=Source plane (where "Spin" is available), TRG=Target plane
(where "Rotate" is available), and Delegation for Glob=Global
Channel/planes.

Gang Control
In the iDPM / eDPM edit menu more than one channel can be controlled
in parallel (gang control). The buttons K1 through K4 reflect the control
states of the DPM channels.
• Disabled: 
The channel is not part of the current effect
• White color:
The channel is part of the current effect but is not under control (of but-
tons, digipots, or joystick)
• Orange or Yellow:
The channel is part of the current effect and is under control
• Yellow: 
The channel is part of the current effect and is under control. The
parameters of the yellow channel are displayed.
Example:
Figure 141 - All four channels are part of the current effect, channel 1-3 are
under control, parameters of channel 3 are displayed.
Figure 141. Example 1

Figure 142 - Only channel 1 and 2 are part of the current effect. Only
channel 1 is controlled and its parameters are displayed.
Figure 142.

iDPM (eDPM) Edit > Crop Menu
Figure 143. Multi Function- DPM Edit - Crop Menu
Last
While 4 digipots are controlling their individual crop edges, spinning the
Joystick in Z-direction will affect all crop edges simultaneously.
Inside Crop there are delegations for Rev= H-V Inverts, and Cube=Auto-
Cube On/Off.

iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Skew Menu
Figure 144. Multi Function - DPM Edit - Skew Menu
Last
Inside Skew there are delegations for Asp=Aspect, Pers=Perspective, and

Post=Post 3D Transforms.

iDPM (eDPM) Edit - SpFX Special Effects
Figure 145. Multi Function - DPM Edit - SpFX Menu
Last
For each DPM channel it can be determined whether a recalled effect is

loaded with or without the preprogrammed input crosspoints.

iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Setup Menu
Figure 146. Multi Function - DPM Edit - Setup Menu

New = Create New DPM effect based on channel(s) selection
Last
Inside Setup it is determined which DPM channel(s) will belong to a newly

created clip, and whether Global applies to those channels or not.

iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Misc - Default Menu
Figure 147. Multi Function - DPM Edit - Misc Default Menu
Last
Inside Default, a single or all DPM channel(s) and Global channel can be
backed up to their geometric preset only or to all presets.

iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Misc - Priority Menu
Figure 148. Multi Function - DPM Edit - Misc Priority Menu
Last
When Priority is selected, the channel buttons in the top display row are
selecting the channel, and the related priority is affected with the row
underneath. The display beneath the Joystick indicates the priority status
throughout all DPM channels. In this case channels 1 and 2 are together in
a Z-Group forced to be below channels 3 and 4 which are also forming a Z-
Group, always on top of channel 1 and 2.
Any combination of groups and priorities is possible:
1-2-3-4, 4-3-2-1, 2-3-4-1, 3-4-2-1, 1-3-4-2, 1-4-3-2, 1-4-2-3 , …..etc.

Z-Groups:
13-24 , 14-23 , 12-3-4 , 12-4-3, 1-2-34, 2-1-34, 123-4, 134-2, 42-13, …..etc.

iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Misc - Settings
Figure 149. Multi Function - DPM Edit - Misc Settings Menu
Last
In Settings, the DPM interpolation mode can be changed per channel

between Adpt=Adaptive, Frm=Frame and Fld=Field.

iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Misc - Load / Lock
Figure 150. Multi Function - DPM Edit - Misc Load and Lock Menu
When Lo+ is selected, effects can be write protected using Lock On/Off. Also
Loop Off/On and Bounce <--> is possible here.

iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Misc - Use DPM Crosspoint
Figure 151. Multi Function - DPM Edit - Misc Use Crosspoints Menu
Last
For each DPM channel it can be determined whether a recalled effect is

loaded with or without the preprogrammed input crosspoints.

iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Near - Input Crosspoint Selection
Figure 152. Multi Function - DPM Edit - Near Input Menu
Last
For each DPM channel the input for the Near fill signal can be selected with
the delegated digipot.
Note When function button Far is delegated , the input for each DPM channel for
Far - Fill signal can be selected with the related digipot.

iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Near/Key - Input Crosspoint Selection
Figure 153. Multi Function - DPM Edit - Near Key Input Menu
Last
While pressing and holding the Near button, the input for the near key
signal can be selected with the delegated digipot for each DPM channel.
Note When function button Far is delegated, the input for each DPM channel for
Far - Key signal can be selected with the related digipot.

Wipe and Key Selection
Home - Matt (Col Mattes) Selection - BGD (Background Color1)
Figure 154. Multi Function - Home Mattes Menu
Last
Figure 155. Multi Function - Background Colors
Last

Background Colors 1 - 3 can be in Wash mode, allowing changes for Soft-

ness, Position and Angle. Selecting either Matte1 or Matte2 the digipots are
controlling the parameters for Hue, Saturation and Luminance. When Wash
mode is turned Off, Matte1 and Matte2 are single flat Mattes.

Matt (Col Mattes) Selection - ColT (Test Signal Gen)
Figure 156. Multi Function - Mattes Test Signals
Last
Available Test Patterns

Matt (Col Mattes) Selection - Fill (Key Fill Col) Flat
Figure 157. Multi Function - Mattes Selection
Last
Selection for Flat Matte and Wash tools
While Base (-color) or Wash (-color) is selected, the digipots on the right are
delegated to control the parameters for Hue, Saturation and Luminance.
When changing from Flat > M1Wp or M1Wp (Main Wipe1 or 2), the lower 2
digipots are delegated to Size and Softness controls of the related Wipe.
When UT-1 or UT-2 (Utility 1 or 2) is selected, the lower two digipots are del-
egated to Clip and Gain controls of the related Utility bus.
Selecting K-WP (Key-Wipe) as Wash tool will delegate the lower two digi-
pots to the Offset and Softness controls.

Matt (Col Mattes) Selection - Bord (Key Border Col) Key Wipe
Figure 158. Multi Function - Mattes Border
Last
Border Source selection for Matte or Video signal from Utility buses
Selects the Border Fill Source for the Base or Wash color to be derived from
Color Matte (SMat) or from Utility bus1 or Utility bus2 (SUT1 or SUT2). >
S=Source.

Matt (Col Mattes) Selection - Trans (Trans Border Col) Main Wipe1
Figure 159. Multi Function - Mattes Border
Border Source selection for Matte or Videosignal from Utility buses
Selecting the Border Fill Source for the Base or Wash color, to be derived
from Color Matte (SMat) or from Utility-bus1 or Utility-bus2 (SUT1 or SUT2).
S = Source
UT = Utility

Wipe Sel - Wipe Source = Main Wipe1, Mix = Delegated
Figure 160. Multi Function - Wipe Selection
Generic Wipe Wipe run

attributes direction Modifier reset
Last
Pattern-Mix Delegated and specific Selected Wipe and Pattern Memo

Modifiers available modifiers available selection On/Off

Wipe Sel - Wipe Source = Main Wipe2, Misc. Modifiers
Figure 161. Multi Function - Wipe Selection

Toggle Pattern Source selection Pattern Source selection
Wipe1and Utility1/Wipe2andUtility2 Wipe1, Wipe2, Utility1, Utility2
Last
Enabled Modifiers Delegated Modifiers

Media Players (MPs)
Figure 162. Media Player Delegation
This subdelegation consists of 4 pages of 15 devices each. Which page you

are on is displayed and controlled with the top digipot. Alternatively you
can step through the pages with the Up and Down buttons
The 2nd button toggles between the tape motion commands

• Beg go to begin
• Stop stop
• End go to end
• Rev play reverse
• Stil still
• Play play
and as second page

Figure 163. 2nd Level Buttons
• M-In go to Mark In
• Goto go to timecode
• Mout go to Mark Out
• S-In set Mark In
• Sout set Mark Out
• Rec record

Machine Selection
Figure 164. Machine Selection
To assign a device to a certain device selection button, press and hold one
of the device selection buttons (marked with red dots).
Figure 165. Machine Selection

Turn Device digipot to select available devices. Confirm selection by

pressing the digipot.
• none - Delete current assignment.
• cncl - Cancel current dialog.
Depending on the type of the selected machine the digipots and the bottom
row offers a choice of options.
Options for the Ram Recorder

Digipots:
• Clip - select a clip
• Still - select a still
Bottom Row:
• Mode - play mode and record mode
• Loop - Loop on off bounce
• Bout - Breakout type for loops
• Read - readout for play and still mode
• Trim trim outside or inside of Mark In / Mark Out
Note Press the selected button (like Mode) again to return to normal operation
mode.

Ram Recorder - Selecting a Clip or a Still
Figure 166. RAM LoadClip
Turn the according digipot to scroll through the list of available clips/stills
Press Load to load the selected clip/still or press the digipot to cancel the
action.
Since a Ramrecorder channel can only hold a clip or a still at a time, one of
the two displays always will read "----"

Ram Recorder - Mode (Play Mode / Record Mode)
Figure 167. RAM Mode
When you press Mode a subselection of Play (play modes), Rec (record
modes) and a Grab button is available.

Ram Recorder - Play Mode
Figure 168. RAM Play Mode
• VTR (VTR Mode) 

Plays clip from begin to end.
• Clip (Clip Mode) 
Plays clip always from Mark In to Mark Out, n times (n = loop count,
default = 1).
• Loop (Simple Loop Mode) - Like Clip Mode, but starts at the current
position (no jump back to Mark In at a play command).
• eLp (Extended Loop Mode) 
Like Simple Loop Mode, but allows an "After Play" (after Mark Out
when finished the n loops.
• Slom (Live Slomo Mode) 
Not yet implemented.

Ram Recorder - Record Mode
Figure 169. RAM Record Mode
• New (New Record)

Records a new clip on the next free position.
• Edit (Edit Record) 
Starts recording at the current position of the current clip. This allows
to expand an already recorded clip.
• ID (Record ID)
Starts recording a new clip at a defined position.
• Dlay (Delay Line)
Starts an endless recording loop (length is Record Length) and plays
out with the according delay.
• RLen (Record Length) 
Set the record length, used for clip recording, delay line and as After
Play time in play mode Extended Loop.

Ram Recorder - Loop
Figure 170. RAM Loop
• 1 (number of loops)
Set the number of loops for Clip Mode, Simple Loop Mode, and
Extended Loop Mode. For an endless loop enter 0.
• Loop / Bnce (Bounce)
Select either Loop (play always in forward direction with jump from
end to begin) or Bounce (play forward and reverse).

Ram Recorder - Bout (Break Out)
Figure 171. RAM Break Out
Break out commands are used to end an endless loop or a loop before it has
reached its defined number of counts.
• OFF (no break)
No break out command will be accepted.
• In (break at Mark In) 
After a break out command is received the loop will be left during
reverse play and will play the part of the clip before Mark In.
• Out (break at Mark Out) 
After a break out command is received the loop will be left during
forward play and will play the part of the clip After Mark Out.
• Any (break at Mark In or Out) 
The loop will be left at the next possible Mark.

Ram Recorder - Read (Read out)
Figure 172. RAM Read Out
• P-F1 (Play Field 1) 

Set the Readout Mode for Play to Field 1 creating kind of "filmlook".
• P-F2 (Play Field 2) same as P-F1 but with Field 2.
• P-FR (Play Frame) 
Set the Readout Mode for Play to Frame (standard mode).
• P-12 (Play Field 1/2) 
Set the Readout Mode for Play to Field 1/2.
This mode can be used when you want to swap the field order in a frame
(either because it was faulty recorded or by purpose):
• Set still readout to S-F12, step to field 2 and start to play.
• Now your play out field order will be field 2 / field 1 per frame.

Another use of P-12 is when you control the Ram Recorder with your fader
(define a Mark In and a Mark Out, assigned the ramrecorder channel to a
Misc component in the ME menu). With P-12 the transition under fader
control will look smoother than with frame read out.
• S-F1 (Still Field 1) 
Set the Readout Mode for Still to Field 1. A single step command will
advance by frame but always read out field 1.
• S-F2 (Still Field 2) same as S-F1 but with field 2.
• S-FR (Still Frame) set the Readout Mode for Still to Frame (chance of
motion jitter).
• S-12 (Still Field 1) set the Readout Mode for Still to Field 1/2. A single
step command will advance by field.

Ram Recorder - Trim (Trim Clip)
Figure 173. RAM Trim Clip
• IN (Trim inner part) All frames between Mark In and Mark Out will be
deleted. The part before Mark In and after Mark Out will be joined.
• OUT (Trim outer part) All frames before Mark In and after Mark Out will
be deleted.
Note Only the video track will be trimmed. Audio will stay in its original length. To
play only the video part, play mode Clip should be used which will only play
the part between Mark In and Mark Out.

External Machines
Figure 174. External machines1
The Kayenne XL Package supports control of up to 4 external machines

(e.g. disk server, betacams etc.) via a serial connection (RS422) and in addi-
tion the control of up to 32 external Servers over LAN (AMP protocol using
TCP/IP).
Before an external machine becomes available in the device assignment

section of the module, it has to be selected in the installation menu of the
Kayenne XL menu. For serially controlled machines, a port and a protocol
have to be selected. For machines which are controlled via LAN, the IP
address and the desired video channel have to be selected. In addition a
protocol has to be chosen (currently only the AMP protocol is available for
LAN controlled devices).
Serially controlled machines are indicated with MS1 through MS4, LAN
controlled machines with ML1 through ML32

External Machines - Selecting a Clip
Figure 175. Selecting a Clip
• Turn the according digipot to scroll through the list of available

clips/stills.
• Press Load to load the selected clip/still or press the digipot to cancel
the action.
External Machines - Bottom Row Buttons

• List 
Updates cliplist of selected device. This function is mainly used for seri-
ally controlled machines. By pressing this button, the names and dura-
tions of all clips which are available in the current working folder are
transferred to the switcher XL system. This has to be done for instance
on system startup or after the working folder has been changed. For
devices which are controlled over LAN, the cliplist is updated auto-
matically in most cases (e.g. change of working folder, startup).
Note Note: If a new clip has been locally created on an external device, or an
existing clip has been deleted, the cliplist has to be updated manually - even
on VTRs con-trolled over LAN.

• Loop 
Note On serially controlled machines (using the AMP protocol), the current IN and
OUT marks are ignored for the loop. In other words, a clip is always played
from SOM (start of material) to EOM (end of material) or vice versa. This also
applies to LAN controlled machines when the "Mark Control" feature is dis-
abled. If "Mark Control" is enabled (see "MCtl" section for details), the IN and
OUT marks are taken into account for the loop.
• ACue (Autocue) 
When enabled, a clip is automatically cued to its IN mark after it is
loaded by a snapshot or timeline recall.
• MCtl (Mark Control) 
This feature is only available for machines which are controlled over
LAN. When Mark Control is enabled, the IN and OUT marks stored
within the metadata of a clip are controlled directly. In other words,
metadata of a clip can be changed. In combination with the loop mode,
a clip can be played in loop between its IN and OUT marks. This kind
of loop is completely controlled by the external machine and therefore
'absolute accurate'.
For more Details about IN/OUT Mark Handling see section Some More
Details About IN/OUT Mark Handling on page 160t.

iDPM / eDPM - Selecting an Effect
Figure 176. Selecting an Effect
• Turn the according digipot to scroll through the list of available effects.
• Press Load to load the selected effect or press the digipot to cancel the
action.

Input Selection
Input (M/E# Keys, Aux, Ram, eDPM)
Figure 177. Input Selection Overview
Last
Selector for Key 1-6

Selection M/E# selection
M/E, Aux, Ram, eDPM

Input (M/E# Crosspoints)
Figure 178. Multi Function - M/E Crosspoints
Last
While an M/E# is selected, the digipots are delegated to related Utility 1

and 2 crosspoints, as well as to the dedicated Program and Preset cros-
spoint selectors.

Input (M/E# Keyer)
Figure 179. Multi Function - Keyer
Last
While an M/E# Keyer 1-6 is selected, the digipots are delegated to:
• N Fill = Near Side Keyer-Fill signal
• N Key = Near Side Keyer-Key/Matte signal
• F Fill = Far Side Keyer-Fill signal
• F Key = Far Side Keyer-Key/Matte signal

Input (M/E-H)
Figure 180. Multi Function - Half M/E
Last
Once M/E-H is selected, Keyer 5 - 6 and Utility 1 - 2 are unavailable (due to

hardware architecture).

Input (Aux - Non Page Mode)
Figure 181. Multi Function 33
Aux Bus Selection
Last
Aux Bus crosspoint selection Page mode button
While Page mode is not enabled, the lower 2 digipots are controlling the
selectable Aux buses and the available crosspoints.
Pressing either digipot will open the numeric keypad, in order to enable
numeric entries to select Aux-Bus number and Aux-Bus crosspoint.
When pressing and holding the button Perm (Permanent Input to Aux Bus)
and also pressing the lower digipot (crosspoint selector), the selected cross-
point will toggle the function "Permanent Input" for this particular Aux-
Output On/Off, and this is indicated on the button Perm. When a desig-
nated Aux-Bus is already in "Permanent" mode, the related display will
change from "Aux-XX" to "Perm-XX".
The Titl (Safe Title) and Cntr (Center-Cross) buttons are delegating related
controls to the digipots, when pressing and holding together with the
lower digipot. Pressing the Titl or Cntr button again will turn the digipots
back to Aux selection.

The Mode button determines which function(s) is activated, and toggles

through all possible states: Center-Cross /Safe Title /Both /OFF
Note The controls for "Permanent", "Safe Title", "Center-Cross" and "Mode" are iden-
tical, regardless if "Non-Page"- or "Page"-mode is selected. In Fig.35 "Perma-
nent", "Safe Title", "Center-Cross" and "Mode" are disabled.

Input (Aux Safe Title / Center Cross Delegation)
Figure 182. Multi Function - Safe Title
Last
Safe Titel delegation
Figure 183. Multi Function 34
Last
Center Cross delegation

Input (Aux Safe Title / Center Cross Modes)
Figure 184. Multi Function - Safe Title
Last
Safe Titel On
Figure 185. Multi Function - Center Cross
Last
Center Cross On

Input (Aux Page Mode”Page01”,”Page02”and”Page12”)
Figure 186. Multi Function - Aux Pages
Page mode On
Last
Indicates ”Permanent Input” Displays the Page# of

mode on Aux Bus 2 Aux Buses in groups
of 4 Auxes/ Page
Note The buttons for "Permanent Input", "Safe Title", "CenterCross" and "Mode" are
indicating that at least one of the Aux buses out of this group has such a mod-
ifier activated. The mode for "Permanent Input" is also displayed next to the
related digipot.

Figure 187. Multi Function - Aux Buses
Last
Note Aux-6 and Aux-8 are set to "Permanent Input"as displayed at the related
digipot. "Safe Title‘, "CenterCross" and "Mode" are disabled for the entire
group
Figure 188. Multi Function - Aux Buses
Last
Note "Permanent Input", "Safe Title", "CenterCross" and "Mode" are disabled for the
entire group.

Input (Aux - RamRecorder Inputs)
Figure 189. Multi Function - RamRecoder

Displays number of input controlled RamRecorder Channels
Last
Note When RR-1 (RamRecorder Channel-1) is selected in delegation row, 4 Chan-

nels are delegated to the digipots: Ram-1, Ram-2, Ram-3, Ram-4.

Figure 190. Multi Function - Display Ram Channels

Displays number of input controlled RamRecorder Channels
Last
Note Selecting RR-2 (RamRecorder Channel-2) in delegation row will scroll down
the list and the next 4 Channels are delegated to the digipots: 
Ram-2, Ram-3, Ram-4, Ram-5 .

Figure 191. Multi Function - Display Ram Channels

Displays number of input controlled RamRecorder
Last
Note Picking up RR-6 (RamRecorder Channel-6) straight in the delegation row

navigates the list to the end, and the last 4 Channels are delegated to the digi-
pots: Ram-3, Ram-4, Ram-5, Ram-6.(selecting RR-3,4,5 would have caused
the same delegation). Now when selecting RR-5 (after RR-6 was selected),
the delegation would start with: Ram-2, Ram-3, Ram-4, Ram-5.

Input (eDPM1)
Figure 192. Multi Function - eDPM Channels

Displays selected eDPM Channel
Last
The activated digipots from top to bottom are controlling these Inputs per
selected eDPM Channel:
• NK:eDP-1= eDPM Cannel-1 Near Side Key send signal

• FF:eDP-1= eDPM Cannel-1 Far Side Fill send signal
• FK:eDP-1= eDPM Cannel-1 Far Side Key send signal

How to Disable Control Panel Controls

With software version V703, in Kayenne XL it is possible to disable parts of
the control panel. To access this feature press the Panl button in the Multi
Function module (MFM) in order to select the Panel Delegation page.
Figure 193. Multi Function - Main Menu Selection and Home Menu
Last
Panl
Figure 194. Multi Function - Panel Delegation Menu
Last
SLoc

Disabling single Controls or a Whole Module

Press and hold down the Lock button. While this button is hold down only
disabled controls are high tallied. Now you can press the buttons which
should be disabled (to re-enable a button press it again).
Note At the first time, all buttons will be dark!
To disable/re-enable a whole module you can hold down any button of the
desired module for 1 second.
Note Keep in mind that all controls (fader, knobs, jog-wheels, buttons, etc.) of the
module will be disabled!
To disable faders you have to hold the Lock button down and move the
fader to top (and to bottom to re-enable it).
To disable knobs or jog wheels you have to hold down the Lock button and
turn right (turn left for re-enable) the knob or jog wheel.
To lock the now selected buttons release the Lock button and press the
Enable (Enbl) button that the lock becomes active. For a quick enable of the
whole panel just press the Enbl button again.
The lock mechanism does not work for the MFM module. To disable the
MFM module you have to press the Self Lock (SLck) button in MFM
module.
Note The lock enable state is not stored! It is always disabled after reset or appli-
cation load.

Section 4
Menu Overview
Introduction
The Kayenne XL Package Menu panel provides capabilities that comple-
ment the operation of the control panel. The Menu panel controls most
system functions, and has additional controls not available on the control
panel (for example, the configuration menus). During live production the
operator spends most of his time working directly on the control panel. The
Menu panel is used for setup and effects creation, and its functions are
extensively self-explanatory.
A second way of full control is an additional Sidepanel program. The

Sidepanel program can run on a separate Windows PC.

Section 4 — Menu Overview
Menu Panel Description

The Menu panel has a touch screen display and five soft knobs on the right.
The menu‘s navigation area on the left enable easy navigation inside the
menu tree.
Figure 195. Touch Screen Display
Digipots
2x USB Port
Navigation Area Menu Area
Touch Screen
CAUTION Do not apply any sharp or rigid object (no pens or pencils) to the touch
screen display surface. The Menu panel touch screen enable direct interac-
tion with menu controls displayed on the screen. The screen is designed to
work with a finger or other soft object. The touch screen is sensitive to a
single pressure location only, so only one touch surface control can be
adjusted at a time.

Soft Knobs (Digipots)

Knobs along the right side of the Menu panel can be used to dial in param-
eter values for functions displayed on the touch screen. When a knob is
active, the touch screen displays the parameter name and its current value
on a data pad. The parameter can be adjusted by turning the knob, or the
data pad can be touched to bring up a numeric keypad. On some menus, a
soft knob may be able to control parameters or scroll a list located else-
where on the screen.
Navigation Area
In order to have a very fast and easy access to the menus the navigation
area of the Kayenne XL Package menu can be switched in three modes:
• Home
• User Menu
• System

Figure 196. Navigation Area - Home Mode
Home Menu Selection

(Startup menu is selected)
Dynamic Menu Number.

Can be entered in order to call menus very fast!
Previous/Next selection buttons for menu history.
(history for the last 10 menus).
Name of the currently selected menu.
Navigation Selection
(Home is selected)
Main Menu Selection

Touching one of these buttons takes you directly to that menu category. The
currently selected category is shown by the touch button turning blue.
Some menus have additional subcategory selections available at the left of

the menu. In addition some menus have additional subpage selections
available at the bottom of the menu.

Figure 197. Navigation Area - User Menu Mode
User Menu Selection

Select a menu and press and hold the respective
user menu button two seconds to store the menu.
Press first the Delete button an then the respective

User button to delete a stored User menu.

Previous/Next selection buttons for menu history
(User Menu is selected)

Figure 198. Navigation Area - System Mode
Sidepanel System Operation Modes

Close: Closes the Sidepanel application.
Minimize: Minimize the GUI on the screen to the Windows
task bar. A minimized state can be restored to its origin
size by selecting Kayenne XL in the Windows task bar.
System Operation Modes

Shutdown: Closes the Sidepanel application and shuts
down the control panel PC.
Reboot: Closes the Sidepanel application and reboots the
control panel PC.

Previous Menus Selection Buttons
(System Menu is selected)

Navigation Inside the Menu and Modify

In order to navigate inside the menus or lists and change the entries, the
button of the menu contains cursor buttons and a Modify button.
As long as the Menu Lock button is switched on, the Auto Menu function is
inhibited. No further auto menu delegation is performed.
Figure 199. Lower Menu Part
Numeric Keypad
Touching a soft knob pad or other single numeric parameter pad brings up
a numeric keypad that can be used to enter exact values.
Figure 200. Numeric Key Pad

Alphanumeric Keypad, Typewriter

Touching the pad for a text parameter brings up an alphanumeric keypad
with typewriter layout (style US English).
Figure 201. Alphanumeric Key Pad

Using a Mouse
The menu can also be controlled by means of a mouse. Doing so, all func-
tions contained in the menu are controllable with the mouse, thus enabling
an operation without softkeys and digipots. That means, operation is pos-
sible from a normal PC without special hardware.
The functions are initiated by clicking or double-clicking with the left

mouse button on the individual elements in the menu.
Clicking with the right mouse button calls a pop-up menu which enables a
change into the other menu groups. This function duplicates the menu nav-
igation buttons arranged to the left of the display.
Figure 202. Go To Menu


Section 5
Menu Summaries
In this section various Kayenne XL operation menus are presented to famil-
iarize you with various screen layouts. Cross references are provided for
more detailed information. Because each menu controls different aspects of
the system, the screen parameters and organization will vary, but the basic
principles previously described are followed.
Menu Structure Overview
Top level menu Sub-menus ID

Startup Startup 010000
Help Help 020000
Editor 020200
Status Main 030000
M/E Mapping 030400
Install Main 040000
E-Box 040100
Panel 040200
System 040300
Diagnose 040400
Control Devices 040500
Config Main 050000
E–Box 050100
Panel 050200
Panel Colors 050300
Attached Macros 050400
Flex Licenses 050500
Personality Main 060000
M/E Main 070000
Wipe Trans 070200
Offset Transi 070300
Key Main 080000
Matte 080100

Section 5 — Menu Summaries
Top level menu Sub-menus ID

Mask 080200
Chroma Key Main 080300
Chroma Key Suppression 080400
Wipe Adjust 090000
Select 090100
Color BGD Color BGD 1, 2, 3 100000
Color Signal 100100
Color Correction YUV Input 110000
YUV M/E-Bus 110100
YUV Auxbus 110200
RGB Input 110300
RGB M/E-Bus 110400
RGB Auxbus 110500
Remote Main 120000
GPI-Out 120100
P-BUS 120200
Media Player MP Status 130000
MP Clips 130100
RamRecorder Status 140000
Clips 140100
Stills 140200
Transfer 140300
Image Converter 140400
Audio 140500
Active Area 140600
Aux /Router Main 150000
Scalers Input Scaler 160000
Auxbus Scaler 160100
DPM DVE iDPM Main 170400
iDPM Edit 170300
eDPM Main 170200
eDPM Edit 170100
DVE Extern 170000
EMEM Select 180000
Define 180100

Startup Menu
Startup Menu
After program start, the Startup menu is called with the Kayenne XL logo
and then automatically the menu available last with all selected parame-
ters.
With initial startup, the Startup menu is called in order to enable selection
of the mainframe (E-Box button), control panel (Panel button) and estab-
lishing the connection. With the Rescan button the network will be res-
canned in order to find new panel devices.
Figure 203. Startup Menu,
The menus show the state of the switcher system:

• Connected mainframe (E-Box)
• Attached panel
• IP address

Figure 204. Startup Menu 1
Selection of the Mainframe

Actuating the E-Box button brings up a list box in which the mainframes
connected to the mains are listed with IP Net Address. After selection of a
mainframe with the arrow buttons, the Connect and Disconn buttons are
activated.
A corresponding selection connects or disconnects the connection.
Selection of an Attached Panel

Actuating the Panel button calls a list box in which the switcher panels con-
nected to the mains are listed with IP Net Address. After selection of a
panel with the arrow buttons, the Attach and Detach buttons are activated.
A corresponding selection connects or disconnects the connection.

Help Menu
Help Menu
The switcher provides a context sensitive help system that means, pressing
the help button on any menu screen brings you to the according page of the
user manual. Please use the < / > buttons for more information.
Manual Page
Once in the help dialog the user can navigate by different means:
• TOC
Shows the table of contents and enable the user to select any chapter of
interest.
• < / >
Navigating from the current position in the manual backwards or for-
wards.
• Index
Provides a more detailed description of specific topics used in the
manual.
• Back / Forward
Like any web browser these commands can be used to walk through
the navigation history.
• Manual Page
Calls the current version of the help information. This information is
based on the current User Manual.
• Custom Page
Calls the user-defined notes or supplement belonging to the currently
selected manual help page. Refer section Help Editor on page 271 how
to generate custom pages.
• Bookmark Options
The current version only enable setting one bookmark.

Figure 205. Example for a Help Page

Help Menu
Help Editor
The Help Editor can be used to add user-defined notes and supplements to
each help page. So, the user can write his one user manual with comments,
hints and notes for special workflows and modes of operation.
This Custom Pages are stored separately. Therefore, the pages are not lost
and overwritten after a software update.
Figure 206. Help Editor Page
The editor page appears with a keyboard, in order to enter the page title.

With the buttons on the top of the page, basic text formatting can be
selected:
• Bold: Font style „Bold“
• Italic: Font style „Italic“
• Font Style: Predefined text formatting for headlines and standard text.
• Align Text: Align the text to Left, Center, Right
• Cut, Copy, Paste: Edit functions
Figure 207. Help Editor Page,
Belonging Manual Page
With the buttons on the bottom of the page, advances functions can be
selected:
• File Options:
• Save: Press Save to store the current custom page.
• New: Press New to start a new (next) custom page belonging to the
same currently selected manual page.
• Import: Press Import to import a external text file. A dialog appears
to select a file on your computer or USB device.
• Custom Editor: Possibility do define and start an external text editor.
• Add Index Keyword: Possibility to enter a keyword belonging to the
current custom page.
• Up/Down Arrows: Navigation buttons.
Buttons are active, when more than one page is available inside the
current custom page.

Status Menu
Status Menu
Status Main Submenu

The root menu of the switcher is the Status menu. From Status the top level
menus of other groups can be selected (when clicking the right mouse
button) via the pop-up menu, or by pressing the respective menu buttons.
Figure 208. Status Main Menu
Selecting the M/E Main Menus

M/E1 - M/E2 - M/E3- P/P - M/Eh
Press the associated dialog button to select the associated M/E Main menu
which serves to modify the switcher parameters.
Note The menu contents is depends on from the connected mainframe.

Enable / Disable the Faders

Fader Active: M/E1, M/E2 M/E3, P/P
Press the associated button to enable or disable the panel fader of the indi-
vidual mixing levels and the menu fader in the M/E Main menus. The
active status is displayed in the button. In Kayak HD only PP is available.
User Definable Presets

User definable preset of the mainframe operational state is possible for a
single M/E or the complete switcher. For a recall of the complete switcher
preset select the Status menu. A single switcher preset can be recalled in the
M/Ex Main menu.
Recall Preset
The following presets can be recalled:
• Factory Preset: Recall the factory preset.

• Operation Preset: Recall the user-defined operation preset.
• Undo: Recall the last user settings.
Refer to Install Main Submenu on page 277 to save the preset data.

Status Menu
M/E Mapping Submenu

In Preparation

Install Menu
The Install menu contains the engineering setup controls. Engineering
Setups are not likely changed on a daily basis and grouped separately from
Configurations and Personality Settings. Facility maintenance personnel or
the engineer in charge of a production truck generally manages Engi-
neering Setups. These parameters are usually set during installation.
The installation menus are organized in five subgroups:

• Main
• E-Box
• Panel
• System
• Diagnose
• Device Control

Install Menu
Install Main Submenu

The Install main menu shows the current control panel and mainframe port
assignment.
Figure 209. Installation Main Menu
Save Installation and Configuration Settings

Once configured, you will want to backup the installation settings so they
can be quickly reloaded if necessary. Different groups of settings are saved
using different methods.
It is also a good practice to create and save a few standard sets of operating
settings so you can easily return the switcher to known states for system
testing and/or troubleshooting. Only one complete set of installation set-
tings (called environmental data), and only one subset of panel install set-
tings, can be saved and loaded to a particular USB stick, however. If you
want to keep multiple sets you will need to save them directly onto a dif-
ferent USB sticks, or copy these files to a separate computer.

Saving operation data as user-defined preset is possible with the button

Store Preset.
Figure 210. Installation Main Menu - Pop Up OPS Present
OK - The complete mainframe operational setting is saved as to be the new

Operational Preset setting.
Cancel - Cancels the save procedure.

Install Menu
Install E-Box Submenu

The installation menu is designed by using subpages. Each subpage con-
tains all settings belonging to the mainframe (E-Box) installation functions.
• AuxCP Page
• Tally
• Input
• GPI
• GPO
• Ext. DVE
• Editor
• Router
• Timing
• UMD
• Machine
• P-Bus
• Aux Bus
• Ext. Key
Copy (button on the upper right of the menu)

With the Copy button it is possible to store or load the files ENVIRON.INI
and License.txt (E-Box) or ENVIR_CP.INI (panel) from a USB Flash
Memory or hard disk.
CAUTION After loading the environment file, the switcher will reset.

Aux CP Page
The Aux CP menu page serves for installing the AUX Control Panels con-
nected with the Kayak HD. Up to four AUX Control Panels can be installed.
Figure 211. Install E-Box AUX CP

Install Menu
To program an Input, select the channel from the scrolling list in the central
pane. Then select Modify to change the parameters:
• Type: Shows a pop-up window with all types of AUX Control Panels.
Figure 212. Install E-Box AUX CP Type
• Port: Shows a pop-up window with all ports plus ”None” like in all other
menus where a port must be configured.
Note The port must be different to the ports used for DVEs, Editors, ext. DSKs, etc.
• MPK-Address: Opens the typewriter pop-up window. The physical MPK

address of the AUX-CP must be entered. Refer the label at the rear of
the panel modules (for example, CP-3020: e0002d43).

Tally Page
The tally signalling for the system works via serial communication line
with the option to hook a hardware device onto that (those) serial line(s) to
provide tally for those cases where it is not connected to a control system,
for example, Jupiter from Grass Valley. For that optional hardware device
the already existing Tally Distributor MI-3040 was chosen. This device is
driven via the serial MPK protocol and has 40 opto-isolated inputs and 40
relay outputs. Because the maximum needed amount of inputs and outputs
is greater than 40, more then one (up to three) MI-3040 boxes are needed.
The menu serves for installing the Tally Distributors connected with the
Kayenne XL. For installation details refer to your MI-3040 manual.
You can configure Tally outputs in the Kayenne XL control panel software
from the Config - GPO/Tally menu which is described in more detail in
section Config menu.
Figure 213. Install E-Box Tally

Install Menu
Note Two MI–3040 boxes can be addressed as to be one box with 80bits if they
have the same MPK address and if they are installed in neighbor columns in
the table above. Within a tally channel (Red, Green, Yellow) same box
addresses may be used. However, a box address cannot be used in different
colors. For details refer to the section on Tally Signaling in the Installation and
Service Manual.
• Select the desired Tally channel with: Red, Green, Yellow buttons.
• Select the additional assignment pages with Setup, Out Assign, In Assign
button.
A modified state of each channel will be displayed in the headline of the

assignment table.
Figure 214. Install E-Box Tally Out Assign

• Copy Assign: Copies assignment from channel to channel
Figure 215. Install E-Box Tally OutAssign Copy
• Reset Assign: Reset the channels to Default or None
Figure 216. Install E-Box Tally OutAssign Reset

Install Menu
Figure 217. Install E-Box Tally In Assign

Input Page
All Kayak HD system video inputs and outputs are configurable. For
cabling configuration flexibility, each external primary input can be
mapped to any panel source select button, as can each internal video
system source. Any switcher system video signal, such as M/E Program
(PGM), Preset (PST), clean feed (CLNFD), or Preview (PVW) can be
mapped to any output bus to be accessed on a specific connector, or an
output bus can act as an AUX bus.
The Install Input menu page serves for setting the input name transfer
parameters and the software patch panel.
Figure 218. Install E-Box Input

Install Menu
To program an Input, select the channel from the scrolling list in the central
pane. Then select Modify to change the parameters:
• Input Name: Enter a four digit short name.
• Long Name: Enter a desired long name.
• Patch to: Option “Software Patch Panel”, Software License Key is
required.
• Ext. Name: Enable / Disable the name transfer mode with Yes/No.
• Router Output: Select the router output channel.
• Router Level: Select the level of the routing system (for example, Prosan
router).
• Event Preroll: Select a pre roll time.
Note Preroll is used to delay a command which assigned to an input using the
Event Tab.
• Event: Assign/create command for On Air execution.
Note Assigned commands are only executed if transition trigger/cut trigger in the
Config/M/E/Misc. menu is enabled.
Setting Preroll Time

• Move the cursor to the Event Preroll column and press Modify. A popup
with the predefined pre roll times appears.
Figure 219. Install E-Box Input - Event Preroll
Selecting a Substitution Table

• Move the cursor to the Event column and press Modify. A popup with the
available substitution tables appears. Refer also to the Config / Panel /
SubstTab menu.
The substitution tables are used for Simulcast mode.

This entry in this menu page card can only be modified if in the side panel
PC‘s registry the value “USERINTERFACE /
INPUT_SUBSTAB_SELECTABLE is set to “1”.
Figure 220. Install E-Box Input Substitution
Reset the Patch Panel Settings

• Press the Reset Patch Panel button and then OK
Figure 221. Install E-Box Input - Reset Patch Panel

Install Menu
GPI Page
The purpose of the GPI In pins is to provide a stimulus from the customer's
equipment to the switcher.
A simple connection to the two connectors (or four in the case of the 8 RU
frame) activates the corresponding input. This kind of control is suitable for
a connection to a relay contact or to an open-collector output.
WARNING When connecting to an open-collector output, there is no ground potential

isolation between the Video Processor frame and controlling devices.
Since the circuit ground is led out of the device, the cabling has to be
shielded for this kind of control. Non-shielded cables may cause EMC
and/or ESD problems.
To activate a GPI In, you must provide switch closure between a particular
GPI In pin and one of the two GPI In Com pins.
The function of each GPI input is user assignable. The activation of the
function can be programmed to occur on the leading (rising) edge or the
trailing (falling) edge of the closure, or both edges. The switch must be
closed for at least one field.
The GPI menu page serves for modifying the GPI parameters.

Figure 222. Install E-Box GPI
To program a GPI, select the GPI from the scrolling list in the central pane.
Select Modify to determine whether the rising or falling edge of the arriving
signal (GPI 1 ... 16) is to be used.
Figure 223. Install E-Box GPI - Edge Definition
A GPI is considered Active when current flows through the LED of the
opto-coupler at the GPI input. When no current flows, the GPI is Inactive.

Install Menu
Hence a Rising edge is the transition from Inactive to Active, and a Falling
edge is the transition from Active to Inactive.

GPO Page
GPO Output contact closures are used by the switcher system for simple
trigger control of external devices. See Installation Manual for pinout and
voltage specifications.
In this Install - GPO menu the physical properties of up to 128 GPO channels
can be adjusted.
Figure 224. Install E-Box GPO

Install Menu
To program a GPO, select the GPO input from the scrolling list in the
central pane. Then select Modify to change the parameters:
• Shape: Pulse / Static
Figure 225. Install E-Box GPO Shape
• Idle State: open / closed
Figure 226. Install E-Box GPO Idle State
• Pulse Duration: Enter the preroll time in frames (max. 255 frames)
Figure 227. Install E-Box GPO Pulse Duration

Extern DVE Page

Menu page for selecting and modifying the parameters of an external
Digital Video Effect System (DVE). For details, refer to the Installation
Manual of your external DVE unit.
Figure 228. Install E-Box Extern DVE
To program an external DVE, select the parameter from the list in the
central pane. Then select Modify to change the parameters:
• Port: The first item in the menu is the port number. This defines which
unused RS422 port on the mainframe will be connected to the DVE,
here Port 7 is shown.

Install Menu
Figure 229. Install E-Box Extern DVE Port
• Type: Select the protocol usable for your DVE from the list, here DVEOUS
is selected.
Figure 230. Install E-Box Extern DVE Type
• Video / Key In: Define the video / key in channel. Any input can be used
for video or key. The DVE LOOP function needs this information.
Figure 231. Install E-Box Extern DVE Video In
Figure 232. Install E-Box Extern DVE Key In
• Delay: The DELAY setting is how many fields the switcher waits after a
DVE effect is finished before taking the DVE out of the loop. The setting
for this depends on the DVE model (the time spent to process serial
control commands). In case of DVXtreme it should be set to 8. If the
delay is too short, there will be a jump interference at the end. Or a flash
frame at the begin (DVE winding to correct position while already
being on air).

Figure 233. Install E-Box Extern DVE Delay
• Tally: Define the tally properties

• Internal means that every time the DVE is On-Air, the Sources on the
feeding Aux Buses get an on-air tally too. No external wiring
needed.
• External means that the DVE (the inputs in INSTALL--EBOX--DVE)
AND the tally-in for the feeding Aux Buses must be on-air to get the
feeding sources on-air. This covers when the DVE is ON through a
key but the image on the DVE is invisible. The DVE however must
supply an appropriate Tally signal.
• External Only means that the switcher just propagates the Tally-In of
the feeding Aux Buses. Any logic must be wired externally. Or must
be done inside the DVE.
Figure 234. Install E-Box Extern DVE Tally
• Video / Key Send: The video and key sends define which Aux Buses the
switcher is using to feed the inputs of the DVE. These would normally
be fed to inputs 1 and 2. In the example, Aux 10 and Aux 11 are being
used. Again, this information is needed for the DVE LOOP. More Aux
Buses can be used to feed multiple channel DVEs.
Figure 235. Install E-Box Extern DVE Key Send Aux

Install Menu
Figure 236. Install E-Box Extern DVE Video Send Aux

The last three items are for the AuxBus option on the DVE.
• Control Port: The port number once more defines the physical RS422
port on the mainframe. This needs to be connected to a second serial
port of the DVE.
Figure 237. Install E-Box Extern DVE Port Aux
• Control Type: The control type sets the protocol, this should be set for
example, to GVG200/dd35 as shown. The DVE can then control any of the
switchers Aux Buses.
Figure 238. Install E-Box Extern DVE Aux Control Type
• Control Delay: The control delay sets a time offset in fields so any
front/back switching switches in the correct place. Recommended
value is: zero (0).
Figure 239. Install E-Box Extern DVE Aux Control Delay

Install Menu
Editor Page
Menu page for selecting and modifying the parameters of an external
Editor. For details, refer to the Installation Manual of your external Editor
unit.
The Kayenne XL Package can be controlled by up to four editing systems

via the RS422 interface of the switcher mainframe. Control is made by
means of different protocol types which can be supported by the switcher.
Basic editor control of the Kayenne XL system is supported. Capabilities

include: Source selection, Key selection, Wipe selection, Preview, Timeline
control (Jog/Go to Time, Run, Rewind), Transition Mode, Rate, and Trig-
gers, All Stop, EMEM.
Figure 240. Install E-Box Editor
To program a external Editor, select one of the Editors 1 ... 4 first and select
the parameter from the list in the central pane. Then press Modify to change
the parameters:

For some remote protocols configuration options are selectable:

• Wipe Mapping: Select the desired number type: GVG Pattern Numbers or
XtenDD Pattern Numbers
• DSK Support: Select Default or BVE2000
• BVE2000 DSK Mapping: Select the desired keyer to Key3 or to Key4

Install Menu
Router Page
The Kayak HD system can interface with an external routing system such
as Encore, Jupiter and Pro-Bel automation systems. A routing system con-
nects a router source (router input) to a router destination (router output).
Changing the router source sends a different signal to the destination
(called a take). A router destination can in turn be connected to a Kayak HD
mainframe input and be configured as a routed switcher source. The router
acts as a pre-selector for the switcher source, and so increases the number
of inputs available to a button on a Kayak system bus.
Note Router take commands are applied to single or all router levels depending on
the configuration. The external routing system's destinations must be config-
ured correspondingly.
The following control features are supported in Kayenne XL:

• Supports 32 router output channels
• Destination Assignment
• Level Assignment (Encore, Pro-Bel)
• Source name transfer
• Source name and configuration change notification
The Router menu page is used to setup your Kayenne XL for control of an
external router system. In the Crosspoint Control pane the used serial port,
the router protocol type and additional router options can be selected. In
the Mnemonics Transfer pane the additionally necessary serial port for the
source name transfer with Jupiter can be selected.

Figure 241. Install E-Box Router
To program a external Router, select the Setup page first and select the
parameter from the list in the central pane. Then press Modify to change the
parameters:
Mnemonic Transfer
unused RS422 port on the mainframe will be connected to the Router.
• Type: Select the protocol usable for your Router from the list.
• Port Parity: Select even or odd parity
Crossbar Control
• Port: Select an unused RS422 port on the mainframe.

Install Menu
Audio Follow Video

• Port: Select an unused RS422 port on the mainframe.
• Force PST = PGM: Switcher sends always the command for PGM / PST
Note Switcher doesn't send the command for PST if the PST includes audio chan-
nels which are already selected on PGM.
• Source Bit Order: 

Normal ESAM: physical input = audio channel
Reverse O3D: different assignment of physical inputs and audio chan-
nels
An external router can be configured into levels, to enable the switching of

multiple signals simultaneously. For example, video signals can be orga-
nized on one level, and key signals on another. By specifying both levels
when giving a router take command, both the video and key signals of a
source will be routed to their destinations.

Figure 242. Install E-Box Router Bus Assignment
To program the bus assignment of an external Router, select the Bus Assignm
page first and select the parameter from the list in the central panel.
Then press Modify to change the parameters

• Router Output
Select a ouput number (1 to 32) of the external router.
• Router Level
Select the router level.
• Output Name
Enter a 8 digit router name. The name will be display at the source
selection displays..

Install Menu
Timing Page
The Timing menu page reports the status of the Kayak HD system sync
generator. It is used to switch between HD and SD operating modes and to
adjust the internal system timing.
Figure 243. Install E-Box Timing
To program the video timing of your switcher system, select the parameter
from the list in the central pane. Then press Modify to change the parame-
ters.
• Genlock Phase: Fine adjustment of the video timing. Refer to Adjust
Internal System Timing on page 307.
• Input Standard: Use this parameter to select the Video Standard you
want to use for the Kayenne XL switcher. Press this button to display a
list of the possible video standards, including HD Auto Detect and SD Auto
Detect.

• SD Reference Input: This parameter is used to select the SD (Standard

Definition) Reference source which can be either the SD Analog Refer-
ence or any one of the serial digital video inputs to the switcher. The
digital input must match the video standard that the switcher is run-
ning.
• HD Reference Input: This parameter is used to select the HD (High Defi-
nition) Reference Input video source which can be either the HD
Analog Reference or any one of the serial digital video inputs to the
switcher. The digital input must match the video standard that the
switcher is running.
Figure 244. Install E-Box Timing SD Reference Input
• HD Auto Preselect: Select Interlaced Mode or Segmented Frame Mode. For

details, refer to section Select SF Mode on page 307
Figure 245. Install E-Box Timing HD Auto Preselect
• The currently selected video standard is reported in the Current Standard

field on the top menu page.
• The incoming reference signal rate is reported in the External Reference
field.
If you are using Auto Detect, the video standard you have selected persists
until a different video standard is detected and locked for use by the
switcher.
If the reference signal is temporarily lost, the system will continue using the
previous reference standard and a NONE status will be reported.

Install Menu
Note The Kayenne XL cannot support both SD and HD at the same time; you must
choose one mode or the other. If you change the mode from SD to HD (or
vice versa) then the switcher hardware must reprogram itself to process the
change. This takes a minute, but you only have to do it when changing from
HD to SD, or from SD to HD.
Select SF Mode
The Kayak HD system supports 1080sf (segmented frame) video formats at
23.9, 24, 25 and 30 fps. Segmented frame video captures a frame of video
progressively, but displays the frame as two interlaced fields.
This can give a slightly different look to the resulting video playback. Inter-
laced and segmented frame video requires different internal system video
processing techniques. These include changes to crosspoint cut points,
wipe pattern geometry, and interpolation.
When using Auto Detect, the switcher system automatically detects the line
and frame rate of the incoming video reference signal and reports its sync
reference status on the menu. However, the system cannot always directly
determine whether the incoming video is interlaced or segmented frame. If
HD Auto Detect is selected as the video standard, you must set the SF Mode
manually for some rates.
Because 1080-24/23.9 fps video is only produced in segmented frame, the
system always uses segmented frame processing whenever it operates with
a 1080-24/23.9 fps sync signal.
To select the SF mode for the switcher, set the parameter HD Auto Preselect
to Segmented Frame Mode.
Adjust Internal System Timing

Genlock Phase adjusts/moves the switcher’s internal system timing with
respect to the selected reference. Adjusting the phase affects the phase of all
inputs and outputs of the switcher with respect to the external reference.
Use the AUX1 bus to check the video timing of all inputs. This compares
the video source selected on the AUX1 bus to the switcher’s internal system
timing.
Figure 246. Install E-Box Timing Aux1 Source Select

One method to determine the correct system timing phase is to select a

source on the AUX1 bus and then adjust the switcher’s phase to center the
source in the timing window. Record this phase setting. Repeat this process
for all external video sources.
Note Internal video sources cannot be measured and do not show up in the mea-
surement window when selected.
Find the average Phase value by adding the highest and lowest Phase
numbers together and then divide by two. Now recheck all sources with
the new average Phase number. Fine tune the Phase adjustment if neces-
sary.
There may be some sources that still do not fall within the legal timing
window. For these sources you will have to go back to the video source
itself and change its timing with respect to reference until it appears within
the legal timing window.
To adjust the Internal System Timing on the Kayenne XL:
1. Observe the vertical black cursor in the timing window to see how the
source you have selected compares with the internal system timing.
2. Now adjust the internal system timing by physically turning Genlock

Phase. This adjusts the switcher sync in relation to the Reference you
have selected.
3. Turn the Genlock Phase to position the vertical black cursor as close as
possible to the middle of the green legal timing window. The vertical
black cursor must be in the green and not moving.
4. Position the black cursor (representing the timing for the video source
you have selected for AUX 1) near the center of the legal timing
window. Green indicates that the source is within legal timing and
yellow means that the source is outside legal timing window limits.
5. Write down the Phase number for each source to help determine the
average Phase number for all sources.
6. Once you have checked the timing for the first video source you
selected from the AUX1 bus, you must repeat the process for every
other video source on the AUX1 bus. Select all video sources and record
their Phase number.
7. Find the average Phase value by adding the highest and the lower
Phase numbers together and then divide by two.
8. Now set the Phase as close as possible to the average number.
9. Recheck all video sources on AUX1 for timing. Fine tune the Phase
adjustments if necessary.

Install Menu
10. There will always be a few video sources that may be out of legal timing
range, even after you have adjusted the switcher for the best average
timing for all sources. In that case, you need to go to the video source
itself and adjust its timing.
11. Check the Asynchronous buses display. If any buses are displayed or
blinking, that bus input is not in sync and the timing for its video
sources must be re-adjusted.
CAUTION If you change the Video Standard setting in the Genlock menu, you must go
back and check the timing for all video sources once again.
Note If you add additional M/Es to your switcher, you must also recalibrate your
video timing to make sure all sources are within the new smaller green legal
timing window.

UMD Page
Grass Valley offers a wide range of programmable 8-character Under
Monitor Displays, especially designed for use in Production Switcher
applications and in Control Systems for indication of source names and
Tally. Single, double and triple displays are available.
The standard modules offer green 8-character displays with red tally lights
on both sides of the display, able to be switched individually on and off for
yellow Tally. The latest versions comprise dual-color-8-character displays
which will switch the source name characters from green to an intensive
red for Tally indication.
The menu serves for installing the Under Monitor Displays connected with
the Kayenne XL and setting the tally mode. For details, refer to your Under
Monitor Display manual.
Figure 247. Install E-Box UMD

Install Menu
To program the Under Monitor Display connected to your switcher system,

press the respective buttons on the top of the menu page:
• Set Port: Touching the Port button opens a dialog with all ports plus
None like in all other menus where a port must be configured.
Note The port must be different to the ports used for Routers, DVEs, Editors, ext.
DSKs, etc.
Figure 248. Install E-Box UMD Port
• Reset: Touching the Reset button sets the display assignment to default
values.
Figure 249. Install E-Box UMD Reset
• Tally Mode:
• Red/Red: The LEDs of the UMD will signal a red tally.
• Red/Yellow: The right LED will signal a red tally and the left LED
will signal a yellow tally.
• Red/Off: The right LED will signal a red tally and the left LED is not
used.
Figure 250. Install E-Box UMD Tally Mode
• On Air Display: Touching the On Air Display button switches the tally sig-
nalization on or off.

Modify UMD Addresses

To modify the UMD address, select the parameter from the list in the
central pane. Then press Modify to change the parameters.
Select the device address (see the HEX switches on the rear panel of the
UMD devices). The UMD devices will use only the LSB of the physical
MPK addresses (which is a 32 bit address).
Valid range: 00 ... BF (FF disables the device handling = not installed).
For details, refer to your Under Monitor Display manual.
Modify UMD Display

To modify the display select the parameter from the list in the central pane.
Then press Modify to change the parameters.
The name of the selected source on this bus will be displayed on the respec-
tive display of your UMD device

Install Menu
Machine Page
Up to four external machines (VTR, Disc Recorders, Laserdisc Players) can
be connected via Port 1…8. The Machine menu page serves to set the
respective port numbers and protocol types.
For some remote protocols configuration options are selectable (all
GVG200 based protocols, AMP, Odetics, VDCP, BVW75).
Figure 251. Install E-Box Machine Control Special Options BVW 75
To program an external machine, select the parameter from the left scroll
list. Then press Modify to change the parameters.

Machine Control Settings

unused RS422 port on the mainframe will be connected to the machine.
Figure 252. Install E-Box Machine Control Port
• Type: Select the protocol usable for your machine from the list, here
AMP_V694 is selected.
Figure 253. Install E-Box Machine Control Set Type

Install Menu
Special Machine Control Options - VDCP Protocol

• VTR 1 – 4: Use these options to select the disk servers local video ports.
• Cue mode: by jog command, default cue
When a clip is cued (Go To Timecode, Go To MarkIn/MarkOut), most disk
servers are (re)initializing their local video port. While initializing the
port, the signal is switched to black for a short time. After cuing is com-
pleted, it is usually not possible to play the clip to a timecode position
less than the cueing timecode. The Cue Mode options by jog command
prevents the disk server from (re)initializing the local video port.
Figure 254. Install E-Box Machine Control Special Options for VDCP
Note Not all disk servers are supporting this option.
• Clip names: long names, short names

• To select and activate clips with more than 8 character length, the
option long names can be used. This option requires that the disk server
also supports long clip names. The default setting short names should
be supported by every disk server.
Special Machine Control Options - ODETICS Protocol

• Clip select: mode1 (cue up), default (in preset)
If clip selection with ODETICS doesn’t work on default, use the mode 1
(cue up) option.
• Show duration: supported, not supported 
If the connected disk server supports an ODETICS protocol variant that
supports clip duration requests, use the option supported.

Special Machine Control Options - BVW-75 Protocol

Table 6. Special Machine Control Available Options
Available Settings
Name Function
(Default settings underlined.)
Record Inhibit “on” / “off” Prevents deleting already recorded material. The Rec com-
mand will be switched to a Play command.
Synch.Play “on” / “off” Synchronized the Play command for 4 machines. This option
is needed to synchronize all 4 machines (or these machines
which have switched on this option).
NOTE: Only the Play command will be synchronized.
Synch.all Cmds “on” / “off” Option like Synch.Play, all Tape Motion commands will be
synchronized.
Cmd per Field “on” / “off” Because of the limitation of some VTRs in “on” state only one
operating command per field will be transmitted.
Timecode “LTC“ / “CTL“ Selecting the timecode mode
Special Machine Control Options - AMP Protocol

• Variable speed options: m-series, or default. 
If an M-Series server cannot be controlled by using the Variable Speed
controls in the menu, select the option m-series.
Figure 255. Install E-Box Machine Control Special Options for AMP

Install Menu
VTR Emulation Settings

VTR Emulation provides a mechanism to control internal VTR based
switcher components by external editors using the BVW75 protocol. VTR
based components in Kayenne XL are EMEM (Master, PP, M/E1, ...) and
RamRecorder (Channel 1 - 6).
It is possible to control up to 5 component instances simultaneously.
Figure 256. Install E-Box VTR Emulation
To setup a VTR emulation session, select the number of the serial Kayak HD
port (Port button) that is connected to a corresponding serial port of the
editor. Select the BVW75 protocol with the Select Type button. After the
internal component has been selected (Select Device button), the chosen
switcher instance can be controlled by the editor device. To setup addi-
tional sessions, use the VTR Emulation Delegation button.
Note Port and protocol type are environment data and therefore independent from
loading and saving an application. In contrast the type of the internal compo-
nent to control is stored within an application.

Figure 257. Install E-Box VTR Emulation Port
Figure 258. Install E-Box VTR Emulation Select Device

Install Menu
P-Bus Page
The P-Bus menu page serves for setting the P-Bus (Peripheral Bus) param-
eters. The menu defines the machines which can be controlled via an RS422
bus. In the left list box of the P-Bus menu page, these machines can be pro-
vided with a name and can be activated or deactivated.
The right list box enables you to provide for each of these machines the
trigger events with function names (for example, PLAY, SHUTTLE). For
each machine there are the triggers from 0 ... 15 which can be assigned each
to other function. The name can be selected from a list of default names
which provides specific names for this application.
The list of trigger names consists of a fixed-programmed part and a freely

definable part. The freely definable part – 16 names – can be adjusted in the
sub-dialog Edit Names.
For controlling the machines, refer to the section Remote Menu.
Figure 259. Install E-Box P-Bus

To program an external machine, select the parameter from the left scroll
Figure 260. Install E-Box P-Bus Port
Figure 261. Install E-Box P-Bus Set Type

Install Menu
Aux Bus Page

Since the KayakHD does not have dedicated ME-outputs the user defines
in this subpage which ME outputs are needed. Up to 4 program and 2
preview outputs per ME are available to provide different types of Clean-
feeds. It is also possible to set an auxbus to any other source of the switcher.
When an auxbus is set to a source different from none it cannot be changed
from anywhere else in the panel neither from an EMEM recall.

Extern Key Page

The Kayak HD production switcher includes up to 6 built-in downstream
keyers. These keying capabilities can be expanded by connecting up to
three external keyers to the Kayak HD mainframe.
The external key module supports all functions which are supported in the
internal keyers and can be controlled from the Kayenne XL control panel.
Since the functions cannot always be transmitted 1:1, certain behaviors
have to be defined. These are keyer specific and are controlled for this
reason by the controller in the mainframe.
Figure 262. Install E-Box Extern Key

Install Menu
Figure 263. Install E-Box Extern Key Port
Figure 264. Install E-Box Extern Key Type

Install Panel Submenu

Figure 265. Install Panel
Since the workplace configuration should only be adjusted be experienced

technical staff, this part of the menu is grayed out to avoid accidental
changes. For changing the workplace configuration enter the displayed
menu number.
Fader Calibration
Adjustment of the fader end position values. Lower end position: 0%
signal, Upper end position: 100% signal.

Install Menu
End position means: Move the fader gently as far as it will go. During fader
adjustment moving the fader does not affect video signals.
1. Press Start Fader Calibration. Instructions for the calibration procedure

will now be shown in the display at the Transition Control Panel.
2. Move all faders to the lower end position and press the Auto button at
the Transition Control Panel.
3. Move all faders to the upper end position and press the Auto button
again, and the Fader Calibration is done.
Joystick Calibration
1. Press Start Joystick Calibration. Instructions for the calibration procedure
will now be shown in the display at the Multi Function Module.
2. Move the Joystick to bottom right corner and turn the joystick right end
stop and press the Next button at the Multi Function Module.
3. Release the joystick that it returns to its center position and press the
Next button again.
4. Move the joystick to top left corner and turn the joystick to the left end
stop and press the End button. The joystick is now calibrated
Workplace and Driver Configuration
Add a New Workplace

The Kayenne XL Control Panel supports up to 7 workplaces. A workplace
is usually a panel assembly, consisting of one or more stripes, each con-
taining one or more modules. Thus, each port of the PCU is connected to
one workplace (or none at all). It is not possible for modules which are con-
nected to the same port to belong to different workplaces. Also, each main-
frame driver is associated with exactly one workplace. If two workplaces
are controlling the same mainframe, each will have to create its own main-
frame driver instance to do so.
Figure on page 324 shows a KayenneXL panel with one workplace and one
KayenneXL Driver. All 8 Ports are assigned to that workplace.
• To add a second workplace you have to click on the Workplace button
and press Add.

Figure 266. Add a new Workspace
• To finish that process select a driver in the popup menu 

(e.g. Kayenne XL).
• To finish that process select a driver in the popup menu. 
Currently only Kayenne XL drivers are available.
• Now you should see a new workplace with its own driver.
Note Only one Kayenne XL driver should have the "auto" IP-Address! Otherwise it
is not able to connect to a mainframe! See section Setting IP-Address of
Mainframe Drivers.
Assign Ports to a Workplace

The buttons below the two list boxes show the ports of the current selected
workplace. I you press a button of a port that is assigned to an other work-
place you steal that port from that workplace. It is an exclusive-OR relation-
ship between ports and workplaces.
When you press a button of a port that is assigned to the current workplace
the port will be unassigned (assigned to none).
CAUTION Already direct unassign and reassign again will change the port to stripe
assignment and you will have to reassingn the ports to the according stripes!
Add a Driver to an Existing Workplace

• To add a Driver to an existing workplace select the workplace in the list,
press the Driver button and the Add button in Driver popup.

Install Menu
Figure 267. Add a Driver
• To finish the process select a Driver in the popup menu 

(e.g. Kayenne XL). See Figure on page 324.
• Now you should see an additional driver in the Drivers list box.
Note Only one Kayenne XL driver should have the "auto" IP-Address! Otherwise it
is not able to connect to a mainframe! See section Setting IP-Address of
Mainframe Drivers.
Setting IP Address of a Driver

• Select the Driver and press Driver -> Set-IP-Address.
• After that a window pops up where you can enter the address of the
driver. If you press default (0) and press enter, the default address of the
Panel is used. This is indicated in the Driver list box with (Auto).

Fader Calibration
Adjustment of the fader end position values. Lower end position: 0%
signal, Upper end position: 100% signal.
End position means: Move the fader gently as far as it will go. During fader
adjustment moving the fader does not affect video signals.
1. Press Start Fader Calibration. Instructions for the calibration procedure

will now be shown in the display at the Transition Control Panel.
2. Move all faders to the lower end position and press the Auto button at
the Transition Control Panel.
3. Move all faders to the upper end position and press the Auto button
again, and the Fader Calibration is done.
Joystick Calibration
1. Press Start Joystick Calibration. Instructions for the calibration procedure
will now be shown in the display at the Multi Function Module.
2. Move the Joystick to bottom right corner and turn the joystick right end
stop and press the Next button at the Multi Function Module.
3. Release the joystick that it returns to its center position and press the
Next button again.
4. Move the joystick to top left corner and turn the joystick to the left end
stop and press the End button. The joystick is now calibrated.

Install Menu
Install System Submenu

The Installation - System submenu is designed by using submenu pages. The
menu pages can be selected by touching the respective buttons on the
bottom of the menu.
The buttons on the top

• Diagnose Enable enables/disables the diagnosis in the attached control
panel and in the connected mainframe.
• Redundant Power includes/excludes the optional redundant power
supply of control panel and mainframe in the diagnosis.
HW Option Page
The menu page shows the available hardware options. The installed
options are highlighted.
Figure 268. Install System HW Option

SW Option Page
The menu page shows the available software options and gives the possi-
bility to load license files.
Figure 269. Install System SW Option

Install Menu
Temporary Licenses Page

The menu page shows the available temporary licenses with expiration
date.
Figure 270. Install System Temp

Drives Page
The menu page defines all drives which are provided with application data
on the switcher.
Figure 271. Install System, Drives
The drive in the top line (separated by a horizontal line from the other
drives in the list) enables loading and storing applications. All other drives
displayed in the list are only important for the copying procedures Copy
Config Simple and Copy Config Detailed
• Drive/Server: Name of the drive or server
• Path: Path to the application directory
• Refresh: If Yes, it can be read in again in the Copy Config dialogs by means
of the Refresh button.
• Active: If Yes, the drive is displayed in the Copy Config dialogs.

Install Menu
Devices Page
The menu page shows the name and IP address of the connected devices.
Figure 272. Install System Devices
The Device name of control panel and mainframe can be renamed by using
the Modify button.

Install Diagnose Submenu

The menu page shows system and diagnosis information and gives access
to the NetCentral settings.
Figure 273. Install Diagnose

Install Menu
Device Control Submenu

The menu page is intended for the system administrator and shows all
devices present in the switcher network.
The Device Control menu shows on the left all in the network connected
devices (Kayak-MF = Mainframe, Kayenne/Kayak-CP = Control Panel)
with IP address and software version installed.
On the right details of the selected device are listed.
CAUTION This function should be used by a qualified network administrators only. Dif-
ferent netmasks for MF and CP lead to limited communication between the
net devices.
Figure 274. Install Device Control

• Update Device
Software update.
• Config Device
Setting up IP adresses.
• Set IP Address
• Set NetMask
• Set Gateway
• Reset Device
Reset the device kernel.
• Rescan
The network will be scanned and all devices (CP=panels, MF=video
processor frame) are listed with device name, IP address and software
version installed.
• Clear Device
Note As a protection against unintended use The reset and clear function buttons
are inactive (gray). Please enter the dedicated menu number in order to
enable the button.
Figure 275. Install Device Control
• Re-initialize the RAM disk area on the flash (Clear RamDisk)

• Re-initialize the Application disk area on the flash (Clear AppDisk)
• Re-initialize the DPM FX disk area on the flash (Clear FlashExt)
• Re-initialize the hard disk (Clear HardDisk)
• Deleting the Application State (Clear AppState)
• Deleting the Operational State (Clear OpState)
• Re-initialize the State Memory Partition (Clear StateMem)
• Deleting the Licenses (Clear Licenses)
• Reset to the factory stat (Factory Clear)

Install Menu
• Set Date
Enter the date and time of the selected device.
• Set All Dates
Enter date and time of all connected devices in one step.
• Rescan
The network will be scanned and all devices (CP=panels, MF=video
processor frame) are listed with device name, IP address and software
version installed.

Config Menu
The configuration menus are organized in five subgroups:
• Main
• E-Box
• Panel
• Panel Colors
• Attached Macros
• Flexible Licenses

Config Menu
Config Main Submenu

The Config Main Submenu consists of 3 subpages:
• Application Control: Details refer to Application Control.
• Copy Config Menu: Details refer to Copy Config Menu.
• Copy Config Detailed Menu: Details refer to Copy Config Detailed Menu.
Application Control
The Config Main menu is designed to handle the use of applications within
a Kayenne XL system.
The Config Main menu shows the currently running application of the
Sidepanel connected to the mainframe and a list of applications (Available
Applications) stored on the local hard disk which is located in the Panel
Control Unit (PCU).
Applications can be loaded or stored by using the Load or Save/Save As
button. If Running Application is selected, the currently running application
(marked blue) can be stored to the local hard disk.
In order to load an application, select the application you want to use from
the Available Applications list box and press the Load or Advanced Load button
at the bottom of the menu. The list box Available Applications has two ver-
tical sections. At the top there is a short section that shows the last loaded
applications to the mainframe (up to four). The applications are displayed
in loading order with the latest one at the top. Below there is a complete list
of all applications available on the hard disk. The applications are listed in
alphabetical order. Each entry consists of an application name, a creation
date and time.
The Content Overview list displays the register resources of the control panel
(Macros) and the mainframe (EMEM, iDPM, eDPM).

Figure 276. Config Main Submenu
When you use an existing application as a start for a new one (e.g. to keep
the current source button assignment), you can use the Clear buttons in the
top row to clear complete register sections by one press of a button.
Figure 277. Config Main Clear Panel
Figure 278. Config Main Clear DPM

Config Menu
Figure 279. Config Main Clear Emem
Note Note that Clear EMEM will not clear register number 99, because this register
is often used as personal default. To clear no 99 go to the according EMEM
system and delete it manually.
Application Data
The data stored in an application contains E-MEMs, Macros, Panel Memo-
ries, button assignment and all other settings of the switcher which are not
part of the "Personal" and "Install" group.
Personal Settings, Install Panel and Install E-Box data are stored in a different
way.
When an application is saved, one additional snapshot of the total current

video state is stored with the data. When you reload the application this
state will be recovered.
Note When you install the Sidepanel, the TFTP server is started on Windows start
by default. If you have deselected the according checkbox during installation
or closed the TFTP server later manually, make sure that you restart it before
loading/saving applications (Windows Start Menu / KayenneXL / TFTP-
Server).
• Cursor Up/Down/Left/Right 
The horizontal cursor buttons are used to switch between the Running
Application and the Available Applications list. The vertical cursor buttons
and the vertical cursor digipot are used to navigate within the Available
Applications list.
• Save saves the current application
• Save As saves the current application with a selectable file name.
Note These buttons are only active when the Running Application is selected!

• Delete deletes the selected application file.

• Rename opens a dialog window to rename the selected application file.
• Protect
Write protection of the selected application. Protected applications are
marked with a cross.
• Load loads the selected application data directly.
• Advanced Load enters an application overview menu with additional
information (see below).
Note These buttons are only active when the Available Applications list is selected!
Advanced Application Load

In systems with one mainframe, one Control Panel and one Sidepanel
saving and loading applications is simple. When more Control Panels
and/or Sidepanels are involved the situation is more complex.
Let's assume your system consists of a Kayenne XL Control panel with an

attached Sidepanel and a Kayak Control panel. When you save an applica-
tion the panel data of both panels will be stored in different folders, for each
folder the IP address of the according panel is stored.
Now you load this application while the Kayak control panel is switched
off. When you save the application again the system will still remember
that the loaded application contained the Kayak control panel (although
the Kayak panel is currently switched off) and will keep this data,
including the IP address of the Kayak panel. Next time, when the Kayak
panel is in the network again it will be reloaded.
The rules for saving/loading are as follows:
Loading
• An application always contains one (and only one) mainframe. The
data for this mainframe will always be loaded.
• The data for control panels will be loaded when the IP addresses match
and these panels will then be connected to this mainframe. Even if they
are currently connected to another mainframe!
• Sidepanels do not contain any application data but they will be con-
nected to this mainframe when the IP addresses match. Even if they are
currently connected to another mainframe!

Config Menu
Saving
• The mainframe data will always be stored.
• Panel data will be stored for all panels which were in the last loaded
application plus for all panels which were connected since the last
application load. When a panel is currently not present the old data will
remain unchanged.
• Sidepanel IP-addresses will be stored for all Sidepanels which were in
the last loaded application plus for all Sidepanels which were con-
nected since the last application load.
This algorithm has the advantage of not losing any data which may be
needed later on - but for the price of gathering possibly unwanted informa-
tion and/or panel/Sidepanel IP addresses.
To clean up this unwanted data use the Advanced Load Dialog.
When you select an application in the Available Applications list, the stan-
dard Load button will give you already some information of how many
Control Panels and Sidepanels are affected by the application load.
For standard systems this should show "1x CP, 1x SP". If the numbers are
different from what you expect you should first go to Advanced Load for
more details.

Figure 280. Config Main - Advanced Load Dialog
On the left side you see the IP addresses for all stored control panels and
Sidepanels in the application. For the control panels also the type of panel
data is indicated.
On the right side you see a list of all control panels and Sidepanels which
are currently in the network. Your own Sidepanel and the attached control
panel are marked with (*).
All current panels with matching IP addresses in the stored application are
highlighted and will be part of the application load.
If your application contains IP addresses which are no longer in use, select

them and press Delete Control Panel or Delete Sidepanel to remove them.
When your application was saved on another system with different IP

addresses your control panel will not load the application data. First adapt

Config Menu
the IP address by selecting your control panel, the control panel in the
stored application and then press Adapt CP-IP-Address.
• Load Info/Application Info 
some additional info concerning application load/save.
• Save & Load
save changes and load the application.
• Save & Return
save changes and return to Main Dialog.
• Discard & Return
return to Main Dialog without saving changes.
• Show Panel Types
toggles between panel types and panel names.
• Ignore/Connect
temporarily excludes a panel from being loaded/connected.

Copy Config Menu

The Copy Config is used to save or exchange applications or user specific
data from the PCU hard disk to a connected USB device.
• Copy Simple: Whole applications can be copied from one storage device
to other storage devices listed in the device area.
• Copy Detailed: Single files such as DPM effects, Makros or EMEMs can
be copied between two existing Applications.
Figure 281. Copy Menu
Copy Simple
The menu shows lists for source and destination. In the lists, the available
storage devices, the stored applications or the connected devices of an
application can be shown.
• After copying an application from another switcher, the application
might use devices which are not available here. The devices can be
changed with the Change Device button.

Config Menu
Figure 282. Config Copy Simple Menu

• Show Drive: Internal hard disk and USB devices, if available, are shown
in the two selection areas. There are all drives listed which are activated
in the Install/System/Drives menu.
• Show Application: The applications of the selected drive are listed in the
two selection areas.
• Show Devices: The devices of the selected application are shown.
• Change Devices: Allocates a different device (E-Box, Panel) for the cur-
rently selected application in the list box. A list of currently available
devices is shown. Select the desired device. After copying an applica-
tion from another switcher, the application might use devices which are
not available here. The button is enabled only when Show Devices is
selected.
• Copy Direction: Changes the copy direction from the left to the right and
vice versa.
• Refresh: Reads the drive.
• Delete App: Deletes the selected application files from the selected drive.
• The Buttons User Wipe, Wipe Pattern, Make Memo..... at the bottom of the
menu are acting as a filter for the shown application. Only the selected
file types will be copied.
Copy Config Detailed Menu

In the Copy Detailed menu, selected files can be copied between two
existing applications. The menu shows two lists for source and destination.
In each list, a specific part of an application can be viewed.
On the highest level, all drives activated in the Install / System / Drives
menu and the Active Application are listed.
Use the Level+ and Level– buttons to navigate in the directory tree of the
application. File types and files can be selected using the Select button or
by double-clicking on an item in the source list box. In the destination list,
the same directory level must be selected! Press the Copy button to copy
the selected file.
Note Only one file can be copied in to a running application. If you select more than
one file, an error message appears. You can copy more than one file between
applications which are stored on the local hard disk.

Config Menu
Config E-Box Submenu

The Config E-Box menu is designed by using subpages. Each subpage con-
tains all settings belonging to the mainframe (E-Box) configuration func-
tions.
• M/E
• Substitution Table
• M/E Couple
• Aux Bus Couple
• Aux Bus Save Title
• DPM
• Misc
• Audio
• Aux CP
• Tally In
• Input
• GPI
• GPO
• Ext. DVE
• Editor
• Router

M/E Page
Menu page for global settings for M/E1, M/E2, M/E3, M/E-H and P/P. In
order to configure the switcher parameters select the switcher level with
the buttons P/P, M/E1, M/E2, M/E3 and M/Eh on the right.
The M/E Page is split into two subpages:

• M/E Outputs
• Misc
M/E Outputs Subpage
Figure 283. Config E-Box M/E Outputs

Config Menu
• The Config - M/E - Output menu enable the creation of up to four indepen-
dent clean feed outputs per M/E (M/Eh only two). Any of the available
keyers can be freely assigned to these outputs in order to create a multi-
client live program, by using any combination of keys.
• Assign Look Ahead Preview is used to assign the Preview outputs to one
of the M/E outputs. The Preview outputs are normally assigned to
your main live program output. If the preview output is correctly
assigned to your main live program output, a to the Preview output
connected, a monitor connected to the Preview output will show the
end result of the upcoming transition. This lets the operator know in
advance what will occur for that next transition.
Figure 284. Config E-Box M/E Output PVW Cascade
Note Depending on the number of used eDPM send channels, some of the avail-
able output channels in the Cleanfeed Configuration pane will be deactivated.
See examples below.

Figure 285. Example

Config Menu
Misc Subpage
Figure 286. Config E-Box M/E Misc
To configure the Misc parameters, select the parameter from the scroll list.
• Preview Output: Key Signal mode normally used in post production
environments. If an M/E is configured for Look Ahead Preview, the
end result of the upcoming transition can be viewed on a monitor con-
nected to the Preview output of the used M/E. This lets the operator
know in advance what will occur for that next transition at the Program
output. The Key PVW button at the Multi Function module is used to
output the key result or the black and white key signal on the Preview
output, depending on the selected keyer delegation button at the Multi
Function module.

Example of Key Preview and Look Ahead PVW Mode

1. Set up a keyer on key 1 at the Program Preset bank.
2. Select the PP, using the M/E Delegation button, and select key 1 with
the Key Delegation Button at the Multi Function Module.
3. If you press now once the Key Preview button (PVW) at Multi Function
Module once, the preview output of the PP will output key 1 keyed
over a background, which is selected at the BGD A bus, and the Ahead
PVW is inactive. If you now press the key PVW button a second time,
the review output will show the black and white key signal. This is
quite helpful if you need to adjust a Chroma Key in order to avoid
transparencies in the keying result.
4. Press the key preview button a third time, the lamp of the PVW button
will be lit, and the Look Ahead Preview will be active again.
Figure 287. Multi Function Module
Example Combined Key Signal Mode

1. Set up at least two keyer or even more at the PP bank. You can use
Chroma Key, Luma key .....
2. Select the PP, using the M/E Delegation button, and select key 1 with
the Key Delegation Button at the Multi Function Module.
3. Press the key button at the multifunction panel to access the key
adjustment main page.

Config Menu
4. Hold down the key PVW button 2 seconds and keep the key preview
button pressed, and select the keyer which you want to see at the
preview output, using the key delegation button. When you hold down
the key preview button for more than 2 seconds, all keyers involved in
the key are indicated by the highlighted key delegation buttons.
5. Toggle the key PVW button until the lamp turns off, and now you will
see a combined key signal from the preview output of the used M/E
bank.
Note Please note that the default Look Ahead preview mode is not available in the
Combined Key Signal mode.
• Black Preset Abort (On/Off): 

When another program source is selected, a currently running transi-
tion with BLK PST on is aborted, the BLK PST button lamp turns off, and
the selected source is taken as program.
• Transition Abort (On/Off): 
When another program source is selected, a currently running transi-
tion is aborted, and the selected source is taken as program.
• FTB Cancel (On/Off):
When another program source is selected, an active fade-to-black is
instantly cancelled, so that the image with the selected source is visible
on that stage‘s program output. This is available only in non-layered
mode.
• Auto Transition Abort Inhibit (On/Off): 
In On state, an Auto Transition can not be paused by pressing the Auto
button again.
• Enable Transition Trigger Preset Bus: Enable Transition Trigger Preset /
Program bus.

Transition Trigger
Transition Trigger Preset/Program Bus is used in combination with the
Input Event functionality and can be configured in the Ebox/Install/Input
Menu (Menu number 040102)
With Input Event you can assign an Event to each of the physical inputs. An
Event can be an auto start of a Tape Machine, Video Server, a complex time
lime, snap shot or DVE Effect.
If you use an auto start of Video Server, the Kayenne XL can be configured
in a way where you just need to push the source button assigned to the
input which is used for the Video Server.
The Cut/Auto button or even the Transition Bar can be used to start the Video
Server and switch the source to the program output. The following
example explains how to configure an auto start of a Video Server config-
ured as Media Player 1 connected to video input 1, using the PP stage.
Example:
Auto Start of a Video Server using the Cut/Auto button or Transition Bar:
1. Make sure that the used video server is connected through a serial cable
connection to the mainframe, the connection is established, and the
clips are also available and navigable using the Media Player (130100).
The configuration of the Video Server can be done in the
Installation/Ebox/Machine menu (040110). For detailed information, refer
to Machine Page on page 313.
2. Open the Install/Machine menu (040102). Double click on the Event tab
which is corresponding to the input. In this case input 1. Now you will
see the main group page of the event menu. Use the following path to
assign the play command for the video server to the corresponding
Video Input: 

Machine Control/Media Player 1/Motion Command/set by value/Play
3. Now open the Config/Ebox/M/E/Misc menu (050108). Switch Cut Trigger

PGM Bus to on in order to enable the event assigned to the input 1. Next
make sure that Input 1 is not selected at the Program Bus, and load an
existing clip from the server, using the Media Player Clips menu (130100).

Config Menu
4. Finally select Input 1 at the program bus, the clip starts to play and is
switched to the PGM out put of the PP stage. Depending on the type of
server used, it may be possible that you see a freeze frame at the
beginning of the clip. This can be prevented by setting up a preroll time.
Open the Input menu (040102) and set the preroll time in the preroll tab
for the used input to 2 or 3 frames, depending on the reaction time of
the used video server. The preroll time is calculated in Fields! Switch to
another input, load the clip again, and switch to input 1. Now you
should see the playing clip without a freeze frame at the beginning. If
not, increase the preroll time to your requirements. The main function
of preroll is to delay the switching of the source to the program output,
using the Program, Cut or Auto button. The Transition Bar cannot be
delayed. Assigned events will be executed directly, in this case the Play
command for the video server.
5. Enable trigger Preset Bus is used to start the video server by using the
Cut or Auto button, or Transition bar at the transition module, if enabled.
Input 1 needs to be preselected at the preset bus. Enable transition/cut
trigger key bus is used, for example, if the video server is used as a key
source, or used in combination with a DVE effect.

Substitution Tables Page

Menu page card for generating and editing a substitution table
Figure 288. Config E-Box Subs Tables
The menu page contains 15 substitution tables. These tables can be used by
coupled Aux buses or coupled M/Es to exchange the source when the
coupled Aux bus follows his master. Refer also to the Aux Couple and M/E
Couple menu pages described below.
• Modify Name: Enter a new name for the substitution table.
• All Subst.: Sets all substituted inputs to a selectable input, to white, or
delete all.
• Add Subst.: Enter a new substitution pair in the selected table.
• Remove Subst.: Remove a substitution pair from the selected table.
• Modify Subst.: Sets all substituted inputs to a selectable input, to
white/black, or delete all, if no substitution pair is available.

Config Menu
M/E Couple Page

M/E Couple is used to support an additional transmission line output on
a switcher whose main parts are identical to that of its main output, but
differs in country specific video components (source and/or keyer substi-
tution). Those source replacements can be defined with substitution tables.
EMEM recalls are used to set all master and coupled M/Es into an initial
state depending on the next effect. With respect to the meaning of the effect
the transition module then works correct with CUT, AUTO and the fader
commands.
Figure 289. Config E-Box M/E Couple

Coupling Rules
Each M/E can be coupled to any other M/E as long as they belong to the
same application and the coupling doesn't become recursive. The coupling
can be done in serial, parallel and in combinations.
• Serial: PP to M/E3 to M/E2
M/E3 is coupled to P/P.
M/E2 is coupled to M/E3.
M/E1 is not coupled.
• Parallel: PP to M/E3; PP to M/E2
Both, M/E3 and M/E2 are coupled to PP. M/E1 is not coupled.
• Combined: PP to M/E3; PP to M/E2
Both, M/E3 and M/E2 are coupled to P/P. 
M/E2 to M/E1
M/E1 is coupled to M/E2.
Note Recursion is not possible. PP to M/E3, M/E3 to PP is not allowed.
Each M/E can be used as a Master M/E. If a coupled M/E is modified

directly via a control unit, the master M/E is not affected.
Note When the Half M/E is coupled (for example DSK mode), the stage is not avail-
able for M/E Couple.
Coupled Resources
After selection of the M/E Couple Mode in the Config - E-Box menu, the fol-
lowing M/E resources can be coupled:
• PGM and PST bus (optionally by one substitution table) at M/E
crossbar.
• CUT, AUTO and FADER at M/E transition.
By selecting M/E Couple in the Status menu, the following function can be
coupled in addition:
• Fill buses of the keyers. Together with the key memory, most keyer
adjustments can be recalled (no wipes...).

Config Menu
State Synchronization
After coupling is executed, the state of the coupled M/E will be sychro-
nized automatically with the master M/E. This synchronizing is
depending on the ME-Couple Components settings in the M/E menu.
Figure 290. M/E Couple Components Settings in the M/E Menu
The state synchronization can be made in three levels:

• Background rows
• Key rows, if selected
• Next Transition, if selected
TiM/E-Memo Handling
M/E coupling works on command level. This means that TiM/E-Memo
recalls and application load are disregarding M/E coupling. It is used to
preset M/Es.
Applications:
Every application has its own, complete M/E-coupled structure. If an

application is loaded or the coupled state of one application is changed, this
new modification is checked and accepted or rejected (see Coupling rules).

Aux Bus Couple Page

Menu page for coupling the AUX bus to other switcher buses (masters). If
the source on the master is changed, the source on the coupled AUX bus fol-
lows.
Figure 291. Config E-Box Aux Bus Couple

Config Menu
To configure the Aux Bus Couple parameters, select the parameter from the
scroll list. Then press Modify to change the parameters.
• Coupled To: Select the desired switcher bus
• Mode:
• Normal: In coupled mode, additional selection of sources on the
AUX bus is possible.
• Exclusive: In coupled mode, additional selection of sources on the
AUX bus is not possible.
• Subst. Table: 
With the Subs. Table button, a substitution table can be selected. These
tables can be used by coupled AUX buses or coupled M/Es to exchange
the source when the coupled AUX bus follows his master.
Figure 292. Config E-Box Aux Bus Couple Auxbus Coupled to...
Figure 293. Config E-Box Aux Bus Couple Mode

Aux Bus Save Title Page

Menu page for fixed title settings.
Figure 294. Config E-Box Aux Bus Save Title
These adjusting elements enable fading-in of different auxiliary lines (Box,

Center Cross) into each individual AUX bus. The fading servers as an aux-
iliary means to mark defined picture areas (for example, areas for logos,
subtitles, 4:3 raster) in productions. The digipots on the right enable you to
adjust the title box or the center cross over the complete picture area.

Config Menu
To configure the Aux Bus Couple parameters, select the parameter from the
scroll list. Then press Modify to change the parameters.
• Center: Centers the selected auxiliary line in the picture center.
• Show Title: Fades in a rectangular frame.
• Show Cross: Fades in a center cross.
• Save Title / Center Cross: 
Delegation buttons for rectangular box and Center Cross adjustments.
• Set Area to Save Action: Default for Save Action.
• Set Area to Save Title: Default for Save Title.
• Save default: 
Saves modified adjustments of Save Action or Save Title as a default.
Figure 295. Config E-Box Aux Bus Save Title

DPM Page
Menu page for DPM production crop settings.
The production crop settings enable you to adjust an overall crop for the
DPM channels. Additional cropping per channel is possible in the
DPM/Transform/Crop menu.
To configure the Crop parameters, select the parameter pad, and adjust the
values with the digipots on the right.
Figure 296. Config E-Box DPM
• Reset: Restores the default Crop values.

• Control 4:3: 
Production Crop calculated in 4:3 aspect ratio (SD mode only).
• Control 16:9: 
Production Crop calculated in 16:9 aspect ratio (SD mode only).

Config Menu
Misc Page
Menu page for global settings.
Figure 297. Config E-Box Misc

To configure the Misc parameters, select the parameter from the scroll list.
• Format: Select an M/E specific TV format. 4:3 or 16:9 selection is pos-
sible in the respective M/E menu.
• Field Dominance: The button can be used to switch between Any Field,
Field1 and Field2. The setting concerns the switching of the crosspoints
on all buses, the start of auto transitions, switching with Cut, and the
recalling of snapshots and timelines. In position Any Field, switching
occurs at the beginning of the next frame. In position Field 1/2, switching
or starting occurs before the corresponding field.
• Replace Async: The parameter permits the selection of different modes
for the treatment of asynchronous sources in the switching levels
(M/E1, M/E2, M/E3, PP, M/E-H):
• On: If Background/Program are asynchronous, enabled keyers are
disabled. If Background/Program are asynchronous and the fill
signal of a keyer becomes asynchronous, the enabled keyer is dis-
abled. If Background/Program or Preset are asynchronous and a
transition is selected, a cut is performed at the end of the transition.
• Off: Asynchronous signals are phased over H and are passed.
• Aux Preview Bus: Selecting the desired AUX Preview Bus None, Aux1 ...
Aux48.
• Auto Aux Preview: Enable or disable the Auto PVW mode. In enabled
condition the key PVW, mask PVW or the chroma key cursor signal of
the respective mixing level is switched on the PVW bus.
• Key Memory Auto Save: If the KeyMemo button is switched on in a
Keyers menu, the key memory is always recalled if the key sources are
changed during control panel operation. These changes can occur
directly by selecting another key source or also indirectly by changing
the Fill source or the Split mode. For storing the key settings in the key
memory two modes are available:
• Auto Save: If the switch Key Memory AutoSave=On, the settings of
the previous key signal are stored automatically before the settings
of the next key are recalled. If the switch Key Memory
AutoSave=Off, the stored settings of the new key are recalled
without saving the previous settings.
• Manual Storing: Key Memory AutoSave=Off. For storing the current
settings into the key memory, press the button of the respective Fill
source approximately 2 seconds. The storing is confirmed by a short
beep in the control panel.
• Half M/E Mode: Selects the Half-M/E mode: Normal M/E or DSK mode
• In Not coupled mode, this button can be used in any panel M/E to
delegate the panel M/E to the Half M/E. Once delegated, the Half
M/E can be used exactly like any other full M/E.

Config Menu
• In DSK mode, the button works only in panel M/Es that are dele-
gated to the M/E that the Half M/E is coupled to. In this case, the
panel M/E is also delegated to the Half M/E, but the background
buses of the crossbar still control the full M/E, because the back-
ground buses of the Half M/E are fix set to the outputs of the
coupled full M/E.
• Half M/E Keyers coupled to: Delegates the keyer to M/E1, M/E2, M/E3 or
PP.
• Kayak MultiMix enable: The parameter can be used to set the Kayak Mul-
tiMix mode. If the parameter is switched to On, the MultiMix button in
the M/E Main menu is visible, and the MultiMix mode can be used.
• H/V Blanking: The parameter can be used to switch over between trans-
parent and blanked. In blanked position the horizontal and the vertical
blank intervals are replaced by BLACK, and the DD35-internal sync
frame is added. In transparent position the information contained in
the vertical blanking interval (VITS, videotext, etc.) are kept. This func-
tion can be selected for each output and AUX buses separately.

Audio
Menu page serves for adjustment of audio switchers via ESAM2 protocol.
Figure 298. Config E-Box Audio
It is possible to define up to 64 internal audio channels. In the left list box,

they are provided with a name. To each of these internal audio channels can

Config Menu
be assigned as many audio channels as you like. They are displayed in the
list box Audio Source.
• The buttons Add Source and Delete Source enable you to vary them. The
respective internal audio channel is marked blue for this purpose. To
each video input can be assigned an internal audio channel. This is indi-
cated in the third list box.
• The listbox Audio Settings is used to perform basic adjustments:
• M/E: The audio switcher operates only on one M/E which is speci-
fied here.
• Program / Preset: Audio Program and Audio Preset can be mapped
on an external Aux bus.
• The button Assign Buttons opens a second dialog page. This page
enables assignment of the audio channels to the individual buttons of
the external AUX buses for Audio Program / Audio Preset.
Operating
The audio switcher follows only PGM (PST). Only PGM is always to be
heard. The crossbar selection only is switched. If there is no audio assigned
to the video, the last audio source stays.
• Cut PGM and PST: Sources swap related to the video.
• Auto: Works only correctly when the associated audio sources differ
from each other. Otherwise, the equal audio sources are temporarily
muted.
• PGM/PST: Enables you to control the two buses as EXT AUX BUSES.
When switching on these and simultaneously on the corresponding
video crossbar, the last button pressed takes precedence.
With the ESAM2 protocol, transition with the fader is not possible.

Aux CP
Menu page for configuring the AUX Control Panel connected to the main-
frame. The menu page contains two subpages:
• Setup
• Assign
Setup Page
Figure 299. Config E-Box Aux CP Setup

Config Menu
Figure 300. Config E-Box Aux CP Delegation
To configure the AUX CP delegation parameters, select the parameter from

the scroll list. Then press Modify to change the parameters.
• None: No function
• 2nd: This button is used as 2nd button, that is, it shifts the source selec-
tion buttons.
• 3nd: This button is used as 3rd button, that is, it shifts the source selec-
tion buttons.
• AUX, M/E Bus, PP Bus: These buttons delegate the AUX-CP to the 
crosspoint selection for the given bus.
• Router: These buttons delegate the AUX-CP to crosspoint selection for
the given external AUX bus.
• RamRecorder: These buttons delegate the AUX-CP to crosspoint selec-
tion for the RamRecorder channels.
• EMEM: This button delegates the AUX-CP to register recall for the given
EMEM system.

At least one function other than None, 2nd or 3rd must be programmed.
Otherwise the AUX CP performs no action at all.
Note Since the CP-3020 AUX control panel module has only two delegation but-
tons, Deleg 1 and Deleg 2 may be programmed with 2nd and 3rd. In this
case, Deleg 3 defines the function of the AUX CP. Deleg 4..6 can be
ignored.

Config Menu
Assignment
Figure 301. Config E-Box Aux CP Assign
• Insert Position: Inserts the selected input at the current cursor position
and moves the next inputs downwards to the end. At the end of the
levels, the last assignment get lost.
• Delete Position: Deletes the selected input at the current cursor position
and moves all the next inputs upwards. At the end of the levels, a None
will be inserted.
• Reset Assign: Resets the assignment.
• Assign: When the AUX Control Panel is used for crosspoint selection of
internal buses, the sources can be assigned freely to the source selection
buttons of the AUX-CP. To do this, Assign changes the contents of the
menu page. The procedure for input assignment is very similar to the
input assignment for the control panel.

• Assign None:
• All None: All buttons are assigned to no input.
• Default: Sets the factory default input assign.
• = All: Sets the input assign like the input assign for bus row ALL.
• = AUX All: Sets the input assign like the input assign for bus row
AUX ALL (control panel only).

Config Menu
Tally In Page
The General Purpose Interface Output/Tally menus are used to configure
the tally system. There are multiple tally calculators, three different tally
calculation methods, and user assignment of tally relays. The results of the
tally calculators are applied to the tally relays on the Video Processor frame,
and those relays control external tally lights.
Tally is recalculated and refreshed every field.
In addition, the GPO Output contact closures are used by the Kayak HD
system for simple trigger control of external devices.
About Tally Systems

In general, a tally system identifies which sources to the switcher contribute
to the final picture at a selected point in the video chain. The identification
is communicated by activating relays in the video frame. The method by
which the sources are determined is called the tally calculation.
The tally calculation begins at a point in the video path and then traces the
path of the signals upstream to their original video (and key) sources. The
state of the switcher affects tally. For example, tally on a true clean feed only
includes sources that contribute to the main output, but tally on a program-
mable clean feed can include sources that do not contribute to the main
output.
The On Air Tally (Red Tally) calculations are essential for switcher opera-
tion. This tally calculation forms the basis for On Air indication (panel,
camera tally lights, etc.), and other functions such as external device Auto
Start, Off Air Advance, or router protections. On Air tally calculations nor-
mally start at the Pgm-Pst PGM outputs.
User tally calculations can be used for purposes other than On Air tally.
These tally calculations still trace the video path upstream from the speci-
fied points in the video path, but the starting point does not necessarily
have to be a program output. For example, a Look Ahead tally begins at the
Pgm-Pst Look Ahead Preview (LAP). When a transition is not in progress,
this virtual output is not on air.
The Output Tally (Green Tally) calculator indicates which sources contribute
to designated outputs. For example, an M/E Iso tally is a user configured
Output tally set up to begin at an M/E’s PGM. The tally would indicate
what contributes to the M/E's program outputs but not anything down-
stream of it. The tally would be the same whether or not the M/E was On
Air.
The Look Ahead Tally (Yellow Tally) calculator indicates which sources will
be on air if a main transition is performed on the selected level. One way
this can be used is for a second set of tally lamps on a camera to alert the
camera operator that his camera is next to be taken on air. Many control

room monitor walls also include a secondary tally indicator for Look
Ahead.
However, if an M/E is placed downstream of Pgm-Pst, the On Air tally cal-

culation can be configured to start at that M/E's program outputs. If this
situation is planned, it is recommended that AUX buses be set up to
provide the real program outputs for the switcher and the On Air calcula-
tion configured using those AUX buses as the tributaries.
The Tally In menu page shows the basic configuration menu for different
Tally calculation methods. In this menu one or more output channels can
be activated for signalling.
• Red Tally - On Air Tally - for source and monitor signalling
• Green Tally - Special On Air Tally - for isolated sources
• Yellow Tally - Look Ahead Tally
Figure 302. Config E-Box Tally

Config Menu
To configure the Tally In parameters, select the parameter from the scroll
• Tally System Overall: active / on / off
• Tally System 1 ... 4: Prepared for multi-applications
Figure 303. Config E-Box Tally Active On Off

Input Page
The Input Page consists of 3 subpages:
• General
• Machine Delegation Buses
• Colors
General Subpage
This menu page is used to name sources and couple keys for sources.
In Install / Ebox / Input you can specify the default input names (4 & 8 char-
acter name size). They can be individually replaced by the input names that
can be entered on configuration level. The essential difference is that names
changed here in this menu are stored along with the Application Load &
Save mechanism.
If you have replaced a name for an input on configuration level and you
want to go back to installation name level, you have to clear the related
name(s) in this menu an resave your application.
Since typically the 4 character names are displayed in the system, there is a
special rule applied to the replace mechanism. Replacing a 4 character
input name in the menu replaces both 4 & 8 character names of install level.

Config Menu
Figure 304. Config E-Box Input - General
To configure the source names, select the parameter from the scroll list.
• 4 char ID / 8 chr ID:
The Name of a source is displayed on the Control panel, and is limited
to four characters. The Long Name of a source appears in configuration
menus, and can be eight characters long. Touching Modify brings up a
keypad to enter that name for the selected source.
• Coupled:
Touching the Modify button calls a subdialog. In this menu the Key to be
coupled to the selected Fill source can be selected.
• Real Input: Touching Modify on one of the 16 Virtual Inputs brings up a
subdialog to select the real input.
• Attached Machine: 
You can attach machines to an input to use it for automatic delegation
of the machine control sections in the control panel System bar.
Touching the Modify button calls a subdialog where you can select your
machine.

Figure 305. Config E-Box Input- Real Input
Once a machine is attached, you can easily assign the control of this
machine to a machine control section: Hold down the previous and next
button in the according section and press the input of the assigned machine
on any crossbar row of the control panel. Pressing the input again will
remove the assignment. You can assign more than one machine to a control
section. By default you will always see the last assignment. To automati-
cally have the control section follow the assigned input machines you have
to define a delegation bus (see Machine Delegation Buses Subpage on
page 383).

Config Menu
Machine Delegation Buses Subpage
Figure 306. Config E-Box Input - Machine Delegation
Once you have your machine attached to the according inputs (see General
Subpage on page 380), you can define in this page which bus rows should
delegate the control sections of the System bar.
Note Only machines will follow when they are assigned to the according control
section.
Example:
The machines Ramrecorder 1 - 6 are attached to the inputs Ram recorder

1 - 6.
• Control section 1 has only Ram1 assigned
• Control section 2 has Ram1 and 2 assigned
• Control section 3 has Ram1 - 6 assigned.

When you now switch in the preset or program row of ME1 (example of
graphic above)
• Control section 1 will always stay on Ram1
• Control section 2 will only follow for source selections of Ram1 and 2
• Control section 3 will follow all 6 Ram recorder channels.
By this mechanism it is possible to have automated direct control of any
number of machines.

Config Menu
Colors Subpage
Figure 307. Config E-Box Input - Color
Besides of using colors for row delegations ("horizontal color coding", see
Panel Color Page on page 408), you can use colors for specific inputs ("ver-
tical color coding").
This menu allows you to highlight specific inputs of the bus rows or e.g.
group all Vtrs by a certain color. If an input color is set to Bus Color, the color
of the according row delegation is used.

GPI Page
Menu page for mainframe GPI settings
Figure 308. Config E-Box GPI
To configure the GPI parameters, select the parameter from the scroll list.
The selected function will be triggered on the edge defined in the when
button GPI Enable is On. However, there are some exceptions where the GPI
works as a ”static” input. That is actions take place after a change in the GPI
state, but the value depends on the GPI‘s state after the change. Also GPI
Enable does not need to be On for these functions.

Config Menu
GPI Functions
• None: GPI has no function.
• Command: User-defined command code. See note below.
• Misc: Switch over the Video Standard or Video Format. This is redun-
dant function because the switcher can auto detect the video standard
from the signal at the reference input.
• Video Format (4x3, 16x9)
• Inactive = 4x3
• Active = 16x9
• Video Standard (625/50, 525/60)
• Inactive = 625/50
• Active = 525/60
• Auto transition: Starting Auto Transition, selected in the pop-up list
• Recall Snapshot: Starting Snapshot, selected in the pop-up list
• M/E1: Starting function, selected in the pop-up list
• PP: Starting function, selected in the pop-up list#
• Stores: Starting Video Store or MPR Store, selected in the pop-up list
Note In Command mode, user-defined commands are selected and are transmitted
to the switcher at a received trigger event. Selecting Command enables you
to directly enter the command code. For this purpose, refer to the DD35
command set, which can be obtained from the manufacturer. The other selec-
tions are defined in the text files GPICMDMF.TXT (mainframe) and
GPICMDCP.TXT (panel). These files are contained in the directory
c:/programme/dd35/bin.
Note When entering commands, a special syntax has to be considered. It is pos-

sible to add predefined parameters to a command. The available commands
are listed in the files mentioned above. For editing, it is best to copy and
match existing entries. In any case, the DD35/XtenDD command set is
required.

Figure 309. Config E-Box GPI Function

Config Menu
GPO Page
The Menu page serves to configure up to 128 channels (32 channels per
M/E). The physical properties of each GPO/Tally channel can be adjusted
in the Install GPO menu.
Figure 310. Config E-Box GPO
To configure the GPO parameters, select the parameter from the scroll list.
Assign a GPO name, select a source, and select the Tally mode for each GPO
channel.
• Name: Assign a name.
• Output Tally:
• Select a Tally mode (Red, Green, Yellow).
• Select a Source from the list.

Figure 311. Config E-Box GPO select Tally color
Figure 312. Config E-Box GPO select Tally source

Config Menu
Ext. DVE Page

The menu page serves to control up to two external DVEs and the internal
DPM processor as well.
For DVE control, the AUX buses supplying the video and key signals have
to be directly indicated in the GVG200 protocol. In order to keep an assign-
ment variable, this menu page is available enabling an AUX bus mapping.
Thus, not only the permanently entered AUX buses can be used but also all
the other AUX buses.
Each time the DVE Key and Fill source are assigned to AUX buses (that is
the normal way working with the DVE), the DVE Fill source is changed at
the AUX bus selection. The coupled key source is set on the corresponding
DVE Key bus. This coupling can be activated or deactivated with the
parameter Key Bus Coupled On/Off.
Figure 313. Config E-Box extern DVE

Editor Page
The Kayenne XL Package can be controlled by up to four editing systems
via the RS422 interface of the switcher mainframe. Control is made by
means of the different protocol types which can be supported by the
switcher.
Basic editor control of the Kayak HD system is supported. Capabilities

include: Source selection, Key selection, Wipe selection, Preview, Timeline
control (Jog/Go to Time, Run, Rewind), Transition Mode, Rate, and Trig-
gers, All Stop, EMEM.
The menu page enable you to re-direct external editing system commands
to different system outputs. Select the desired editor 1 to 4, select the
desired parameter, and then touch Modify and select an alternative target
setting for the editor command.
The menu page serves to configure up to four editors.
Figure 314. Config E-Box Editor

Config Menu
Router Page
The menu page can be used to enter source names at the External AUX Bus
if the router control protocol excludes the name transfer, for example ASCII
protocol. The 4-digit names occur at the external AUX bus source and they
are fixed for each external AUX bus.
Router control protocols with a name transfer do not need the setting here.
These protocols are able to grab the name from the external control unit, for
example Prosan.
Figure 315. Config E-Box Router
To enter the source names, select the parameter from the scroll list. Then
press Modify to change the parameters. A keyboard appears to enter a four
digit source name.

Config Panel Submenu

Config Panel Submenu consists of four subpages:
• Macro Page: Details refer to Macro Page.
• Assignment Page: Details refer to Assignment Page.
• Brightness Page: Details refer to Brightness Page.
• PMEM Page: Details refer to PMEM Page.
Macro Page
The Macro Page consists of two subpages:
• Macro Page (itself)
• Macro Editor: Details refer to Macro Editor.
Figure 316. Config Panel Macro

Config Menu
The system holds up to 1000 macros which can be renamed.
Since each Crossbar module and the Auxbus module can be delegated to
macro operation it can be useful to change the default start number for the
macros per row. Make sure that you have selected the appropriate crossbar
button type (15 /25 /35 Button Crossbar).

Macro Editor
Macro Editor is a new feature released with software version V703.
Since the Kayenne XL control panel has a new, powerful command struc-
ture, this Macro Editor supports new features which make macros more
powerful than ever before.
In contrary to a snapshot which "reads" e.g. the current key mode from the
switcher, in macro you had to tell that you want e.g. "linear key mode". The
new Editor allows you to read the current state from the switcher. This
speeds up building and allows you to update existing macros with one
press of a button.
The Macro Editor can also create, modify, view Macros build in the 'Classic'
style, used by the Sidepanel program.
To enter the macro edit mode select an existing macro end press the Edit
Macro button or select an empty position and press Create Macro.

Config Menu
The Macro Edit Dialog
Figure 317. Macro Editor Dialog
This dialog shows the contents of the selected macro - the commands.
Since the Kayenne XL control panel supports multiple mainframes in par-

allel you can show the command destination by enabling the according
button.
Note Only necessary for customers who use multi mainframes.
While recording, a macro collects all commands created by the Kayenne XL

panel and the attached Sidepanel. Since the Sidepanel can also work in
combination with Kayak control panels which only support the 'Classic'
command structure, the commands recorded via the Sidepanel are shown
with the prefix 'Classic'. These commands cannot be automatically updated
with the Update Data button (details see below).
In the example above the last two commands will do the same, one build
via the Kayenne XL panel, the later via the Sidepanel

Creating, Modifying, Updating, Deleting Commands

New commands can be created in 'classic' style or 'Kayenne XL' style.
Once a command exists, modifying will be done in the style it was created
or recorded. You can also update your macros to the current switcher state.
This is only possible for macros created in 'Kayenne XL' style.
Create a New Commands 'Classic' Style
Figure 318. Macro Editor Dialog - Create Classic Style
Users familiar with the XtenDD or Kayak SD/HD system will recognize
this way of creating a macro. You make your selection from the left to the
right, first select your Main Group, then the Subgroup, the Function, and at the
end the Action Type and the Parameter(s).
When the command is completely defined the three insert buttons are
enabled.

Config Menu
The Insert at Selection button is only enabled when a command line was
selected before.
Modify an Existing Commands 'Classic' Style
Figure 319. Macro Editor Dialog - Modify Classic Style
Depending on the command you will have several options to change your
Main Group and/or your Subgroup. Changing the Function will result in a
new selection for Action Type and Parameter(s).

Create a New Command 'Kayenne XL' Style
Figure 320. Macro Editor Dialog - Create Kayenne XL Style
For creating a 'Classic' macro you always define your command by a choice
of Main Group, Subgroup, Function, etc. Finding the right command can be
difficult when you do not know which Main Group contains the desired
command.
The 'Kayenne XL' style commands are all build out of segments like you see
above, e.g. BGDA, BGDB, BUS, IDPM, etc.
To find the desired command you can either select a Category, one or more
Subgroups or use one or more of the four search for… buttons. The matching
commands are displayed in the Commands found list.
The example above shows all commands which contain ME2, KEY1, and
IDPM and LIGHT1.

Config Menu
• Search via Category, 1st subgroup, 2nd subgroup, 3rd subgroup

Category makes a coarse pre-selection for the 1st subgroup. When you
make a selection in the 1st subgroup, the 2nd subgroup offers only seg-
ments which are available in combination with the 1st subgroup. 
In the example above only commands are listed which contain ME2
and KEY1. With the 3rd subgroup you could bring down further the
number of found commands by limiting them to only commands
which contain e.g. ADDITIVE.
• Search via Search Fields
An alternative way to find the desired command is offered via the
search for... buttons. 
Press a search for… button and enter some characters of the segment
you are looking for. All segments matching your entry will be listed.
You can use one of the found segments to limit your command search.
By using more search for... lists in parallel you can bring the number of
matching commands further down. 

In the example above you see that one search for... contains an "I", the
list below offers all segments starting with "I". Another search for... con-
tains LIGHT. The selection of IDPM in the one search list and LIGHT1 in the
other list in combination with the selections made via Category, 1st sub-
group, and 2nd subgroup limits the matching commands to all com-
mands containing ME2, KEY1, IDPM and LIGHT1. When you are looking
e.g. for the command for iDpm Color Saturation you can either walk
through the list of found commands or use another search for... list, type
"S" or "SAT" to find the SATURATION segment and select it. Keep in mind
that, as a result of your search functions, the Command found list can be
empty. In this case no single command contains all selected segments
and you have to clear some selections.

For some commands you can set absolute values are increment the
value by a certain amount. Press the Show Incr. Commands button to see
whether an increment command is available.
When you have selected your desired command you can either enter or
select the according parameter (in the example above 45.8%) or you can
read the current value from the switcher by pressing the Update Parameter
button.
There are some commands which do not represent a single parameter state
in the switcher like e.g. Recall Emem Register 7 or Reset RGB correction. For
those parameters the update function is disabled.
When the command is completely defined the insert buttons are enabled.
The Insert at Selection button only enabled when a command line was
selected before.

Modify an Existing Command 'Kayenne XL' Style
Figure 321. Macro Editor Dialog - Modify Kayenne XL Style
In this dialog you can change to any of the offered alternatives and/or
change the parameter(s).
• Update Parameters of Macro Commands
Figure 322. Macro Editor Dialog- Update Parameter
This function adds a new feature to macros which was until now only
known for snapshots.

Config Menu
You can update the parameters of only the selected command or of all com-
mands.
'Classic' commands do not support an update. Furthermore some com-

mands cannot be updated, due to the nature of the command, e.g. "Start
Auto Transition".
The updated parameters are marked with ==> updated.
Figure 323. Macro Editor Dialog - Commands
When you have finished your editing, you can decide to save or discard the
changes made.
Figure 324. Macro Editor Dialog - Function Buttons

Assignment Page
Menu page for Input Assignment. The menu is selectable only when a
control panel is attached.
Figure 325. Config Panel Assign
• Box Bus Rows: 

Pre-selects the panel's bus rows for which the Input Assignment should
be changed. Selectable are: ALL (= all bus rows on the panel) P/P-Bgnd
+ Fill P/P-Key AUX All AUX 1 ... AUX 48.
• Box Input: 
Shows a sorted list of all assignable inputs (Number, 4 character name,
8 character name).

Config Menu
• Box Btn Assigned: 

Shows a list of all assignable crosspoint buttons.
• Make sure the correct crossbar type is selected for your assignment
(15 / 25 / 35 Button Crossbar).
• 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th indicate the shift level for the assignment. To assign
an input to a button select the input in the Input Box, select the
button number in the right box and press Assign. Both the input box
and the right box cursor will advance by one position, allowing
easy assignment of subsequent inputs to subsequent buttons. The
Kayenne XL control panels allows to assign shiftlevel functions
(2nd, 3rd, etc.) and the row delegation function (RDel) to any avail-
able source button. When your Shiftlevel Couple Mode (see Panel
Subpage on page 411) is set to Pgm/Pst Only you will need to assign
also inputs for the shiftlevel buttons. Select the according buttons,
select the input and press Assign Shift Couple.
• Reset 15/25/35 Button Cross Bar: 
Reset to the default assignment.
• Assign None: 
Select a button position and press this button to create an inactive
button.
• Delete: Deletes the current assignment for this button. All assignment to
the right of the button will shift one position to the left. The shifting will
stop when one of the following assignments is encountered: 
Reentries like ME1, ME2, shiftlevel buttons like 2nd, 3rd, the row dele-
gation button RDel
• Insert: Like Assign but shifts the current button assignment and the
ones to the right one position up. The shifting will stop when one of the
following assignments is encountered: 
Reentries like ME1, ME2, shiftlevel buttons like 2nd, 3rd, the row dele-
gation button RDel.
• Assign: Assigns the selected input of the Input Box to the selected
button.
• Assign Shift Couple: Assigns an input to a shiftlevel assignment. This is
used in Shiftlevel Couple Mode "Pgm/Pst Only" (see Panel Subpage on
page 411).

Brightness Page
This subdelegation allows adjustment of the brightness of the Text LED dis-
plays, the source name OLED displays and the high tally and low tally
intensity of the buttons.
Figure 326. Config Panel Brightness

Config Menu
PMEM Page
The system holds up to 100 Panel Memories (PMEM) which can be
renamed.
Figure 327. Config Panel PMEM
You can Store, Recall, and Delete PMEMs. The last recalled one is indicated
as green selection. Double clicking a macro recalls immediately.
To create PMEMs which recall only parts of the control panel, the not
desired modules have to be deselected by double clicking the according
part in the right listbox.
In the example above the macro at cursor position Register 001 only affects
the System bar.

Panel Color Page

This page allows the user to change the default colors for row delegations
and other control groups. Besides of the predefined colors the user has a
choice of 5 user definable colors. All color assignments are part of a stored
application.
Figure 328. Config Pane Colors
Note Next to this color assignments which create "horizontal color coding",
because most groups are bus row delegations, there is a second possibility
to use "vertical color coding", that means to assign colors to specific inputs.
"Vertical color coding" overwrites "Horizontal color coding".For Input Color
Coding please see Colors Subpage on page 385.
• Set to White: Sets all buttons to White. Only the Multifunction Module
keeps the colors for better grouping of buttons. On air tally is used for
crossbar buses.
• Set to Default Color: All buses are set to their default color.

Config Menu
Attached Macros Page

The macro attachment viewer shows you all macro attachments to all
buttons on all levels.
Figure 329. Config Panel Attached Macros
You can zoom and shift the display by the according digipots.
When at least one macro is attached to a module the module turns blue.
The individual attachments are indicated in yellow. The listbox in the
bottom shows the attachments for the selected button (red border).
• Button: Unique identifier of the button in the control panel
• Macro: Number of the attached Macro.
• Type: Can be Pre-attachment, Post-attachment, Replace-attachment.
• Level: Logical delegation level.

Flexible Licenses Submenu

Each chroma keyer can be flexibly assigned to any desired keyer in any
M/E if the flexible license key Chroma key is available.
Figure 330. Config Panel Flexible Licence

Personality Menu
Personality Menu
Personality Main Submenu

The Personality menu permits personality settings for the panel and
sidepanel (PC and display).
With the Transfer button, the settings can be saved (Export) or loaded
(Import).
Panel Subpage
Figure 331. Personal Settings Panel

To configure your personal settings of the Panel Page, select the parameter.
• Power Save: 
The Power Save mode is used to reduce the power consumption while
the Kayenne XL panel is not used on Air. OLED and LED displays, and
the multi color buttons are dimmed in up to five steps, depending on
the Power Save Type. Any button press at the Kayenne XL control panel
will stop the power save mode and switch on the OLED and LED dis-
plays and the multi color buttons. When the panel is completely dark,
the first button press will not accomplish the default behavior of the
pressed button. Is the Power Save Mode stopped, the Kayenne XL panel
will be behave as usual. A full Power Save Mode (complete dark) is indi-
cated by a blue running light at the Transition module. Another posi-
tive effect of the Power Save Mode is an elongation of the OLED display
lifetime.
• Power Save Time: Wait time for activating the Power Save Mode.
Figure 332. Personal Settings Side Panel Power Save Time and Type
• Power Save Type: 

Low will dim the OLED displays and multi color buttons in two and
High in four steps after the power save mode is activated.

Personality Menu
• Shiftlevel Latch Mode:

• Standard:
Shift selections stay latched and only sources on the selected bus
row are displayed.
• Manual latch mode: 
Pressing a shift button temporarily delegates the row to the new
shift level (SNDs are updated to match). A source can be selected at
this new shift level. When the buttons are released, the row delega-
tion (and SNDs) revert to the previous shift level.
• Auto-latch mode:
Taking a source at a certain shift level automatically causes delega-
tion of the source row (and SNDS) to the new shift level and tallies
the shift buttons for the new shift level. This means the bus stays
delegated to the shift level.
• Shiftlevel Hidden Source Blinking:
The selected source flashes to indicate it is selected on a currently non
delegated bus.
• Shiftlevel Couple Mode:
This mode allows you to have the Program and Preset bus always
shifted in parallel. This is especially important when you have attached
macros to one of these rows. Since the macros are attached to the logical
delegation level each Auto transition or Cut would flipflop the shift
levels of the Pgm and Pst bus. As a side effect this mode frees up to
more crossbar buttons for source switching, because the 2nd and 3rd
shift level is switched by the two smaller hard labeled buttons right to
the source select buttons. Two modes are available:
Figure 333. Personal Settings Shiftlevel Couple Mode

• Pgm/Pst Only applies the mode only to the program and preset bus.
In this mode you have to assign additional sources to the 2nd and
3rd assignments, see Assignment Page on page 404.
• All Rows applies the mode also to the key buses
Note Other delegations to the key rows like Macro, eDPM, etc. will keep their indi-
vidual 2nd / 3rd buttons as usual.
Note As precondition, the sidepanel has to be attached to a Kayenne XL control

panel!
• Shiftlevel Hidden Source Blinking: 

The selected source flashes to indicate it is selected on a currently non
delegated level.
• Joystick Speed: Adjusts the selectivity of the Joystick.
• Source Name Display Mode
• Separate Lines: For the program and preset row always to indi-
vidual lines are displayed.
• Join Lines: If the sources for the program and preset row are iden-
tical, only one name is displayed
• Join (Show Hidden Source): Like Join Lines, but the display will also
show two lines in case a source on a non-delegated level is selected.
• Auto size Fonts in Source Name Displays
When On, the font will automatically adapt its size to fit all characters
in the available space (in limits).
• EMEM Modules follow last recalled register
• On: The display will show the last recalled register (EMEM, Macro,
iDPM, eDPM).
• Off: The display stays on the last manual selection, indicating with
an asterisk behind the register name when the display shows the
last recalled one. This mode allows presetting multiple Local
EMEM Modules to different banks for independent direct access.

Personality Menu
Sidepanel Subpage
Figure 334. Personal Settings Side Panel
To configure your personal settings for the, select the Sidepanel parameter.
• TFT Intensity: Adjustment for the TFT intensity of the Menu Panel.
• Popup Time: Time out for pop menus.
• Overlay Time: Time out for overlay menus.
• Timeline Edit Direct Modify: Default off. 
If On is selected, the operation steps to modify timeline elements with
several modifiers is simplified.
• Switcher Type for Demo Mode: Switcher Type selection if the Menu Panel
is used in the demo mode.

M/E Menu
M/E Main Submenu

M/E Main Submenu consists of 3 subpages:
• Keyer: Details refer to Subpage Keyer.
• Misc: Details refer to Subpage Misc.
• Extern Keyer: Details refer to Subpage Extern Keyer.
Subpage Keyer
Figure 335. M/E Main Keyer

M/E Menu
Recall Preset
Recall the single M/E Preset
• All stop Press the associated button to stop or reset the following func-
tions:
• Stops all ongoing auto transitions.
• Sets FTB to inactive (100%).
• Sets transition type to MIX.
• Moves BGND transition to start position.
• Removes all keyers.
• Set Next Transition BGND.
• Resets Next Transition for all other components.
This command does not

• Influence matrix crosspoints.
• Stop TiM/E timeline play or TiM/E snapshot dissolve.
• Factory Preset
Recall the factory preset

• Operation Preset.
Recall the user-defined operation preset. See below to store the user-
defined operation preset.
Limit Set
The Limit set and Limit on buttons serve to create reproducible partial transi-
tions. This mode is possible with all types of transitions. Limit set permits
storing the desired value set with the fader.
Limit On
Limit on enables the mode. Any transition with Cut or Auto and any
manual transition with the fader is only executed up to the value previ-
ously defined with Limit set. If the transition is made with the fader, the
yellow arrow to the left of the fader does not change the direction when the
fader is moved to its end position, thus indicating that the transition is not
completed.
If Limit on is switched off at the point defined by Limit set, a jerk free tran-
sition to the next contribution can be made with the fader. The remaining
transition length is then stretched to the full fader path.

MultiMix Mode
If the MultiMix mode is enabled in the Sidepanel‘s Config - E-Box menu, the
MultiMix will be activated.
The MultiMix mode is EMEMable, i.e. the settings are stored with the
EMEM parameters.
The buttons Limit Set and On are active also when MultiMix is enabled.
Note Limit On works only if a “Limit“ has been set in advance.
BlkPSTMode
The BlkPST Mode button permits selection of different modes of fading.
Trans Type
The Trans Type button permits selection of different types of transitions:
To select a transition type, activate the button and then select a transition
type with the overlay button Undef, Mix, Add, Wipe1, Wipe2 or DVE.
The selected transition type is displayed in the button header area.
Note You can only change the transition type when the transition is finished, i.e.
when an automatic transition has been completed or the fader is in end posi-
tion.
Misc Transition (Misc Func 1 - 6)

One Misc component can run the RamRecorder channels DPM's in parallel,
using the Auto Transition Button or the Lever Arm.
When the selected effect contains other channels than the selected one, all
channels of this effect will be controlled.

M/E Menu
Subpage Misc
Figure 336. M/E Main Misc
The M/E Main Misc Menu is used to run the Misc components, using the
Menu Panel.

Subpage Extern Keyer
Figure 337. M/E Main Extern
M/E Main Extern Keyer can be used to perform Cut or Auto transitions on
External Keyer, if available.

M/E Menu
M/E Wipe Trans Submenu

Figure 338. M/E Wipe Trans
• Pattern Select: 
Pattern select is a direct link to the Pattern select menu.
• Base Color: 
The Base Color button serves to select a pre-defined color and delegates
the digipots to the Base Color Control Box.
• Wash Color: The Wash Color button serves to select a pre-defined color
and delegates the digipots to the Base Color Control Box.
• Pattern Direction: 
Pattern Source preselects the pattern source for a Background Wipe
transition enabled by the Wipe button at the Transition Panel. Available
Pattern Sources are Main Wipe 1/2 and Utility Bus 1/2.



• Flip Flop: 
If Flip Flop is enabled, the Wipe Transition will be alternated between
Normal or Reverse direction, using Auto button or lever arm at the Tran-
sition Panel.
• Pattern Source: 
Pattern Source preselects the pattern source for a Background Wipe
transition enabled by the Wipe button at the Transition Panel. Available
Pattern Sources are Main Wipe 1/2 and Utility Bus 1/2.
• Base Col Source: 
Base Color Source is used to fill the border of the used Pattern with a
Color Matte or any incoming video source or internal device such as
RamRecorder using the Utility Bus.
• Wash Type: 
Selecting Wash Type serves to select Main Wipe 1/2 or Utility Bus 1/2 to
compose a color wash between the Base Color Source and Wash Color
Source.
• Wash Col Source: Wash Col Source is used to fill the border of the used
Pattern with a Color Matte or any incoming video source or internal
device such as RamRecorder using the Utility Bus. Wash Color Source
can be used to compose a Color Wash between the Base Color and the
Wash Color depending on the used Wash Type.

M/E Menu
Offset Transi Submenu
Note The Offset Transi mode can be part of an EMEM. The settings are stored with
the EMEM parameters.
Figure 339. Offset Transi

• Copy Offsets:
If offset transition is switched off, a second parameter set of offset tran-
sitions appears. You can modify this set when offset transition is
switched off. You can also make it the active one by using the Copy Offset
button.
• Transi Drop (Key 1 - 6):
Transi Drop will switch off the keyer used in an Offset Transition at the
end position of an Offset Transition effect.
• Arrow buttons: 
Selects an item in the component table.
• One Way (Misc 1-6):
One Way will position the Offset Transition back to the Starting point
after the Offset Transition was performed. If the RamRecorder is used,
the RamRecorder will also be repositioned to the starting point.
• % / Frames: 
Toggles the adjusting units between percentage (%) and Frames.
• Transition Graphs:
The Offset Transi menu contains three graphs showing transition details:
• Upper graph: Signal level curve of background transition (Program
and Preset).
• Middle graph: Interactive level curve of each transition component.
• Lower graph: Interactive timeline bar of each transition component.
• Double-click the timeline bar in order to change the values Start,
Middle, and End. The values can be adjusted with the digipots also.
• Reverse/Normal - Reverse:
The Normal Reverse button determines the transition pattern direction.
If this button is activated, the transition direction is changed each time
the fader is its final position or when the transition is completed.
If you wish to change the preset transition direction, press the Reverse
button.
• Component Table:
The interactive table shows the transition components. In the Visible
column, you can select whether the non-selected components are
visible in the graphs or not (yes=visible). Double-click to show or hide
the component curve/bar.

In column Type the selected Transition Type of the component is shown.
A selected (blue bar) component is visible in the graphs and can be
adjusted independent of whether it is switched, visible, or neither.

M/E Menu
• Used RamRecorder Channels: If RamRecorder is selected as the function

for Misc 1 and 2, then the Main menu‘s Misc 1 and 2 function as the
transition component and the channels are colored and highlighted. In
addition the lengths of the clip will be shown in frames. 
• Offset On: 
Activates the Offset Transition settings for use during the next MultiMix
transition. Offset Transition can be activated in the M/E Main menu
also.

Key Menu
Key Main Submenu

The Keyer menu controls are organized into several subcategories, each
with different menu selection based on the type of key. These menus are
accessed by touching the Keyer button in the Home menu. Keyer selections
such as key type, Key Invert, Matte Fill, can be made for any keyer from the
Main panel using the Keyers subpanel. These controls are on the Main
panel for immediate access.
However, key adjustment for detail, such as clip and gain, and mask con-
trols, are accessible from the corresponding Keyer menu. The Keyer sub-
panels and the corresponding menus will reflect and track the changes
made by either set of controls.
The Keyer menu controls are organized into several subcategories, each
with different menu selection based on the type of key. These menus are
accessed by selecting the appropriate keyer via the Delegation popup button,
then the category is chosen from the Mode, Priority or Mask and Mattes buttons
at the bottom of the menu.
Note Utility Bus 2 is only available on Kayak HD systems.

Key Menu
Figure 340. Key Main
The Keyer menus enable you to control the key generators for each of the
full-function M/Es. The Keyer menus, like the Wipe menus, have a delega-
tion area at upper left, which in this case contains the key generator
selector.
The Mode menu enable you to select the type of key for any of the six
keyers in each M/E or P/P. Touching the Mode subcategory button brings
up the Keyer Mode menu. Touch the keyer data pad you wish to select,
then select the Mode from one of the selections described below. Key modes
are selectable from the following choices:
• Fixed Linear or Luminance
• Adj. Linear or Luminance Linear
• Luma Key or Additive Key
• Chroma Key
• Preset Pattern
Luminance Key is used for key sources with an unshaped fill signal.

Linear Key is just a shortcut for a special setting of the Luminance Key with
Gain 100% and Clip 50%.
Additive Key is used for key sources with a shaped fill signal.
For an overview of key types and adjustments, refer to the section Keying
on page 43.
Refer also the Keyer Control section of the Multi Function Control Panel.

Key Menu
Key Matte Submenu

The Matte menus give you control over matte color, type, and appearance.
There are no local matte controls on the Main panel; all matte adjustments
are made in the menus. The popup delegation button in the top left of the
menu enable you to select the mattes of the different keyers. Soft knobs are
provided on the right side of the menu for adjustment of matte parameters.
Figure 341. Key Matte
The source signal can be selected with the popup Wash Source.
Keyer Freeze Menu

The Freeze pane contains a Freeze Fill and a Freeze Key button, which are
similar to the keys on the panel, and Freeze Fill+Key, which is similar to
pressing both. Pressing the Freeze Fill+Key guarantees that the signals are
frozen in the same field.

The Display pane offers the choice of which area should be either Field 1 or
Field 2, or both.

Key Menu
Key Mask Submenu

Touching the Mask subcategory button takes you to the Keyer Mask Point
of Use menu. The Mask menu enable selection and control of the keyer
mask(s). Key masking defines areas that are protected from keying (Inhibit)
or always key (Force). The shape of the mask can originate from a wipe
pattern generator or from a selected mask signal (typically a key fill signal
delivered via the Utility bus).
The keyer delegation (Key1 – Key6) is made at the top left of the screen. Once
a keyer has been delegated, choose the type of mask (Force or Inhibit, or
both) from the data pad in the lower right corner. The example shown here
is for a Wipe Force Mask on Key 1.
Figure 342. Key Mask
Note In v692, the Mask Preview button has been removed.

Mask Sources
For either type of selected mask (Force or Inhibit) five different mask
sources are available and will appear as popup selection when you press
the Mask Source button.
Only one mask source can be selected at a time.
The Inh.-M Type button (Mask Types) selects the source of the inhibit mask.
Default Box mask is selected, M-Wipe and K-Wipe are the other selections.
Note The Transition Type K-Wipe is related to this source.
Note Utility Bus 2 is only available with Kayak HD.
Box
When Box is selected as the mask source, you can adjust softness and
opacity. The four edges of the box can be set separately.
Figure 343. Key Mask Force Mask Type Selection
Figure 344. Key Mask Inhib Mask Type Selection

Key Menu
Chr Key Main Submenu

When a chroma key is selected, the menu will display a summary of all
chroma key parameter values at the same time. The parameter groups
should be adjusted in the following order:
1. Prim Suppress
2. Key Control
3. Sec Suppress
4. Other
After the first two parameter groups have been adjusted, a reasonable key
should be visible. Subsequent adjustment steps may improve the basic key
in subtle ways.
See the section on Chroma Key Main Page on page 190 for more information
on setting up a chroma key.

Figure 345. Chroma Key Main

Key Menu
Figure 346. Chroma Key Main Cursor

Chr Key Suppression Submenu

Figure 347. Chroma Key Suppression

Key Menu
Figure 348. Chroma Key Suppression Cursor

Keyer Wipe
A Keyer Wipe mask source enable selection of a wipe pattern from the ded-
icated pattern generator for the keyer. Touch the Patt. Sel/Adj button in the
menu to bring up the wipe pattern selections available. Select a pattern
from the display. The selected pattern will appear in the Patt. Sel/Adj data
pad window. Select the other datapads in the wipe menu to adjust pattern
modifiers. These include pattern positioner, rotate, H and V multiply, and
aspect controls, similar to the wipe controls. Modifiers are controlled by the
soft knobs on the right of the screen.
Complex Wipe 1 and 2

A mask can be generated from a complex wipe source. There are two
complex wipe generators available, Complex Wipe 1 and 2. The pattern for the
complex wipe is chosen in the same manner as the keyer wipe mask. The
complex mask wipe can also be modified for position, rotation, H and V
multiplication and aspect. In addition, wipes can be mixed and modulated.
Keyer and complex wipe masks must share the wipe generators with other
functions with wipe capability in the switcher. This resource sharing must
be considered when delegating one of the wipe generators to a mask.
CAUTION All controls in the Wipe1 Generator or the Wipe2 Generator affect the selected
wipe pattern generator.
Utility Bus
The Utility Bus mask sources originate from the utility bus in the chosen
M/E. Typically these are used to bring in garbage masks from a RamRe-
corder (Still Store) or some external device.
Mask On Button
The Mask may be turned on or off by selecting the Mask On button.
Mask Invert Button

The Mask Invert button inverts the sense of the delegated mask. When off,
areas formerly masked will be visible, and previously visible areas will be
masked. Masks are normally active in the center of the pattern. An inverted
mask is active outside the pattern.

Key Menu
Preset Pattern
A preset pattern uses a wipe pattern generator, rather than an incoming key
cut signal to define the hole cut in the background. When Preset Pattern is
chosen as the keyer mode, the menu will appear. When the Pattern data pad
is touched, the Wipe menu (see Wipe Menus) will come up to enable pattern
selection.
The Preset Pattern may be matte-filled by touching the Matte Fill data pad.
The matte controls can be accessed by touching the Mattes button. Opacity
and size of the preset pattern can also be adjusted with the digipots.
Keyer Priority Misc Menu

Touching the Priority Misc subcategory button takes you to the Priority
menu. The Priority menu is used to change the stacking order of the keys.
The parameter control area on the right has two columns, labeled Current
and Next. The stacking order of the selected item in a column is controlled
with the Top, Move Up, Move Down, and Bottom touch buttons. Changing the
top to bottom order in the Current column will cause an immediate change
in that keyers stacking order. The order in the Next column controls the
order the keys will have after the next key priority transition. After the key
priority transition, the Current and Next stacks will swap.
The Key Prior and Key Over buttons in the Keyer subpanel on the panel
provide an alternate method for setting key priority. Refer to the sections
on Transition Elements on page 107.

Wipe Adjust Submenu

Figure 349. Wipe Adjust

Key Menu
Wipe Select Submenu

Figure 350. Wipe Select
Refer also the Wipe and Key Selection section of the Multi Function Control
Panel.

Color BGD Menu
Color BGD 1 - 3 Submenu

Background matte generators create colors, and washes. These can be used,
for example, as the backgrounds for keys.
When Bgnd Mattes is selected, the menu displays two panes for control of
Color BGD 1, Color BGD 2, Color BGD 3, and Test patterns, including base
and wash colors, wash direction and offset, and wash edge texture attri-
butes. Each touch pad activates the soft knobs to control those parameters.
Figure 351. Color Background 1
The popup delegation button in the top left of the menu enable you to del-
egate the menu to Color BGD 1, Color BGD 2, Color BGD 3, and Test Signal
patterns.

Color BGD Menu
Figure 352. Color Background 1 Preset
Touch the Color Output pad, then select the desired color output: Flat
single color matte with button Flat Matte 1 or Flat Matte 2. A dual color matte
can be selected with button Wash. All subsequent matte controls are located
on the central pane of the menu.
Figure 353. Color Background 1 Wash Reset

Test Signal Submenu

The Test Signal menu enable the selection of different video test patterns.
The chosen test pattern will be displayed when the Test source is selected.
Figure 354. Test Signal

Color Correction Menu
YUV Input Submenu

The YUV Correction menu serves to adjust brightness, contrast, saturation
and color balance.
Figure 355. Color Correction Input
The correction can be made in the following buses:

• Bus (PGM, PST, Key1 ... Key6)
Note If Bus Correction for PGM bus and/or PST bus is selected, the two settings
are exchanged at the end of a fading.
• Input (all input signals)

• AUX (all AUX buses)

Note Bus correction has priority over input correction.
Color Off
Switch the color on/off, separately for each bus.
Figure 356. Color Correction Input Reset
Reset Bus
Reset the values for a single bus of the selected M/E to their default value

YUV M/E Bus Submenu

Figure 357. Bus Correction
Reset M/E
Reset the values for all buses of the selected M/E to their default values.
Figure 358. Bus Correction Reset

YUV Aux-Bus Submenu

Figure 359. Auxbus Correction
Figure 360. Auxbus Correction Reset

RGB Input Submenu

RGB Input Color Correction is a software enabled feature that converts the
video signal on a particular video bus from color difference format to RGB
(red, green, blue) color component format, applies separate offset, gain,
and gamma to each RGB component, then converts from RGB back to color
difference (Y, Cb, Cr) format. The color correction is applied on an input by
input basis. The parameters are applied on the basis of a source and bus
intersection and stored as part of source memory. A different input on the
same bus or a same input on a different bus, may have different color cor-
rection.
The Color Corrector menu is used to adjust RGB color on a selected bus and
input.
Corrected inputs and parameters will be displayed in a yellow style.
Note In the source displays corrected buses or inputs are marked with an under-
line!
Figure 361. RGB Input Correction

The Adjustment Mode pad has two buttons, the first two, Gain/Lift and White/
Black, determine the mode for the knobs and the text boxes in the Color Cor-
rector Transfer Function pane Red/Green/Blue
Figure 362. RGB Input Correction Adjust Mode
• Gain/Lift: Adjust offset to Black level.

• White/Black: Adjust Black and White by percentage.
When one of the Red, Green, or Blue color component's button is selected, the
knobs for Gain, Lift, and Gamma are delegated for the specific component.
For example, if Green had been selected, the knobs would control the green
channel's values, and similarly for Red and Blue.
The Changes on red also apply to pane has two on/off buttons. The title and the
button labels are dependent on the selection of the color component in the
Color Corrector Transfer Function pane Red/Green/Blue. If the user selects
Blue as the color to be adjusted, the two buttons are Red and Green. When
these buttons are active, the adjustments applied to the originally selected
color component is also applied to the one(s) selected in the pane. For
example, if the user chooses to adjust Blue and selects Red in the Changes on
Blue also apply to pane, then any adjustments to Blue's Gamma value will be
applied to Red's Gamma value.
Note Changing from Blue to either Green or Red in the Color Corrector Transfer
Function pane will cancel the attachment.
Figure 363. RGB Input Correction Reset
When the Reset button is touched, the following modes can be selected:
• Reset Red/ Green/ Blue
• Reset Input
• Reset All Inputs

RGB Bus Submenu

Refer to RGB Input Submenu on page 449 for further operating details.
line!
Figure 364. RGB M/E Bus
Figure 365. RGB M/E Bus Adjust Mode
Figure 366. RGB M/E Bus Reset

RGB Aux Submenu

Refer to RGB Input Submenu on page 449 for further operating details.
line!
Figure 367. RGB Auxbus Correction
Figure 368. RGB Auxbus Correction Adjust Mode
Figure 369. RGB Auxbus Correction Reset

Remote Menu
Remote Menu
Figure 370. Remote Enables
In Enable
• AUX-CP: Enables AUX Control Panels.
• VTR Emulation: Enables the VTR control.
• Editor Control: Enables Editor control.
• GP-In: Enables GPI inputs.
Out Enable
• P-BUS: Enables Editor control.
• GP Out: Enables GPI outputs.

Remote GPI Out Submenu

Figure 371. Remote GPI-Out
Remote I/O Enable buttons

The Remote button group has to be used to enable the following functions:
• Enables AUX control panels.
• Enables the VTR control.
• Enables Editor control.
• Enables GPI inputs channels.
• Enables GPO output channels.

Remote Menu
Remote P-Bus Submenu

Figure 372. Remote Pheripheral Bus

Media Player Menu

MP Status Submenu
The Media Player menu serves to control external VTRs or other Media
Servers.
The Kayak offers a set of protocols that enable the user to connect and
control virtually all video servers, disk recorders, and VTRs on the market.
The protocols to select from are:

• BVW75 (industry standard VTR protocol)
• Mediapool
• Odetics
• VDCP (aka Louth), there are specialized versions for the Profile™
server family.
• Pbus
With these protocols the Kayak can control:

• VTRs (BetaCam, DVCPro, etc.)
• Video Servers
• Disk Recorders
• Other media players
The list of servers that have at least one of the protocols implemented
includes:
• Thomson Grass Valley: Profile, Profile XP, M-Series
• Thomson: Nextore
• Philips: Mediapool™
• Leitch (ASC): VR300, VR400
• DVS: ProntoVision
• Sea Change
• Pinnacle: MediaStream (HP), Thunder
• Pluto
Disk recorders that have at least one of the protocols implemented include:
• Accom: Attache, WSD
• Abekas: A66, Diskus
• Edifis: Brick, Sting
• Fast Forward Video: Omega deck

Media Player Menu
Several of the DDRs and servers listed offer more than one protocol, in
many cases Odetics and VDCP. The set of implemented functions may
differ. Please refer to the equipment manufacturer's documentation to find
out which of those protocols is most suitable for your application.
Figure 373. Media Player MP Status
The Media Player menu offers control for up to 36 devices. There are 6
Pages with 6 control positions each.
Figure 374. Single Media Player
• To assign a device to a desired control position, hold down the Delega-

tion button (example shows LAN01) for 2 seconds and select a machine
from the popup dialog.

Figure 375. Select Machine Popup
• The Gang button groups devices for common control.

• The control display shows status information of the machine like
loaded clip, tape motion state, current timecode, Mark In, Mark Out,
Loop, Auto Cue and a thumbnail of the currently loaded clip (if the
used protocol supports thumbnails).
• The following tape motion commands are available:
• Play Reverse
• Still
• Play
• Rewind
• Stop
• Fast Forward

Media Player Menu
Figure 376. Media Player MP Status - GoTo
• Go To Time Code allows a numeric timecode entry for positioning the

device.
• Go To Mark In positions the device to the Mark In point
• Go To Mark Out positions the device to the Mark Out point
Figure 377. Media Player MP Status - Speeds
• The Speeds submenu delegates a digipot to control the specified

motion command (Shuttle, Variable or Jog). This delegation is active as
long as the machine has the corresponding tape motion state.
Figure 378. Media Player MP Status - Mark
• The Mark submenu offers different ways to modify Mark In and Mark
Out positions:
• Set Mark In / Out: Allows numeric entry for Mark In and Mark Out.
• Grab Mark In / Out: Grab the current timecode for the Mark In or
Mark Out.
• Clear Mark In / Out: Deletes Mark In or Mark Out and sets it to an
invalid state.
• Read Mark In / Out: Reads the Mark In or Mark Out from the loaded
Clips metadata (if available).
• Auto Cue: When enabled, a clip is automatically cued to its IN mark after
it is loaded by a snapshot or timeline recall.

• Loop: Enable or disable Loop Mode for AMP controlled devices.
Note On serially controlled machines (using the AMP protocol), the current IN and
OUT marks are ignored for the loop. In other words, a clip is always played
from SOM (start of material) to EOM (end of material) or vice versa. This also
applies to LAN controlled machines when the "Mark Control" feature is dis-
abled. If "Mark Control" is enabled (see "MCtl" section for details), the IN and
OUT marks are taken into account for the loop.
• Mark Control: This feature is only available for machines which are con-
trolled over LAN.
When Mark Control is enabled, the IN and OUT marks stored within
the metadata of a clip are controlled directly. In other words, metadata
of a clip can be changed. In combination with the loop mode, a clip can
be played in loop between its IN and OUT marks. This kind of loop is
completely controlled by the external machine and therefore 'absolute
accurate'.
For more Details about IN/OUT Mark Handling see section Some More
Details About IN/OUT Mark Handling on page 160 (Device Control Module).
Refer also the Media Players (MPs) section of the Multi Function Control
Panel.

Media Player Menu
MP Clips Submenu
The Clips Play menu enables the user to load clips from different directories
from a connected server.
Figure 379. Media Player MP Clips
The list on the left side shows all available directories. The clips of the
selected directory (marked yellow) are shown on the right side, either as a
text list or as thumbnails. To load another directory, select it by clicking or
with the digipot and press the Load Directory button.
• The View button offers different modes to present the clips: 
Text List, Large Thumbnails, Medium Thumbnails, Small Thumbnails.
• The Request Thumbnail button ...
• To load another clip, select it by clicking or with the digipot and press
the Load Clip button.
• To select another machine for clip handling press the Select Machine
button


RamRecorder Menu
RamRecorder Menu
The RamRecorder is a solid state video server with 6 input/output chan-
nels. This means that all stills and clips are stored within a common data
pool and may be accessed by all 6 output channels.
Refer also the Media Players (MPs) section of the Multi Function Control
Panel.
Basics
Memory Size versus Storage Time

The maximum storage time depends upon the selected TV standard,
selected audio channels, and on the equipped memory board (4GB or 8GB).
For the whole switcher the total amount of storage is approximately:

• HD = over 23 seconds per video (over 57 seconds video with KlipCache
memory expansion option). The storage time for HD video with
embedded audio will be reduced depending on the number of selected
audio groups. With four audio groups selected the clip size increases
5%
• SD = approximately 2 min. 15 sec per video (5 min. 30 seconds video
with KlipCache). The storage time for SD video with embedded audio
will be reduced depending on the number of selected audio groups.
With four audio groups selected the clip size increases 20%

RR Status Submenu
The Status menu shows the status of six RamRecorders channels. The menu
enables you to configure the RamRecorder channels and to fully operate
them by using the related controls. To ease the use of operational controls
their appearance is coupled to the channels configuration.
Figure 380. RamRecorder Status Menu

RamRecorder Menu
• Set Gang
Ganging is an operation used for parallel control of multiple channels.
To activate the Gang press the SetGang button and use select/deselect
toggle to configure the Gang.
Note Note: The SetGang function is a local function of the Graphical User Interface.
However the parallel (ganged) execution of the RamRec commands can be
recorded with the attached Control's Panel Makro recorder.
Figure 381. Ramrecorder Gang Selection
When the Gang is configured, press again the Set Gang to get back to the
RamRec Status page. Now if you select one channel of the Gang all chan-
nels get selected and are controlled in parallel. This is useful e.g. when you
use fill and key as two separate clips.
Note Double clicking the Set Gang button releases all channels from the Gang!

• Input Source Selection

Touch the Source button. A list with all input sources appears to select
the desired input source. The selected input source is visible at the
RamRec channels output only if the RamRecorder is in RECORD or STOP
(E to E) mode.
Figure 382. RamRecorder - Input Sources

RamRecorder Menu
• Audio Record, Audio Playout

The RamRecorder Audio supports the 16 embedded tracks which are
organized in Groups of 4.
• Group A contains audio channel CH1 to CH4
• Group B contains audio channel CH5 to CH8
• Group C contains audio channel CH9 to CH12
• Group D contains audio channel CH13 to CH16
• The Audio Record and Audio Playback buttons can be used to configure
the channel groups to be included in the dedicated operation.
Figure 383. RamRecorder Status Audio Record
In the figure above the embedded Audio Channel 1..8 (A-B) are included
into Records and Channel 1..16 (A-B-C-D) are included in the playouts.
Note The Audio Record / Playout selection must be configured individually per
RamRecorder channel. For identical settings you can take advantage of the
Gang Mode operation!

• Go To ..
The Goto button can be used to position the selected RamRecorder 
channels.
Figure 384. RamRecorder Status Go To
• Begin: Moves clip to the beginning.

• End: Moves clip to the end.
• Timecode: Moves clip to the entered timecode. 
A popup appears to enter the timecode value
• Mark In: Moves clip to the Mark-In preset.
• Mark Out: Moves clip to the Mark-Out preset.
•
• Settings
To configure the RamRecorder channels, touch the Settings button on
the top and select the desired parameter.
Figure 385. RamRecorder Status Settings
Bounce
• Bounce:
The Bounce function is only available if the RamRecorder is in Clip-
mode or in a Loop mode. Bounce is not available in Normal VTR-
Mode! If bounce is activated and the Playout reaches its end posi-
tion then it runs in reverse to Mark In, and when it reaches Mark-In
it runs forward to Mark Out. This is repeated until the loop's exit
criteria is reached.
• Loops: 
Loops is used only if a RamRec Channel is in a Loop mode to
specify the number of loops to be executed (value 0 = endless).

RamRecorder Menu
• Read Out Play
Figure 386. RamRecorder Status Read Out
• Field1/2: This mode is useful when a still or clip is made from a

graphic source that has generated motion which is not in the
expected field dominance. By stepping to Field 2 by pressing
Previous Still / Next Still, before playing a clip, the display
order of fields is reversed to F2/F1.
• Field 1: Only field 1 is played out resulting in "Film look" (only
25/30 motion updates per second).
• Field 2: Only field 2 is played out resulting in "Film look" (only
25/30 motion updates per second).
• Frame: Standard play out mode.
• Read Out Still

• Field1/2: Field 1 or field 2 is displayed and Previous Still / Next
Still advances to the next fields, which results in single stepping
in field resolution.
• Field 1: Field 1 is replicated to make frame and Previous Still /
Next Still advances to field 1 of the next still.
• Field 2: Field 2 is replicated to make frame and Previous Still /
Next Still advances to field 1 of the next still.
• Frame: Field 1 or Field 2 is replicated to make frame and Pre-
vious Still / Next Still advances to field 1/2 of the next still.
Note The Read Out selection must be configured individually per RamRec channel.
For identical settings you can take advantage of the Gang Mode operation!

• Mode
When you touch the Mode button, a popup appears to select the
channel‘s basic operational modes:
Figure 387. RamRecorder - Operational Mode
• Normal VTR: Standard behavior like a tape machine.

• Clipmode: Mark In and Mark Out limit the accessible timecode
range. When you press play, the clip is always played from Mark
In to Mark Out.
• Simple Loop: Mark In and Mark Out limit the accessible time-
code range. When you press play, the clip starts at the current
position, plays to Mark Out and repeats that range from Mark In
to Mark Out n times, where "n" is the number of loops (0 = end-
less).
• Extended Loop: The looped section is from Mark In to Mark Out
as is in Simple Loop mode, but play may start before Mark In
and Offset setting determines the post Mark Out play duration.

RamRecorder Menu
• Mark In, Mark Out

Set a Mark In / Mark Out point via numeric popup panel.
Figure 388. RamRecorder - Mark In
Note You can use the Gang operation mode to Grab current Mark-In and Mark-Out
positions for multiple channels at any time!

• Speeds
The Speeds button offers the possibility to run a RamRecorder with
Variable/Jog speed form the Sidepanel GUI. Once the Speeds operation
mode Variable or Jog is selected, the GUI's top most digipot is assigned
to control the playout.
Figure 389. RamRecorder - Speeds
• Variable: In Variable mode the playout speed is specified by the digi-

pots turning angle. Examples: 1 = normal speed, 2 = double speed,
0.5 = half speed, -1 normal reverse speed...
• Jog: Set RamRecorder to Jog mode. In Jog mode the position of the
playout is following the digipot's turning angle

RamRecorder Menu
• Tape Motion Commands (TMC)

The tape motion commands are used to control playout position, direc-
tion and speed
Figure 390. RamRecorder Tape Motion Commands
Stop Pause
Step one field or frame forward/reverse
Play the clip reverse Play the clip forward
Move the clip to the beginning Move the clip to the end
Note You can use the Gang operation mode to apply the TMC commands to mul-
tiple channels!

• Record Delayline
When switched on, the delegated channel behaves like a delay line, the
desired delay can be specified with the Record Length or Afterplay set-
ting. The delayline can be switched off with the next push of a Tape
Motion Command.
Figure 391. RamRecorder - Record Delayline
When you have changed the active area to record only a cropped section of
the image, the text Record New and Record Edit will also show the word
"Cropped" to indicate that with this channel you will not record in full frame
mode.
Figure 392. RamRecorder - Record Delayline - Cropped Warning
Note When you change the Record Length value while you are in Delay Line mode,
the new value is not accepted unless you exit and re-enter this mode.
• Trim Out / Trim In

• IN (Trim inner part) All frames between Mark In and Mark Out will
be deleted. The part before Mark In and after Mark Out will be
joined.
• OUT (Trim outer part) All frames before Mark In and after Mark Out
will be deleted.
Note Only the video track will be trimmed. Audio will stay in its original length. To
play only the video part, play mode Clip should be used which will only play
the part between Mark In and Mark Out.
• Record New
Record New starts recording a new Clip according to current presets like
RecordLen, Audio Record group...

RamRecorder Menu
• Record Edit
Record Edit allows to overwrite/append new content to an existing clip.
The record starts at the current clip position and ends after a duration
of RecLen.
Note Beside Video and Audio, the RamRecorder holds a set of Meta Data which are
defining the Record / Playback behavior. With every record the mandatory
Metadata are stored automatically. Some Metadata also are automatically
stored if they are modified (e.g. Thumbnails). Other Metadata requests a suc-
cessive request to be stored. These are: MarkIn, MarkOut, ActiveArea,
Bounce, Loops, BreakOut, PlayMode, ReadOut, Audio Offset, Audio Mute,
Audio Group Assignment and Audio Assign Enable. If you have modified
those data after record, don't forget to execute a subsequent Save to Clip
command as it is available in the RamRec Clips menu tab!
Thumbnails and Animated Thumbnails

Every RamRecorder channel automatically generates a thumbnail with
every Record New or Record ID command execution. The thumbnail appears
immediately in all RamRecorder menu tabs.
With the 'Kayenne XL' license additionally animated thumbnails can be

generated on request (see RR Clips Submenu on page 476). If a clip's ani-
mated thumbnail is available the RamRec status menu shows the moving
thumbnail synchronized to the RamRec channels video output. This may
be useful if there is no monitor available at the RamRecorder's output.

RR Clips Submenu
The RamRecorder Clips menu page enables you to select and modify
stored video clips.
Figure 393. RamRecorder Clips
the image, the indication field for the remaining time with crop will turn to
red to indicate that with this channel you will not record in full frame
mode.
Figure 394. RamRecorder - Crop Warning

RamRecorder Menu
• Bank Selection
Press the Bank button to select the desired bank.
Figure 395. RamRecorder - Select Bank
• Mode Selection
The following modes can be selected:
• Video: Only video signal.
• Video/Key: When the Vid/Key button is active, each video signal will
have an associated key signal stored too. At recall, the key signal
will only be recalled if the Vid/Key button is active. RAM 1 uses
RAM2 as its associated key channel for record and recall, while
RAM3 uses RAM4, and RAM5 uses RAM6.
Figure 396. RamRecorder Mode Selection
• Show Run Control

Activating the toggle button Show Run Control changes the 8 button row
control buttons to become to Tape Motion Control functionality.

• Select View
The following view for the available clips can be selected:
• Small: small-sized thumbnails (10x7 visible at a time)
• Medium: medium-sized thumbnail (5x3 visible at a time)
• Large: large-sized thumbnails (3x2 visible at a time)
• List: list view
Figure 397. RamRecorder - Select View
• Grab Animation
When the button is pressed the RamRecorder starts to generate thumb
animation from the loaded clip. During the generation time the Grap
Animation button is inactive (grayed-out) for the current clip. Multiple
requests for other clips can be initiated anyway and are executed in the
given sequence. Once the moving thumbnails are generated they are
stored along with the RamRecorders meta data and they become visible
on all connected Sidepanel GUI applications.
• The availability of animated thumbnails is indicated in the clip
selection fields with an (A) index as shown in the figure below.
• During generation the clip is marked with an (W)
• Clips in the queue are marked with a sequential number (2) (3) ...
Figure 398. RamRecorder - Thumbnail
• Selecting a Clip showing the (A) index runs the thumbnail animation
locally within the clip selection field (the mainframe's RamRec channel
is not involved at all).
Note There is no feedback to the generation status other than the (A) appearance
in the clip selection fields. The animated thumb generation lasts approxi-
mately 1 second per full HD video frame.

RamRecorder Menu
Note The Animated Thumbnail feature is only available with the Kayenne XL main-
frame license.
• Grab Thumbnail 
Grab Thumbnail provides a convenient method to save the current
frame as thumbnail for the loaded clip.
• Load RAM1 - 6
Selects the clip / still to the output of the delegated RamRecorder
channel.
• Save to Clip
Parameters will be stored in the meta data storage, that is, MarkIn,
MarkOut, Active Area, MarkIn, MarkOut, ActiveArea, Bounce, Loops,
BreakOut, PlayMode, ReadOut, Audio Offset, Audio Mute, Audio
Group Assignment and Audio Assign Enable.
• E/E Ram1 - 6
The selected channel goes into STOP mode. In STOP mode the RamRe-
corder channel shows it's input signal with a delay of one video frame.
• Modify
Figure 399. RamRecorder - Thumbnail
• Delete: Delete all or selected clip or still.

• Move: Move selected clip or still to another position.
• Join Key: With the Join Key feature, it is possible to join a key signal
with a video signal.
• Split Key: With the Split Key feature, it is possible to split a key signal
from its origin video signal and save it as an independent key
signal.

• Join Aud: With the Join Audio feature, it is possible to join single
audio clips or embedded groups from a video clip with another
clip.
• Split Aud: With the Split Audio feature, it is possible to split the
audio groups from its origin clip and save them as independent
audio clip.
• Rename 
Renames the selected clip and makes automatic name changes for asso-
ciated key signals. The software will prevent changes in key signal
names only and the Rename button from going gray when a key signal
is highlighted.
• Record via R1
• New: Starts recording a new clip. Clip position and clip name will be
created automatically.
• Edit: Starts recording into an existing clip at the current clip, which
results in appending to the current clip.
• ID: Starts recording after the clip position is selected.

RamRecorder Menu
RR Stills Submenu
The RamRecorder Stills menu page enables you to select and modify stored
video stills. Refer to Clips menu for operating details.
Figure 400. RamRecorder Still Menu
the image, the indication field for the remaining time with crop will turn to
red to indicate that with this channel you will not record in full frame
mode.
Figure 401. RamRecorder - Crop Warning

RamRecorder Transfer Submenu

The menu page can be used to transfer clips and stills to a PC and vice versa
and for backup purposes.
Figure 402. RamRecorder Transfer Menu
The buttons on the top are used to select and deselect stills which should be
transferred.

RamRecorder Menu
Transfer Mode Selection

After touching the Transfer Mode button the desired mode can be selected:
• Clips to RAM
• Clips to PC
• Stills to RAM
• Stills to PC
• RealTime Export
• RealTime Import
Figure 403. RamRecorder Transfer Menu
Single Transfer Mode

This is the default mode when you enter the Transfer dialog. Set the cursor
(blue line) to the desired item in the clips/stills list and press the Start Import
or Start Export button. A popup keypad enable you to change the name for
the target file.
When you are transferring to the RamRecorder, the to Pos column shows
you the slot where the item will be transferred to. You can change this posi-
tion via Change Position. In case of missing slot information the to Pos column
shows pos?, then you have to select a slot via Set Position before you can start
the transfer.
When a slot is already occupied, you will be prompted for overwrite at the
start of the transfer.
Multi Transfer Mode

You enter the multi transfer mode when at least one clip/still is selected by
the top row buttons Select All, Begin Selection, End Selection, Toggle Selection.
Selected items are indicated by a green color.

Since a transfer in this mode should run without prompting for overwrite,
you can choose one of three Transfer Modes for the case that the target slot
is already occupied:
• Overwrite: The slot will be overwritten.
• Skip: The image in the RamRecorder will be preserved and the file
selected for transfer will be skipped.
• Next Free: The image in the RamRecorder will be preserved and the next
free slot will be used to transfer the selected file.
For transfers to the RamRecorder you can also decide whether you want to
use the slot position stored in the metadata ("Individual Positions") or
whether you want to store the files in a subsequent order, starting at a
certain position. This position can be changed via Change Start Pos. This is
particularly useful when you have several files without metadata.
Depending on the transfer direction there can be one or two more types of
conflicts which have to be resolved in advance to start the MultiTransfer.
Transfer from the RamRecorder to the PC

Name Conflicts (indicated by "name!")
Solution: Rename either the target file or the source file.
Transfer from the PC to the RamRecorder

Name Conflicts (indicated by "name!")
Solution: Rename either the target file or the source file.
Position Conflicts (indicated similarly to "19!") These conflicts occur when

in the selected range several files have the same target position.
Solution: Change target position to a free position.
Color Information for Multi Transfer

• Green: Items are selected and will be transferred.
• Yellow: Items are selected but will be skipped, due to occupied slots,
double or missing target positions.
• Red: Transfer blocking conflict; resolve conflict or deselect item from
list.
Note Name conflicts must always be resolved manually

RamRecorder Menu
Realtime Export
The Kayenne XL switcher features a real-time backup system.
Operating Philosophy:
For real-time backup the RamRecorder content and metadata will be split
in two streams:
• Video content will be saved on a connected media server or video
recorder.
• Audio content and the clip’s metadata will be saved on a USB Flash
Memory or to the mainframe’s hard disc, when using the Kayak menu,
or to the hard disk of the connected sidepanel PC, when using the
sidepanel menu.
The restore of the RamRecorder clips is organized in two phases. First the
metadata and audio will be restored. After that the video will be trans-
ferred and automatically synchronized.
Backup your Clips/Stills

To backup a RamRecorder clip/still pool, proceed as follows:
• Go to the RamRecorder - Transfer menu.
• Select Transfer Mode and afterwards Realtime Export.
• Select a channel for the video playout, for example, Ram1.
Note During the transfer process, the other channels can be used for normal oper-
ation.
• A dialog appears for entering the backup directory and file name for
metadata and audio package to be stored. As default a file name with a
unique alpha-numeric character string will be generated in order to
label the exported video package.
• In the next dialog you can select whether the metadata only or meta-
data as well as audio are to be stored.

Figure 404. Export Dialog
• Upon transferring the metadata and audio, a request dialog appears:

Start your external server in record mode and press Export Data.
• Be sure that your external device is connected with the Ram channel
selected.
• Assign the Ram channel for playout (for example, Ram1) to an Aux
Out #, using the Aux Controls in the Aux menu and Install - E-Box -
Aux Bus menu.
• Connect your external device with Aux Out #.
• Start your external device in Record mode.
• Press Export Video. All video clips/stills will be transferred in real-time
to the external device.

RamRecorder Menu
Figure 405. Export Dialog 2

Restore your Clips/Stills

To restore your RamRecorder clips/stills from the backup system, proceed
as follows:
• Go to the RamRecorder - Transfer menu.
• Select Transfer Mode and afterwards Realtime Import.
• Select a channel for the data transfer.
• A dialog appears to open the backup file with the stored metadata and
audio package.
• If the RamRecorder already contains clips, a Warning dialog appears.
For real-time import, the RamRecorder has to be empty. Please delete
the clips and stills first, and start the restore process again.
• Upon restoring the metadata and audio a request dialog appears: Start
your external server in playback mode and press Continue.
• Be sure that you external device is connected with the Ram channel
selected.
• Select the input source for the desired RamRecorder (for example,
Input 30).
• Connect your external device with a video input (for example, Input
30).
• Make sure the video clip on the backup device is positioned in front of
the clip.
• Press Continue. All video clips/stills will be transferred in real-time to
the RamRecorder and synchronized with the metadata and audio auto-
matically.
• Start your external device in Playback mode.

RamRecorder Menu
RR Image Converter Submenu

The Image Converter is started with a browser. The left window shows the
folders displayed as icons and the right window lists the files contained
within the selected folder.
1. Double-click to select and open a folder.
2. Select a file to be converted with a left mouse click. You can select more
than one file by using the right mouse key.
Note When converting, the associated filter is started and one single sequence is
created from the individual files. The picture order in the sequence is deter-
mined by the order of the selected files.
Figure 406. Image Converter Menu

Select Destination Format

Activating the Convert button opens a dialog window for the detail adjust-
ments. The following picture formats can be converted among each other:
AVI Audio Video Interleaved
BMP Windows/OS2 Bitmap
JPG Joint Picture Expert Group
TGA TrueVision Targa Image
TIFF Tagged Image File Format
XTENDD RamRecorder File
Figure 407. Image Converter Menu
Output File Name

The name of the exit file has to be entered in a dialog box. The file extension
is added automatically depending on destination pixel format. In general,
the entered file name will be enlarged with a three-digit number to gen-
erate different file names if a sequence will be converted to single images.

RamRecorder Menu
Converting in AVI Format

If AVI is selected as target format, a Codec dialog window appears. Select
one of the listed Codec and close the dialog with OK.
Note If the dialog is canceled, an empty file will be generated.
Source Pixel Format

Touching the Convert button opens a dialog window for detail adjustments.
The following Source Pixel formats can be adjusted.
Figure 408. Select Target Format

Destination Pixel Format

Actuating the Convert button opens a dialog window for the detail adjust-
ments. The following destination pixel formats can be adjusted.
Figure 409. Select Target Format Details
If the source and destination pixel format is different, the image is resized
to maintain the aspect ratio of the image content.
• If PC is selected as destination pixel format, the first picture to be con-
verted determines the picture format of the destination file.
• If a TV format is selected as destination pixel format, the destination file
is coupled with TV format.
Converting Size, Positioning, and Preview

Having selected the conversion parameters, you may have a look at the
format in the Preview window. The red frame shows the outer edge of the
picture (TV format only) to be converted and the white frame shows the
limits of the picture screen after conversion.
The switches Allow enlarge, Allow shrink, Keep aspect and the controls located
below enable adjusting and locating the desired picture section.
If PC is selected as destination pixel format, only the Size control (<<< xx%
>>>) is active.
Untangle
The Untangle feature can be used for clips. Selecting the function cuts a clip
in single frames.

RamRecorder Menu
RR Audio Submenu
The Audio Submenu serves for advanced audio operation modes of the
RamRecorder:
• Audio play offset
• Different record length for video and audio
• Audio record only
• Split audio
• Join audio
• Audio group assignment
• Audio group mute (available in the Kayak menu as well)
• Delay line
Figure 410. RamRecorder Audio Menu

Audio Play Offset

• Select a clip and go to the Audio submenu in the lower left corner.
• Video (red bar) and audio (green bar) clips are displayed in a timeline.
• Enter offset time by clicking in the Audio Play Offset field.
• Alternatively the offset can by done by mouse click and shifting the
video or audio bar graph in the timeline.
Note No offset between individual audio groups is possible!
Audio Group Assignment

With the Audio Group Assignment, it is possible to exchange the
embedded audio groups of the recorded clip. For example, the content (4
audio channels) of audio group B can be played in group A. This makes
sense when the external target device cannot process all four audio groups.
Figure 411. RamRecorder Group Playout
To assign the audio groups, click in the Playout Audio field and relocate the
groups. In the example, the audio channels in Group A will be played in
Group A and in Group B.
After changing the assignment, press Assign Enable.
Split Audio
With the Audio Split feature, it is possible to split the audio groups from its
origin clip and save them as independent audio clip.

RamRecorder Menu
To split an audio group, proceed as follows:

• Select a RamRecorder channel, for example, Ram1.
• Go to the Clip menu
• Select the clip from the clip list, for example, Clip3.
• Press Modify button and afterwards Split Aud.
• The Modify button changes to Split A to sel. Pos.
• Select an unused clip position, for example, Pos 7.
• Press Split A to sel. Pos and afterwards OK.
In the next dialog, the prepared split settings are listed. In addition to the
split parameter, the assignment of the audio groups can be changed. In the
example below, no changes are selected, that is, Group A goes to Group A and
Group B to Group B.
• Press Split selected Groups to finish the split process.
• Or press Cancel to break the split process.
Join Audio
With the Join Audio feature, it is possible to join single audio clips or
embedded audio groups from a video clip with another clip.
To join an audio group, proceed as follows:

• Select a RamRecorder channel, for example, Ram1.
• Select the clip from the clip list, for example, Clip4.
• Press Modify and afterwards Join Aud.
• The Modify button changes to Join A with sel. Pos.
• Select a target clip, for example, Clip3.
• Press Join A with sel. Pos and afterwards OK.
In the next dialog, the prepared join settings are listed. In addition to the
join parameter, the assignment of the audio groups can be changed. In the
example below the origin Group A goes automatically to Group C because the
groups A and B have already audio and group C is the next empty group.
• If desired, assign audio to Group D.
• Press Join selected Groups to finish the split process.
• Or press Cancel to break the split process.
The result of the join process can be checked in the clip list. After finishing,
Clip3 contains audio groups ABC.

Delay Line
The Delay Line feature can be used for time-delayed advanced audio play-
back while in Delayline Record Mode including video and audio.
To delay a playback, proceed as follows:

• Set the main delay time using the RecLen field.
• Press Record/Delayline and afterwards Delayline.
• Now video and audio can be shifted to adjust lip synch.

RamRecorder Menu
RR Active Area Submenu

With the Active Area function the storage space of special clips (for
example, logos) can be reduced to the active picture size.
The idea of the Playout Area/Playout Offset is that you could resize and
reposition a recorded clip.
Figure 412. RamRecorder Active Area Menu
• Enable Playout: Position and crop the a stored clip on the screen.
• Record Area to Fullframe: Crop the area to record.
• Playout Area to Fullframe: Crop a portion of recorded clip to playback.
• Playout Offset: Move the cropped clip.

• Save Metadata to Clip: The parameters of the playout clip will be stored in
the meta data storage.
• Set to default: Recalls default parameters; if Record Area is active,
pressing the button sets the parameter to full frame. If Playout Area is
active, pressing the button sets the Playout Area to the Record Area
values and resets the Playout Offset values to zero.

Aux / Router Menu
Aux / Router Menu
AUX / Router Main Submenu

The AUX buses are programmable to output any of the internal M/E or
Program Preset outputs, including Program, Look Ahead Preview and
Cleanfeed.
Permanent installed buses are displayed as gray. These buses cannot be
selected from this menu.
In addition the AUX submenu serves to set the Aux Bus Transion parame-
ters. Aux Bus Transition is a new feature released with software release 
V 703.
SD video standard.
Figure 413. Auxbus Control / Router Control

Aux Bus Control

• The Used as column shows AUX channels which are assigned for
external keyers (e.g. Video Send and Key Send to external DVE unit).
• Double click on the screen (touch or mouse) to set an Input to an Aux
Bus.
Aux Bus Transition
SD video standard.
• In the Trans Dur column the transition duration can be entered. Double
click on the cell to enter the value in frames.
• In the Trans Mode column the transition mode can be entered. Double
click on the cell calls a sub-dialog:
• Off: No Aux transition
• Direct Mode: 
In Direct Mode pressing the low tally Auto Trans executes an AUX
transition with the known preset source. While this transition is
executed, the Auto Trans button light switched to high tally. When
this transition has reached the end, the Auto Trans button light
switched back to low tally and the mainframe swaps PGM and PST
sources. As a result, subsequent Auto Trans button presses toggles
the transition in this mode.
• Auto Mode:
In Auto Mode the Direct Trans button is OFF and the Auto Trans
button is low tally. Pressing the Auto Trans button, it starts to flash.
If you push a source button at that AUX bus now, the preset source
will be newly preset and the AUX transition will be executed which
is indicated by the high-tally Auto Trans button while the transition
is running. At the end of the transition, PGM and PST swaps again
and the Auto Trans button goes back to low tally. Doing this, you
have executed a single shot AUX transition by pushing an AUX
source button. 
The Auto Mode can be used to decide during operation if the dedi-
cated AUX buses executes a CUT when pushing an AUX bus source
- or - executes an AUX transition if you preset this mode using the
flashing Auto Trans button prologue.

Aux / Router Menu
• T-Dur
The transition time can be entered in the T-Dur column. During the
transition the time will be numbered backwards.
• Start Auto button (Menu):
• The butten can be used like the Auto Trans button as well as in Direct
and Auto mode.
For more details refer section Section 3-Aux Bus Transitions.
Router Control
• The Router menu shows in column Input the name of the source which
is currently connected to the external router output channels.
• Double click on the screen (touch or mouse) to switch a source on the
external router.

Scaler Menu
Kayenne XL supports the MatchDef™ option for up, down, or crosscon-
erting of different input formats to the production format on up to four
inputs per M/E.
In addition the SetDef™ option for up, down, or crossconverting of the
switcher production format to different output formats is supported. For
this up to two outputs per M/E are available.
Input Scaler Submenu (MatchDef™)

The MatchDef™ dual video input source scalars software option enable the
Kayak HD switcher to seamlessly match video sources of different line
rates and aspect rations to the switcher’s production format. The Scalers
work by converting inputs of different formats to the same format as that
used by the switcher. These converted/scaled inputs can then be used any-
where in the switcher. The system supports the use of up to four scalars per
M/E that can be used for up-conversion of SD sources to HD formats.
The MatchDef™ dual video input scalars enable you to match SD sources
into an HD production or HD sources into an SD production. You can cross
match different HD formats as well without sacrificing critical production
elements such as keyers. Scalers also let you match video sources using dif-
ferent aspect ratios to the native production format.
Note The SD and HD standards use different colorimetry. Color bar signals of a dif-
ferent standard that pass through the Scaler will not align with the color
boxes of a vectorscope. However, the actual color of the video image will be
accurate on screen.

Scaler Menu
Figure 414. Input Scaler
Setting Up Scaler Inputs

The Kayenne XL package supports four scalar inputs. If you have pur-
chased the scalar software license, plug a video source into one of the scalar
BNC connectors on the back of the Kayak HD mainframe.

Enabled scalar inputs start at the lowest number of BNC connectors for the
inputs as shown in the following table.
Table 7. Scaler input Connections/Requirements

Scaler Inputs
M/E Enabled Scaler Input Installed M/E Board
M/E 0 21, 22, 23, 24 PP board
M/E 1 45, 46, 47, 48 M/E1 board
M/E 2 69, 70, 71, 72 M/E2 board
M/E3 93, 94, 95, 96 M/E3 board
• Touch the Delegate button to select the Scalar Input or touch Input field
to toggle between the Scalar Inputs.
• Selecting Enable tells the switcher to use the Scalar input so the signal
can be converted up or down to the Input Format selected.
Figure 415. Input Scaler enable
Additional the following settings can be configured for the Input Scalar:
• Aspect Ratio Conversion: Can be set as Fit to Fill, Pillarbox, Letterbox and
Centercut. Details on Aspect Ration Conversion and the relation to the
different video standards are described at the end of this section.
• Background Matte: Insert a matte color to replace black in the cropped /
letter boxed / pillared region. Choose a predefined color and / or
adjust the color by using the control knobs at the right of the control
panel menu.
• Crop: Crop the edges to remove / mask any unwanted artifacts that
appear around the edges.
• Set to Default: Sets the default background matte to black, the crop
values to zero and the aspect ratio to the related default setting.

Scaler Menu
Figure 416. Input Scaler Aspect Ratio Conversion
Figure 417. Input Scaler Bgnd Matte
Figure 418. Input Scaler Input Format
Figure 419. Input Scaler Set to Default

Aux Bus Scaler Submenu
Overview
The SetDef™ option enables conversion of the production format to another
Standard Definition or High Definition format. This includes some aspect
ratio conversion controls with choice of, depending on direction of conver-
sion, either Letterbox, Pillarbox or Fit to Fill. The conversions are between
formats of the same vertical refresh rates only, such as 60 fields per second
and 30 frames per second (interlaced/progressive).
• When scalars are enabled, there is a one frame delay at maximum.
• At minimum, there are the same conversion capabilities as the
MatchDef Scalar inputs; up, down, cross, and aspect ratios. See addi-
tional aspect ratio features below.
Setting up Scaler Outputs works the same way than Scaler Inputs. Check
Setting Up Scaler Inputs on page 503 for details.
Known Limitations
• Each output SetDef pair (e.g. AUX11;12, AUX23;24, AUX35;36,
AUX47;48) is set to the same output standard. Each pair can be a dif-
ferent standard than other pairs, but each output can have different
aspect ratio settings.
• The sources of the Output Scalars must be of the same format as the
switcher‘s current video standard. Primary inputs can be used when
locked to the Switcher reference.
• The video standard of the SetDef outputs must be of the same vertical
frequency as the selected video reference format of the switcher.
• When scalars are enabled, the ancillary data (e.g. embedded audio) is
not passed.

Scaler Menu
Figure 420. Aux Bus Scaler
The menu structure designed for the Auxbus Scalars are the same as used
for the Input Scalars.

Supported Scalar Conversions (Input and Auxbus Scalar)

The conversions are between formats of the same vertical refresh rates only,
such as 60 fields (interlaced) per second and 30 frames (progressive) per
second.
Table 8. Scaler Conversions and supported Aspect Ratio Modes

Outputs
Input
525 4x3 525 16x9 625 4x3 625 16x9 720p 1080i
525 4x3 Fit to Fill Pillarbox, Pillarbox, Pillarbox,
Center-cut (V) Center-cut (V) Center-cut (V)
525 16x9 Letterbox, Fit to Fill Fit to Fill Fit to Fill
Center-cut (H)
625 4x3 Fit to Fill Pillarbox, Pillarbox, Pillarbox,
Center-cut (V) Center-cut (V) Center-cut (V)
625 16x9 Letterbox, Fit to Fill Fit to Fill Fit to Fill
Center-cut (H)
720p Letterbox, Fit to Fill Letterbox, Fit to Fill Fit to Fill Fit to Fill
Center-cut (H) Center-cut (H)
1080i Letterbox, Fit to Fill Letterbox, Fit to Fill Fit to Fill Fit to Fill
Center-cut (H) Center-cut (H)
Aspect Ratio Conversion (Inputs and Auxbus Scalar)
Figure 421. Aspect Ratio Conversions
Down Converting HD (16:9) to SD (4:3)
Center-cut
Letterbox Fit to Fill
Up Converting SD (4:3) to HD (16:9)
Pillarbox Fit to Fill

Center-cut

Scaler Menu

DPM Menu
The DPM menus are organized in five submenus:
• iDPM Main
• iDPM Edit
• eDPM Main
• eDPM Edit
• DVE Extern
Definition of Terms
M/E resources. This is an option with additional hardware.
iDPM Main Submenu

The Kayak HD system supports one DPM channel per keyer, that means a
Kayak HD 100C may have up to 4 DPM channels, a Kayak HD 200 up to 8
DPM channels. For units currently shipping the DPM channel for the first
keyer per M/E-bank is standard, the remaining 3 channels per M/E are
options.
The parameters of the Digital Picture Manipulators are not stored as part of
the EMEM system. They are treated per M/E-bank like external DVE chan-
nels with a separate timeline system with 100 registers. That means the
switcher can recall independently extra DPM effects per M/E while
running an EMEM timeline.
To offer even more flexibility the user can define per register, which of the
4 channels should be affected. For example register 1 could only include the
DPM channel of keyer 1 running an endless loop to spin a logo while the
user is able to recall independently other registers containing only channel
3+4 displaying differently sized boxes.

DPM Menu
Figure 422. iDPM Main
The inner window consists of several sections:

• Inputs Selection Keyer/Fill,
• Effect selection (5 x 5 buttons per page),
• Page selection
Keyer Input Selection

Input selection for the 4 channels, click on the corresponding fields for
source selection.
Effect Selection
25 buttons for DPM effect selection (in total 100 effects on 4 pages). In the
bottom part per button you find an indication of the channels used in the
corresponding effect.
To select an effect, first preselect it (dark blue border) then press OK or

double-click an effect directly. The selected effect (light blue background)

can be controlled by the motion control buttons or by the DPM digipot on

the right side.
The effect selection can be learned in a macro. Since you can run up to four
DPM effects simultaneously, learning motion control commands in macros
has to be done carefully.
Pressing the Play button while learning a macro, this macro will record a
play command for the first channel in the selected effect.
Example:
If the effect contains channel 2, 3, 4 – the macro will record the play command for
channel 2. This macro can be used to play any effect containing at least channel 2,
because a play command for one of the used channels will play all used channels.
So 4 macros is enough to play all effects.
Current Effect Number

In this section you find an indication of the selected effect per channel. This
can differ from the last recalled effect, since an effect recall only loads the
channels included in the DPM effect.
Delegate Button
Delegating the menu to an M/E or P/P stage of the switcher.
Highlight Effect No.

This feature is only a help to get a quick overview, which channel is used in
which effect. This is only important for customers using the DPM as a mul-
tiple DVE. The overlay row is special and consists of two parts, which have
to be selected independently:
• No show: No highlighting
• 1 incl.: Highlight all effects which contain at least one of the selected
channels.
• All incl.: Highlight all effects which contain all of the selected channels.
• Exact: Highlight all effects which contain exactly the selected channels.
• Chan 1 (... 4): Toggle selection channel 1(... 4): ”-- -- --” is off, ”chan 1” is
on.
• Global: Toggle selection global: ”-- -- --” is off, ”global” is on.

DPM Menu
Use DPM Source

DPM Channel selection: You can select per local channel whether this
channel should be affected by the global channel.
DPM Loop
Activates the DPM function for the corresponding keyer, that means when
on, the DPM is looped into the signal path.
Sure Touch Mode

Sure Touch changes the way in which effects behave during recall and play-
back, providing more control and flexibility. An effect can be safely recalled
using two new modes which eliminate abrupt changes: hence the name
Sure Touch is being used. When using a Sure Touch mode, the effect adapts
itself to the switcher’s current state. Upon recall of any effect, no changes
are made to the current state, regardless of the nature or the composition of
the effect. Then, when the effect is run, the relative changes from the inter-
polated effect are applied instead of the traditional absolute output. Only
elements which changed over the course of the original effect are affected.
One way of thinking about safe touch is to think of it as running an effect

in “relative” mode.
These changes can be applied in different ways, allowing the effect to inter-
polate on a path parallel to the original effect (Parallel mode), or on a path
that converges the changing state smoothly to the actual end state of the
original effect (Converge mode). A safe touch mode can be “forced on” just
prior to recalling an effect, or it can be saved with the effect to be used auto-
matically.
This feature changes the paradigm of control for effects, allowing effects to
be applied under more flexible set of conditions and also to be used as spe-
cialized functions to perform specific actions.
Within the DPM timeline system, when an effect is first created, a snapshot
of all values is saved. For any subsequent keyframes, only values which
have changed are then saved. Those values that have changed are referred
to as “bound elements” and are subject to interpolation as the effect runs.
When an effect is recalled in a sure touch mode, the current states of the
bound elements are read by the timeline system. These values are com-
pared with the original first keyframe (snapshot) of the effect, and an
“offset” or “new zero” is established for each bound element of the effect.
This “offset” is then applied during all subsequent fields of the effect. A
new “offset” is established each time the effect is recalled. The result is that
a “new effect” is established each time the effect is recalled.

The essential result is this: When an effect is recalled in a safe touch mode,
only those values which underwent changes after the first key-frame of the
original effect are touched, and only changes in values are applied.
Auto Run
When Auto Run is on a recall of an DPM effect will automatically run the
effect. When Auto Run is off, the run has to be triggered either in the Show
Timeline menu by pressing Play or by pressing the Cut button in the Effects
area again while the section is delegated to DPM control.
The Auto Run button is also used when a DPM effect is recalled by an EMEM.
When On, a keyframe containing DPM Eff. No in the Define Memo will
trigger an immediate run of the relevant DPM effect. (Define memo is set in
the EMEM define memo menu.) When Off, a trigger has to be set to run the
effect.
Cursor Control
The top row buttons Go To, Begin, Rev Play, Pause, Play, and End let you run the
current effect or position the cursor to a specific keyframe. The effect posi-
tion can also be adjusted by the Eff. Pos. digipot.
Refer also the iDPM (eDPM) section of the Multi Function Control Panel.

DPM Menu
iDPM Edit Submenu
The iDPM Edit menu is organized in the following subpages:

• Transform
• Shadow
• Crop & Reverse
• Input
• Priority
• Kurl
• Splits & Mirrors
• Misc
• Light
• Defocus
• Glow
• Recursive
• Setup & Default
• Timeline
• Save & Recall
The Kurl subpage is only available when the Kurl option is installed
The Light, Defocus, Glow, and Recursive subpages are only available when
then Spektra option is installed.
The following elements are available in most of the subpages:

The Top Button Row
Figure 423. Top Button Row
The buttons DPM 1 Control through Global Control indicate which DPM chan-
nels will be affected when you turn the digipots and adjust the according
parameter. A disabled button indicates that in the current effect setup this
channel is not included. Note that the "Global Control" button is only
enabled in the Transform subpage. You can toggle the buttons on and off.
Double clicking a button automatically deselects all other buttons.
The Insert, Modify, and Delete buttons allow you to insert the current DPM
state as a keyframe in the effect. For which channels keyframes will be
inserted/deleted please see further down in the description for Timeline
display.
For more details of these functions please see the Timeline subpage.
With the Copy Clipboard button you can cut or copy keyframe states to a
Clipboard and insert it at a different position of the effect.

DPM Menu
Timeline Display
Figure 424. Timeline Display
The Timeline display serves several purposes. In the first place it shows the
keyframes/pauses for the according channels and the current cursor posi-
tion. With Zoom Out and Zoom In you can adjust the zooming level. Double
clicking in the time bar right to the Zoom buttons adjusts the zoom automat-
ically to show all keyframes.
The channel track buttons DPM1-4 and Global show which channels are
included in this effect and for which channels keyframes will be
inserted/modified or deleted. Click on the buttons for selecting/dese-
lecting the channel. Like in DPM Control a double click deselects all other
channels.
The selected keyframe track itself shows the channel for which the param-
eters are displayed. This is also indicated by the button P/PiDPM 1.
Changing the display channel can be accomplished in different ways:

• Clicking on a Timeline keyframe track.
• Pressing the P/PiDPM 1 button. This will automatically deselect all other
channels and every subsequent press will advance to the next channel.
• Select a channel via a DPM 1 Control button.
When you deselect the control for the channel which is currently displayed
the system automatically searches for a controlled channel to be displayed.

The Bottom Button Row
Figure 425. Bottom Button Row
The buttons Start through End provide the motion control commands for
the effect.
The Save/Discard button allows you to save your changes to the current
effect or revert to the previously stored version. This button is also an indi-
cation whether a modification has taken place since the last time it was
stored. Otherwise this button is disabled.
With the Arrow Left and Arrow Right buttons you can step from one keyframe
to the next or previous one.
With the Goto Keyframe button you go to a specified keyframe number.
For details on keyframe numbering please see the Timeline subpage.
Parameter Groups
Figure 426. Parameter Groups
These groups consist of a group of 5 parameters maximum which can be

delegated simultaneously to the digipots by clicking.
When a parameter differs from its default value the text color changes from
white to yellow. Double clicking the group will reset all parameters to
default. To reset an individual parameter, click on the display field of the
according digipot. In the popup keypad the default button provides the
value for reset to default.
When you use the Sidepanel program on a standard computer without
digipots you can click the name field of the digipot to have scroll wheel
control for this parameter.

DPM Menu
Transform Page
Figure 427. Transform Page
The Transform Menu is used for positioning the channels in the 3D space.
Some of the parameters (Locate, Axis, Spin) you can position either in the
Source or the Target space.
Path Control:
Parameter groups like Locate, Spin, etc. can have individual paths. The path
for the last selected parameter group is always displayed and can be con-
trolled. When you e.g. want to display and control the path for the Perspec-
tive group, first select the Perspective group, then select the Curve group to
adjust Tension, Continuity, or Bias.
The Spin group offers control of the individual X, Y, Z parameters within

the group. The selection is made with the button "Apply to: Spin…"

When the button Apply to All Transf. is selected, the path changes are applied
to all Transform parameters.
For general behavior of the DPM Edit Menu please see iDPM Edit Submenu
on page 515.
For more details on the individual parameters please refer 3-D Digital
Effects Concepts on page 59.
For more details please refer to Path Control on page 68.

DPM Menu
Shadow Page
Figure 428. Shadow Page
The shadow can be used as a drop shadow or create a border around the
image. The Shadow Crop parameters are only active when Use Crop of: is
set to Shadow.
The remaining parameter names are self-explaining
on page 515.

Crop & Reverse Page
Figure 429. Crop & Reverse Page
The Crop and Softness parameters are only active when crop is switched on.
The remaining parameter names are self-explaining.
on page 515.
For more details on Path Control please refer to Path Control on page 68.

DPM Menu
Input Page
Figure 430. Input Page
The source information for front fill/key and back fill/key is always stored
per keyframe.
Whether this information will be used can be set per channel in the DPM
Main Menu (see DPM Menu on page 510).
If you are not familiar with the difference between front/back versus
near/far please see Front and Back, Near and Far on page 64.
on page 515.

Priority Page
Figure 431. Priority Page
The priority of a channel can be either fixed or depending on the Z-Location

in the 3D space.
In the example above Key 1 has always the top priority, Key 4 will always
be in the background. Between these two keyers Key 2 and Key 3 are
fighting for higher priority by their Z-Location. Whether the priority of the
Keyers is controlled by the DPM effect depends on the setting of the effect
(see Save & Recall Page on page 548).
on page 515.

DPM Menu
Kurl Pages
Kurl is divided in 6 subpages

• PageTurn, see Kurl Pageturn/Pageroll Page
• Pageroll, see Kurl Pageturn/Pageroll Page
• Postion/Size-Modulation, see Kurl Position/Size Modulation Page
• Slits, see Kurl Slits Page
• Ripples, see Kurl Ripples Page
• Sphere, see Kurl Sphere Page

Kurl Pageturn/Pageroll Page
Figure 432. Kurl Pageturn/Pageroll Page
The control parameters for Pageturn and Pageroll are identical.

When you create a pageturn with one channel the front and back side will
show the same image (or back side will show matte)
For a different image on the back side you have to use two channels in par-
allel. In this case change "Show: Both Sides" to "Show: Front Side" for the
first channel and to "Show: Back Side" for the second channel.
For general behavior of the DPMDPM Edit Menu please see iDPM Edit
Submenu on page 515.

DPM Menu
Kurl Position/Size Modulation Page
Figure 433. Kurl Position/Size Modulation Page
The modulation can be applied horizontally and/or vertically.

• Change the according Modulation Mode to either Size or Position to
enable the modulation.
• Available modulation patterns are: Sine, Triangle, Square, Ramp, Circle,
Random, Pulse, Trapeze.
• Cycle Count only is active when Limit Cycle is On and Phase Speed is
greater than 0.
• Positive Pattern Only flips the negative part of the modulation to posi-
tive, creating a new shape with twice the frequency. This works for all
patterns but the Square.
• CenterX and CenterY are only active for Modulation Mode Size.

on page 515.

DPM Menu
Kurl Slits Page
Figure 434. Kurl Slits Page
Change the Amplitude parameter to a value greater than 0 to enable the

slits.
• Available modulation Patterns are: Sine, Triangle, Square, Ramp, Circle,
greater than 0.
• When Randomness is 0 all slits have the same width, depending on the
number of slits, otherwise the width varies more or less, depending on
the value of Randomness.

on page 515.

DPM Menu
Kurl Ripples Page
Figure 435. Kurl Ripples Page
• Available modulation Patterns are: Sine, Triangle, Square, Ramp, Circle,

greater than 0.
• Position-H and Position-V define the center of the ripples.
on page 515.

Kurl Sphere Page
Figure 436. Kurl Sphere Page
• H-Position turns the sphere horizontally

• V-Position turns the sphere vertically
• H-Warp stretches the image horizontally around the sphere
• V-Warp stretches the image vertically around the sphere

on page 515.

DPM Menu
Splits & Mirror Page
Figure 437. Splits & Mirror Page
• The Splits parameters are only active when Splits is switched on.
• Position-H and Position-V define the center of the ripples.

on page 515.

Misc Page
Figure 438. Misc Page
Interpolation Mode defines the mode of video interpolation

• Available modes are Adaptive, Frame, Field
• In frame mode an interpolation uses 2 fields. This may cause artifacts if
e.g. a Cut is performed between the two fields of a frame.
• Easycube should be enabled for all channels which are used to form a
cube or slab. Since in a cube or a slab only 3 sides are visible at a time,
with Easycube enabled the channel automatically will flip its position
during rotation from the left to the right or from the top to the bottom
side accordingly.
• Build Cube with Chan 1-3 and Build Slab with Chan 1-3 sets up the local
parameters for channels 1 through 3 automatically to form a cube or
slab.
• This cube should only be positioned/rotated with the Global Channel in
the Transform/Target menu

DPM Menu
Light Page
Figure 439. Light Page
• Each DPM channel has four light sources and one Ambient Shading
light. The available light types are: Point, Bar, and Plane.
• Appearance / Gloss Size of the light spot (Point), width of the Bar.
• The light parameters are only active when then light type is different
from Off.
• The Rotation parameters are only active for light type Bar.
• The Flare Intensity is only active when Independent Flare Intensity is On.


• Path Control: 
There are 3 individual path controls available per light per channel:
• Path Light Attribute for parameter groups Appearance, Color, and Flare
Color
• Path Light Position for parameter groups Position and Rotation.
• Path Ambient Shading for Ambient Shading.
• To display/control a desired path, select first one of its parameter
groups e.g. Appearance when you want to control the Light Attribute
path.
on page 515.

DPM Menu
Defocus Page
Figure 440. Defocus Page
There are three Defocus modes available:

• Defocus: Standard defocus mode.
• Defocus NAM+: Combines the defocused image with the original image
in a non-additive mix mode.
• Defocus NAM-: Combines the defocused image with the original image
in a non-additive mix mode.
• Aspect: Allows to apply the defocus more horizontally or more verti-
cally.
• Ratio: Controls the mix amount for Defocus NAM+ and Defocus NAM-.
• NAM Matte Enable: Replaces the original image for Defocus NAM+ and
Defocus NAM- mix modes.


on page 515.

DPM Menu
Glow Page
Figure 441. Glow Page
There are three Glow modes available:

• Glow: Standard glow mode, adds a glow e.g. around a caption.
• Glow Only: Like Glow but replaces the fill signal of the caption by the
glow color.
• Outline: Like Glow but replaces the fill signal of the caption by the back-
ground signal.
• Aspect: Allows to apply the glow more horizontally or more vertically.

on page 515.

Recursive Page
Figure 442. Recursive Page
There are four Recursive modes available:

• Trails: Creates trails on an image by using wind to create the displace-
ment.
• Freeze: Creates effects like film Look, etc. It generates the image cap-
tures in the current location (which can be moved by Transform).
• Montage: Creates random displaced images.
• Motion Decay: Creates motion blur. Motion Decay applies recursive
overlay to the motion within the channel image itself.

DPM Menu
A recursive strobe action (Trails, Freeze, etc.) can start at each keyframe of
an effect or triggered after a certain period.
• Recursive Loop: Switch on to enable recursive modes.
• Show Picture: Continues to show current image when recursive mode is
active
• Layer Mode: Over causes the recursive images to be superimposed on top
of the existing image. Under causes them to be added beneath. Erase
removes image in recursive image area.
• Keyframe Reset: Clears the recursive memory. With this operation, all
traces of previous recursive images are removed. This can be useful
when an effect is rewound.
• Force Strobe: When On, strobe action take places even when no effect is
running. Active for Trails, Freeze, and Montage.
• Strobe Type: Controls type of Recursive strobe events. Time uses the
Period as a basis for strobe actions. Keyframe uses the keyframes of the
channel's running timeline as a trigger for strobe actions
• Parameter group Appearance
• Decay: Rate of image decay
• Star Decay: Rate of random points (star) decay
• Blur: Amount of blur
• Period: Number of fields (interlaced mode) or frames (progressive
mode) between each image capture for the strobe.
• On Time: Amount of time (percentage) that the image is unfrozen
within the period
Note When Strobe Type is set to Time the minimum Period should be 3 fields
(interlaced mode) or 2 frames (progressive mode). Otherwise no recursion
will be visible!
• Matte Control applies matte to the recursively generated image. With

Matte the image is filled with color as defined by Hue, Saturation, and
Brightness. With Rainbow the recursive image is filled with color having
hue that varies by Speed. 

• Recursiv Mode Presets:

Some presets are available as a quick start:
Figure 443. Recursive Page
on page 515.

DPM Menu
Setup & Default Page
Figure 444. Setup & Default Page
When you select Create New in the Save & Recall subpage, all four DPM
channels are enabled by default. The switcher allows you to use the chan-
nels independently, that means you can run e.g. channel 1 & 2 in an endless
loop while you recall different effects for channel 3 & 4. In order to accom-
plish this, only channels you need should be included in the effect. Not
included channels will not be touched when the effect is recalled.
• Channels included in this effect: Select the channels needed
• Allow global control: 
Deselect channels you do not want to have controlled by the global
channel. When you e.g. build a cube with channel 1-3, but channel 4 is
also included in the effect to stay pushed back in the background, you
should exclude channel 4 from global control when you rotate your
cube. Because this rotation is normally done by global target rotate and
otherwise your channel 4 will behave like a satellite orbiting the cube

• Set to Default: You can either default the parameters of the Transform
subpage only or all parameters of a channel. For a complete start from
scratch buttons are added to default all channels by one button press.
• Set DPM-Loop "On" & "Linear Key": These buttons display the current state
of the (iDPM only) keyers of the according DPM channels. When the
buttons are enabled, the state differs from what is normally necessary
to key properly. Pressing the buttons enables the DPM-Loop of the keyer
and sets the key mode to Linear Key.
• Set Near/Far Key Source "White": When you use the DPM channel to
manipulate a full frame image you should key on White. Pressing the
buttons sets the key source for near and far to White.
If you are not familiar with the difference between front/back versus
near/far please see Front and Back, Near and Far on page 64.

DPM Menu
Timeline Page
Figure 445. Timeline Page
The Timeline display serves several purposes. In the first place it shows the
keyframes/pauses for the according channels and the current cursor posi-
tion. With Zoom Out and Zoom In you can adjust the zooming level. Double
clicking in the time bar right to the Zoom buttons adjusts the zoom auto-
matically to show all keyframes. The Zoom and the effect position can also
be adjusted by digipots.
The channel track buttons Ch 1-4 and Global show which channels are
included in this effect and for which channels keyframes will be
inserted/modified or deleted. Click on the buttons for selecting/dese-
lecting the channel. A double click deselects all other channels.
The buttons DPM 1-4 Kf Edit and Global Kf Edit have the same function as the
channel track buttons.

The keyframe edit buttons in detail:

• Insert
• Keyframe Before: Inserts a keyframe before the current keyframe
position.
• Keyframe After: Inserts a keyframe after the current keyframe posi-
tion.
• Pause: Inserts a pause. A pause can only exist on a keyframe. When
you insert a pause while the effect position is between keyframes, a
new keyframe is inserted.
• For the first keyframe Insert Keyframe Before or Insert Keyframe After
can be used.
• Modify
• All Kf's Absolute: Applies the result of all changes you made to your
current keyframe to all keyframes in the effect. E.g. you changed in
your current keyframe the size parameter from 0.4 to 0.5. This
command will change the size of all keyframes to 0.5.
• All Kf's Relative: Applies the amount of the changes you made to your
current keyframe to all keyframes in the effect. E.g. you changed in
your current keyframe the size from 0.4 to 0.5. The amount of
change is 0.1. This increment will be added to the size of all other
keyframes
• Current Keyframe: Applies the changes you made to your current
keyframe. When you press modify while the effect position is not
on a keyframe, a new keyframe will be inserted at that position.
• Channel Clipboard: Copies a complete channel to or from the clip-
board.
• Delete
• All Kf's: Deletes all keyframes from all selected channels
• Current Keyframe: Deletes the current keyframe. When the Constant
Duration button is On the duration time of the deleted keyframe
will be added to the duration time of the previous one, keeping the
total effect time constant.
• With the Keyframe Clipboard button you can cut or copy keyframe states
to a Clipboard and insert it at a different position of the effect.
• Start Time: Delays the start of the selected channels to the given time.

DPM Menu
• Keyframe Duration: The keyframe duration for the next keyframe to be

inserted. When you want to change the duration of an existing key-
frame, got to this keyframe, change the time and confirm by pressing
Modify Current Keyframe.
• Effect Duration: Changes the total duration for the selected channels.
When you want to change the duration of the total effect, make sure all
channels, including the global channel are selected.

Save & Recall Page
Figure 446. Save & Recall Page
100 DPM effects can be stored at position 0 though 99.

• The Save & Recall sub-delegation shows you all available effects and
allows to either recall an effect in the work buffer (press the Recall
button or double click the listbox position), or to select a position to
create a new effect with the Create New button.
Note Changes to the work buffer will always be stored at the position of the recalled
effect at the position which was selected for Create New.
• The display also shows which channels are included in the effect.
• Control Priority: When On, this DPM effect will control the keyer priority,
depending on the DPM settings of the keyframes (see Priority Page on
page 524.

DPM Menu
• Sure Touch Mode: The following modes are available: Normal (no Sure
Touch), Converge, and Parallel.
For more details on Sure Touch please see Sure Touch on page 77.
• Loop Mode:
• Normal: Effect runs once from begin to end.
• Loop: Effects runs endless. When the end is reached it jumps to start
and plays again.
• Bounce: Plays endless from start to end and then plays reverse from
end to start.
• Lock Effect: When On, no changes are possible for this effect.
Note Control Priority, Sure Touch Mode, Loop Mode, Lock Effect, Rename, Delete
are buttons which work on the selection in this listbox, independent from the
effect currently loaded in the work buffer and are executed immediately
In contrary the Save / Discard button indicates changes made to keyframe in

the work buffer. When this button is active the changes can be accepted
(Save) are discarded.
Note When you recall another DPM effect, e.g. by an EMEM or by a macro while
Save / Discard is active these changes are automatically accepted and saved
before the new effect is

eDPM Main Submenu

The eDPM menu pages are identical with the iDPM menus described in the
sections above. As example, only the eDPM Main menu page and the
eDPM Edit menu page are pictured in this section.
Refer to How to work with eDPM on page 556 for operating details.
Figure 447. eDPM Main Menu
The eDPM Main Menu (sidepanel) consists of several sections:

• Channel Inputs - displays and enable source selection (Near and Far
Side/ Front and Backside) per channel including related Tally informa-
tion.
• Effect selection - (6 x 5 buttons + Page shift 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th) 100 recall
buttons for eDPM effects.
• Current Effect No. - indicates the loaded eDPM effect per Channel.
• Motion Command - executing applicable Motion Commands for selected
effect.

DPM Menu
Input Source Selection

Input selection for the 4 FX processor channels, click on the related fields
for source selection:
Each channel has a separate source selection for front and back side, which
is automatically selected, depending on the rotation angle of the channel
and on whether Use DPM Source is activated for the corresponding eDPM
Channel.
Effect Selection
The menu contains 25 buttons for eDPM effect selection (in total 100 effects
on 4 pages). The bottom section of each button displays the channels used
in the corresponding effect. To select an effect, first pre-select it (dark blue
border), then press OK - or double click any effect directly by mouse and/or
touchscreen.
Current Effect Number

This section shows the selected effect per eDPM channel. This can differ
from the last recalled effect, since an effect recall only loads the channels
included in the eDPM effect.
Note Any channel combination is possible.
Motion Control Buttons

The selected effect (light blue background) can be controlled by the motion
control buttons (Begin, Reverse, Pause, Play, End) or by the DPM digipot on
the lower right side.
Function Buttons
• Highlight Effect No. - Filtering for Specific Effect Channels and Channel
Combinations.
• DPM Use Source - Enables or disables eDPM crosspoint recall on selected
effect per Channel (per EMEM).
• Force Shape Mode - Allows independent settings per Channel in order
to compensate for unprocessed Video and Key signals, for example,
Character Generator.
• Sure Touch - Please refer to iDPM section of the User Manual.
• Transfer - Allows transferring entire effects from any iDPM into eDPM.
• Modify - Dialog for various operations for example, Cut, Copy, Paste,
Rename, Delete etc.

Highlight Eff Number

This feature is for help to get a quick overview of which channel is used in
which effect. This is most important for customers using the eDPM option
as multiple single Channel DPM!
The overlay row is special and consists of two parts, which have to be
selected independently.
• no show - No highlighting.
• 1 incl. - Highlight all effects which contain at least one of the selected
channels.
• all incl. - Highlight all effects which contain all of the selected channels.
• exact - Highlight all effects which contain exactly the selected channels.
• --- / chan 1 - Toggle selection channel 1 on/off.

• --- / global - Toggle selection global: on/off.
Use DPM Source (for Channel 1-4)

If any DPM Channel is enabled for Use DPM Source, a loaded DPM effect
will recall the crosspoint related to the information formerly saved per Key-
frame.
Note The settings for enabling or disabling "Use DPM Source" are EMEM sensitive
and can be effected in TiM/EMEMo / Define Memo / eDPM Send Channel 1-4.
Modify
• Rename - Rename selected effect.
• Cut - Cut out selected effect into Clipboard.
• Copy - Copy selected effect into Clipboard.
• Paste - Paste Clipboard into Cursor destination.
• Swap - Exchange selected Cursor positions.
• Undo - Undo last action (does not recover deleted effect).
• Delete - Delete selected effect.
• Lock - Enable/Disable write protection/read only.

DPM Menu
Dialog Buttons
• DVE Extern - Switch to control page for external DVE 1 + 2.
• eDPM Main - Switch to the main menu page for internal eDPM
• eDPM Edit - Switch to edit page for internal eDPM.
• iDPM Main - Switch to the main menu page for internal iDPM.
• iDPM Edit - Switch to edit page for internal eDPM.
• Previous Menu - Return to the previous menu.

eDPM Edit Submenu

For detail see iDPM Edit Submenu on page 515
Transform
Editing of eDPM is identical to iDPM. Please see iDPM Transform Page
Shadow
Editing of eDPM is identical to iDPM. Please see iDPM Shadow Page
Crop & Reverse

Editing of eDPM is identical to iDPM. Please see iDPM Crop & Reverse Page
Input
Editing of eDPM is identical to iDPM. Please see iDPM Input Page
Priority
Editing of eDPM is identical to iDPM. Please see iDPM Priority Page
Kurl
Editing of eDPM is identical to iDPM. Please see iDPM Kurl Pages
Splits & Mirrors

Editing of eDPM is identical to iDPM. Please see iDPM Splits & Mirror Page
Misc
Editing of eDPM is identical to iDPM. Please see iDPM Misc Page
Light
Editing of eDPM is identical to iDPM. Please see iDPM Light Page

DPM Menu
Defocus
Editing of eDPM is identical to iDPM. Please see iDPM Defocus Page
Glow
Editing of eDPM is identical to iDPM. Please see iDPM Glow Page
Recursive
Editing of eDPM is identical to iDPM. Please see iDPM Recursive Page
Setup & Default

Editing of eDPM is identical to iDPM. Please see iDPM Setup & Default Page
Timeline
Editing of eDPM is identical to iDPM. Please see iDPM Timeline Page
Save & Recall

Editing of eDPM is identical to iDPM. Please see iDPM Save & Recall Page

How to work with eDPM

Definition of Terms
M/E resources
The eDPM (Digital Pixel Manipulator) is a powerful option for the Kayenne
XL (HD/SD) 8RU switcher mainframes. It improves the feature set and the
value of the switcher significantly for all production purposes. It supports
the user of Kayak (HD/SD) to increase the efficiency of productions and
investments.
The eDPM is designed to cover the basic effects that are mainly used in day
to day productions, including defocus per channel, Warp effects (Page
Turns, Rolls, Ripples, etc.), Lightning (4 light sources per Channel), Z-Pri-
ority (includes also every possible channel priority setting), Key Channel
operations, Recursive Effects, Drop Shadow, etc. Integration of the eDPM
into the switcher avoids the requirement of additional space for installa-
tion, additional power supply, air-conditioning and additional cabling. No
separate inputs or Aux buses are required to feed the DVE. This frees up all
I/Os of the switcher for other/additional video signals. Close integration
of eDPM control into the user interface of the switcher gives more creative
power to the operator and optimizes the efficiency of the users.
General Information
eDPM Processor Functions

The eDPM Processor board provides 4 channels Video + Key of DPM with
linear effects in 3D space. Every channel handles video and key signals.
Sizing, Positioning and Rotation in all 3 axis can be performed, and per-
spective representation of the images. A combiner function combines the
DVE channels on the board in order to not lock or waste Keyers or even
entire M/E's for multi channel effects. The combiner also provides Z-pri-
ority for the DPM channels. All local DPM channels can be controlled inde-
pendently or together in any combination. On top of this, a Global Channel
provides additional control to any number of selected Local Channels.
Examples for multi Channel effects are: multi split screen, double boxes,
cubes, etc.
Video Architecture
The Kayak (HD/SD) internal DPM (DVE) offers a high flexibility in the
way it can be controlled. You can control it in the same way like existing
external DVEs, that means you can combine up to 4 channels via a com-
biner and feed it into the switcher via a single video and a single key input.

DPM Menu
That means you can combine up to 4 eDPM channels via the combiner and
the eDPM Video and Key signals are available at the input matrix (eD1F -
eD4F = Combined Video, eD1K - eD4K = Combined Key). It is also possible
to break down the architecture into two 2-Channel eDPMs (any channel
combination is possible), each pair with a video and key signal also avail-
able at the input matrix. Both pairs can be controlled independently. Each
of the 2-channel eDPMs can further be split into two 1-channel eDPMs. So
up to 4 individual eDPMs can be controlled independently, for example
Background or Key Transitions. Single Channel effects will appear on their
designated Video and Key outputs (at the Input Matrix), whereby any com-
bination of Multichannel effects will also combine their related Video and
Key outputs (at the Input Matrix).
For more details regarding eDPM signal routing, please refer to Figure 448
on page 558.
The Kayak HD 8 RU mainframe provides an expansion slot that can house

a single M/E Board (PN# xxx-6631-xx or xxx-0390-xx). This hardware
option can be utilized to provide up to 4 channels of Expansion Video/Key
DPM (DVE) known as eDPM.
Note This option is not available for the 4 RU mainframe version!
eDPM Advantages
The eDPM has some advantages over the iDPM systems. These advantages
include:
• Video/Key combining of channels without the use of any M/E
resources.
• The ability to have two separate combiner V/K outputs reentered into
the switcher.
• Independent preview of combined channel outputs or channel inputs
without the need of M/E resources.
• Separate effect creation and recall controls not associated with M/E
functions.
• The portability of effects between systems by using independent effect
file systems independent of M/E effects.
• The portability of effects between M/Es by using the eDPM as flexible
/ routable resource.
• Dedicated Send and Return lines to and from the eDPM.
• The effects features for the eDPM are identical to those available with
the Kayak HD iDPM, Kurl and Spektra options.

Figure 448. Block Diagram eDPM
ME Board (M/E 1)
PGM, PST M1 A
BGD
M1 P1
Global
Fill1, Key1 M1 B
KeyProc 1 iDPM 1
MIX
Fill2, Key2 M1 C
KeyProc 2 iDPM 2
Fill3, Key3 KeyProc 3 M1 D
iDPM 3
Fill4, Key 4 KeyProc 4 M1 P2
iDPM 4
M/E Returns
ME Board (M/E 2)
PGM, PST M2 A
BGD
M2 P1
Global
Fill1, Key1 M2 B (V2)
Signal Routing
KeyProc 1 iDPM 1
MIX
Fill2, Key2
KeyProc 2 iDPM 2 M2 C (K2)
Fill3, Key3 KeyProc 3 iDPM 3 V1
Fill4, Key 4 KeyProc 4 iDPM 4 K1
V2 K2 Return
V1 K1 Return
M/E Returns / Precombined V/K Send
eDPM
V1
K1
Global
V1 K1 V2
eDPM Ch1
K2
MIX
Fill2 (V2), Key2 (K2)

eDPM Ch2
Fill3, Key3 V3
eDPM Ch3
Fill4, Key4 K3
eDPM Ch4
V4
K4
Postcombined V/K Return

DPM Menu
Creating a Simple Zoom Effect Using eDPM Channels

Proceed as followed:
1. Set first keyframe = Size 0 %.
2. Set second keyframe = Size 100 % (set all to Default).
3. Save effect and rename "Zoom". Effect duration is supposed to be 1

second.
4. Enable eDPM-1 Send signals in Config - E-Box- M/E, for example, for
M/E1.
5. Activate Return Key 6 in M/E1 Main menu.
6. Select for Transition - eDPM - eDPM1 - Channel-1 in M/E1 Main menu.
7. Re-program a button in the Transition module of M/E1 in order to use

it as Next Transition Type - eDPM1.
8. Pick two reasonable crosspoints in Program and Preset bus of M/E1

and set Next Transition to Background only, Transition Type = eDPM-1.
9. Now the Auto Transition button and the Lever-arm/Fader can be used
to control the eDPM-1 Transition.
10. Any duration time in the Transition Module can be entered to run the
eDPM-1 effect.
11. Changing the "BGD DVE" between PGM and PST will change the Run-
Direction.
12. The created effect also can be used for a keyer transition.
13. Also pre-combined signals can be effected with the eDPM (for example,
BGD + Key1 + Key2).
Note In order to contain a combination of Keyer1-4 into a pre-combined send

signal, then - in terms of priority settings - they have to be next to each other.
Copying of DPM Channels

This copy feature enable you to copy DPM channels in different modes:
• Copy of DPM channels within an effect.
• Copy of DPM channels between different effects, using the clipboard.

Copy a Channel Within an Effect

• Go to the DPM Timeline menu.
• Press the Edit Misk button.
• Press the Copy Channel button.
Copying DPM Channels Between Different Effects

• Go to the DPM Timeline menu.
• Press the Edit Misc button.
• Select the source channel by pressing Key 1 to Key 4 buttons.
• Select the target by pressing Clipboard.
• Select the source by pressing the Clipboard buttons.
• Select the target channel by pressing the Chan 1 to Chan 4 buttons.
Copy Effects
This feature can be used to copy one or more effects either between
switcher levels or between iDPM and eDPM. The Cut, Copy, Paste and Swap
functions work across iDPM and eDPM.
• Go to the DPM Timeline menu. Example: Source level PP DPM.
• Select the desired effect to be copied.
• Press the Edit Misc button.
• Press Copy to copy the effect to the clipboard.
• Select the target position and press Edit Misc.
• Press Paste to copy the effect from the clipboard to the desired effect
position.

DPM Menu
Transfer All Effects

To transfer all effects from a DPM, go to the Timeline menu of the target
DPM.
• Press Edit Misc.
• Press Transfer all Effects.
• Select DPM to copy all effects from the directory.
A system warning appears if the target DPM contains effects and one or
more register(s) are already used.
Make your choice to solve the copy conflict:

• No - skip the register.
• Never - skip all used registers.
• Yes - overwrite register.
• Always - overwrite all used register.
• Cancel - cancel the copy process.

DVE Extern Submenu

The menu page serves to control an external DVE unit connected to the
switcher mainframe. Refer to the DVE Manual for details.
Figure 449. EMEM Select
DVE1 / DVE2
Selecting the channel of the external DVE.
Effect Selection
25 buttons for DPM effect selection (in total 100 effects on 4 pages). In the
bottom part per button you find an indication of the channels used in the
corresponding effect.
To select an effect, first preselect it (dark blue border) then press OK or

double-click an effect directly. The selected effect (light blue background)
can be controlled by the motion control buttons or by the DPM digipot on
the right side.

DPM Menu
The effect selection can be learned in a macro. Since you can run up to four
DPM effects simultaneously, learning motion control commands in macros
has to be done carefully.
Pressing the Play button while learning a macro, this macro will record a
play command for the first channel in the selected effect.
Example:
If the effect contains channel 2, 3, 4 – the macro will record the play
command for channel 2. This macro can be used to play any effect con-
taining at least channel 2, because a play command for one of the used
channels will play all used channels. So 4 macros is enough to play all
effects.
Motion Control Buttons

The selected effect (light blue background) can be controlled by the motion
control buttons (Begin, Reverse, Pause, Play, End) or by the DVE digipot on
the lower right side.

EMEM Menu
EMEM Select Submenu

The Select menu enables you to directly select the individual register 0 ...
99. The info field on the left side displays the short name, the long name
and the text of the register just marked with the cursor frame.
Figure 450. EMEM Select

EMEM Menu
Delegate
If this button is pressed, the user can select another EMEM to go to. So it is
possible to switch over to the PP, M/E1, M/E2, M/E3 or Master EMEM
Select Menu.
Note EMEM edit menu: If an M/E is in Edit mode and if the M/E changed with the
Delegate button to an M/E which is in Select mode, the menu remains in edit
mode and vice versa. The M/E cannot be changed with the EMEM menu
button on the right side of the menu display.
View
On: If you are going to edit a timeline, then you will see the results of your
modifications and cursor movement in the video, that is, if a keyframe or
snapshot object will be selected, it will be recalled and displayed in the
video.
Off: If you are going to edit a timeline, then you will not see the results of
your modifications and cursor movement in the video, that is, the state of
any object and the video will not be affected.
Auto Run
When Auto Run is switched off, the timeline is played completely and only
stopped when a Wait is inserted into the timeline.
When Auto Run is switched on, only the first keyframe of the timeline is
recalled, thereafter the timeline is stopped until you continue the timeline
with Continue. Subsequently it continues running normally.
Undo Enable
If this button is pressed, the state before the last recall or timeline play is
restored.
Undo Enable/Disable
For special application, the Undo function can be disabled. If Undo dis-
abled, no undo state is stored before snapshot recalls and playing timelines.
Recalling the undo state is therefore not possible. The reason for disabling
the Undo feature is that it saves time before snapshot recalls.
Auto Recall
If this button is pressed, snapshots and timelines will be recalled / played
as they were stored or edited, i.e. they will not be filtered through the cur-
rently adjusted define memo. The define memo is changed after a snapshot
recall / timeline play to that define memo which is implicitly stored within
snapshots and timelines. Starts playing a selected timeline immediately.

Cut
• If snapshot selected: Recall
• If timeline selected: Timeline Play
Auto
If this button is pressed and a snapshot is selected, a dissolve operation
with the Auto transition time for this snapshot will be done. If a timeline is
selected and then the Auto button is pressed, the selected timeline will be
played in the given Auto Time. While the dissolve or auto play operation
the button LED is on. Timelines containing endless loops or waiting for an
event (GPI, time) can not be played with Auto.
Time
Pressing this button, enables you to adjust the Auto Time for snapshot dis-
solves and timeline auto play and the default transition time for key frames
in timelines.
Figure 451. EMEM Select Delegate
Transfer memo
Pressing this button, enables you to save the contents (snapshot or time-
line) of a register (Reg1 .. 99) to a floppy disk (FD) or load data into a reg-
ister.
Figure 452. EMEM Select Transfer Memo
Menu Lock
Locks the current menu.
Edit
Selects the Edit menu and enables the edit function for the register selected
with the blue cursor frame. For details refer to the section EMEM Edit Menu
on page 568.
Delete
Deletes the register selected with the blue cursor frame.

EMEM Menu
Move
Moves a snapshot from one register to another. If the destination register
already contains a snapshot or timeline, both register contents will be
changed.
Rename
Renames the currently selected register. You can rename the 4, 8 and 20
character names and change the 256 character comment.
Store
Stores the entities currently in Define Memo to the selected (blue cursor
frame) register as a snapshot.
Modify
Modifies a stored snapshot related to the currently defined Define Memo.
The state of all entities currently enabled in Define Memo will be changed
in the selected snapshot to the currently adjusted state, that is, if the border
color of a wipe effect has to be changed from red to green in an already
stored snapshot, you have to select this snapshot, enable only the wipe in
the Define Memo and adjust the mixer to the state where the border color
is green. Then press Modify. The border color of this wipe now will change
in the selected snapshot to green.

EMEM Edit Menu

The menu appears after clicking the Edit button in the Select menu.
Note If the edit mode is activated, the respective Select menu of the EMEM cannot
be selected.
Function Buttons
View
On: If you are going to edit a timeline, then you will see the results of your
modifications and cursor movement in the video, that is, if a keyframe or
snapshot object will be selected, it will be recalled and displayed in the
video.
Off: If you are going to edit a timeline, then you will not see the results of
your modifications and cursor movement in the video, that is, the state of
any object and the video will not be affected.
Delete
Deletes the keyframe marked with the cursor.
Selecting of the Modify All mode:
Modify All / Modify range

If range is selected, the changes refer only to this area, otherwise the
changes are carried out in the entire timeline.
Simple:
Changes the parameters which can be adjusted with digipots and buttons
absolutely on the adjusted value.
Advanced:
The following functions change the keyframe contents:
Digipots Relative:
Changes the parameters which can be adjusted with the digipots in a rela-
tive amount, for example, color, brightness, pattern size, clip level.
Digipots:
Changes the parameters which can be adjusted with the digipots abso-
lutely on the adjusted value, for example, color, brightness, pattern size,
clip level.

EMEM Menu
Buttons:
Changes the state of values which can be adjusted with buttons, for
example, crosspoints, key modes, wipe pattern, rotation on/off.
Exchange Buttons:
This function changes only values which have a certain value. In order to
set this value, first press previously the Set KF Ref button. Then enter the
desired new value and press the Exchange Buttons button.
Example:
Exchange the circles in the time line by stars.
1. Select wipe pattern no 119 (circle).
2. Press Set KF Ref.
3. Select wipe pattern no. 131 (stars).
4. Press Exchange Buttons.
The following functions do not change the keyframe contents:
Transition –> Duration

Changes all transition times.
Transition –> Type

Changes the transition type (Linear / S-Linear).
Hold Time
Changes the hold time of the keyframe.
End Edit
Closes the edit mode and saves the modification.
Cancel Edit
Cancels the edit mode without saving.
Left / Right Cursor

Navigates the cursor inside the timeline.
Modify Current
The parameter listbox appears for the current selected object. If it is a key-
frame, the parameter listbox shows the entry Store Keyframe [Yes/No].
The default value depends on whether View On or Off is selected. Store
Keyframe [Yes] means that the keyframe data of the object are also stored

when the listbox is closed with OK. This means, there is a simple possibility
to change the keyframe data.
• When the listbox is opened, the cursor can be set with the mouse or the
digipot to other objects in the timeline. The listbox then shows the state
of the currently selected object.
• Double-clicking an object with the mouse opens the listbox in the same
way as the button Modify Current.
Mark
This button enables selection of a range in the timeline. If a range is
selected, the Modify All button changes its display to Modify Range. All modi-
fications are performed in the selected range only.
Insert
Insert an object in a timeline. For details see below.
• Current: Inserts a keyframe with the actual settings
• Stored: Inserts a stored Snapshot or Sequence. Enter the desired number.
• Wait: Inserts a wait object GPI, User, TOD, Hold.
• Trigger: Inserts a trigger object GPO, DVE, Machine, Memo, MaKE,
PBus.
• Loop: Inserts a loop object Begin, End
Note To insert a PBus Trigger/Register: Under Insert > Trigger >

PBus, a Trigger PBus command or a PBus Register command can be
inserted into the timeline.
PBus Trigger:
The listbox represents the machines and the meaning of the trigger for the
machines.
The first line in the listbox shows the numeric value of the trigger. All
machines get the same trigger whose meaning, however, can be different
for the individual machines. If the trigger is changed for one machine, in
general, the display of the other machines is also changed as well as the
numeric value of the trigger.
PBus Register:
In the first line, that register can be selected which has to be recalled. It
shows the machines. For each machine, it can be individually selected
whether the recall has to be performed or not.

EMEM Menu
Object Overview and Parameter Entry

The following section gives an overview of the objects with their parame-
ters which can be inserted into a timeline.
Start:
Object is always available. Cannot be erased or inserted.
Transition:
Is automatically inserted before keyframe or snapshot.
Keyframe:
When inserting, also the parameters of the associated transition can be indi-
cated.
Parameters:
• Duration
• Transition Type (linear, s-linear)
• Hold time
External Snapshot:
When inserting, also the parameters of the associated transition can be indi-
cated.
Parameters:
• Snapshot No.
• Hold time
Timeline:
Parameter - Timeline No.
Loop Begin:
The loop can be changed on the Loop Begin as well as on the Loop End
symbol.
Parameter - Loop count
Wait Frames
Parameter - Frames
Wait GPI
Parameter - GPI Number

Loop End
The loop can be changed on the Loop Begin as well as on the Loop End
symbol.
Parameter - Loop count
Wait User
Parameter --
Wait TOD
Parameter -Time of Day
Trigger GPO
Parameter - GPIO Number
Trigger DVE
Parameter - Machine 1
Commands - Play, Stop, FFWD, FREW
Trigger Machine MP
Parameter - Machine 1
Commands - Play, Stop, FFWD, FREW, Cue In, Cue Out, Goto, Variable
Variable Speed - Only with command Variable
Timecode - Only with command Goto
Trigger Memo
Parameter - Machine
Commands - Play, Stop, FFWD, FREW, Goto, Variable
Speed - Only with command Variable
Timecode - Only with command Goto
Default Register [yes/no]

Yes means that the command is applied to the register just being selected in
the EMEM control field. Register No [0 ... 99]
No means that the command is applied to the register indicated under the
register no.
The parameter is already defined via the overlay menu.
Entry is possible only with certain commands.

EMEM Menu
Trigger P-Bus Trigger

Parameter - Trigger Number
Machine 1 - Recall, No Recall
Trigger P-Bus Register

Parameter - Register Number
Trigger MaKE Memo

Parameter - Memo Number
End
Object is always available. Cannot be erased or inserted.

Figure 453. EMEM Edit Display Mode Graphic

EMEM Menu
Figure 454. EMEM Edit Display Mode Mixed Modify Current

Figure 455. EMEM Edit Display Mode Mixed Modify Current Transition Duration
Figure 456. EMEM Edit Display Mode Mixed Modify Current Transition Type

EMEM Menu
Figure 457. EMEM Edit Display Mode Mixed Modify Hold Time

Figure 458. EMEM Edit Display Mode Text
Figure 459. EMEM Edit Insert Loop
Figure 460. EMEM Edit Insert Loop Execution Count9

EMEM Menu
Figure 461. EMEM Edit Insert Stored
Figure 462. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger
Figure 463. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger DPM
Figure 464. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger DPM Command
Figure 465. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger DVE
Figure 466. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger DVE Command

Figure 467. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger Event

EMEM Menu
Figure 468. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger GPO
Figure 469. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger Machine
Figure 470. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger Machine Command

Figure 471. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger Macro

EMEM Menu
Figure 472. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger Macro Number

Figure 473. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger Make
Figure 474. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger Memo
Figure 475. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger Memo Command

EMEM Menu
Figure 476. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger Pbus
Figure 477. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger Pbus Register

Figure 478. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger Pbus Register
Figure 479. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger RAM Rec
Figure 480. EMEM Edit Insert Trigger RAM Rec Command
Figure 481. EMEM Edit Insert Wait

EMEM Menu
Figure 482. EMEM Edit Insert Modify All
Figure 483. EMEM Edit Insert Modify All Advanced

EMEM Define Submenu

Figure 484. EMEM Define
The menu indicates which switcher resources are stored in snapshots and
timelines.
For this purpose, a symbolic representation of the switcher appears in the

menu
• Blue: Cursor position
• Yellow: Selectable switcher functions
• Green: Selected Switcher functions
Note Resource conflicts are possible. In the Define Memo menus of the M/E1..3
EMEM all resources not belonging to that M/E are “released” for default.
The X-Bar object in the menu Define Memo got the sub-entries pgm and pst.
Thus, PGM sources and PST sources can be selected individually. The states
of both are stored but only the activated bus will be recalled.

EMEM Menu
Example:
If PGM is disabled during Recall, the PGM row of the selected M/E is not
affected by the snapshot recall (or timeline).
It is not recommended to disable only one bus (PGM or PST) during Recall,
in case of timelines that are including background transitions.
Figure 485. EMEM Define Delegate


Section 6
Stand-Alone Applications
Stand-Alone Applications are running on desktop personal computers or
notebooks. During installation the Sidepanel software, the Stand-Alone
Application will be installed automatically. In the Windows Start menu the
program group Kayenne XL will be created with icons to start the installed
programs and tools.
Figure 486. Windows Start Menu
Macro Editor
Since the Kayenne XL control panel has a new, powerful command struc-
ture, this Macro Editor supports new features which make macros more
powerful than ever before.
In contrary to a snapshot which "reads" e.g. the current key mode from the
switcher, in macro you had to tell that you want e.g. "linear key mode". The
new Editor allows you to read the current state from the switcher. This
speeds up building and allows you to update existing macros with one
press of a button.
The Macro Editor can also create, modify, view Macros build in the 'Classic'
style, used by Kayak Control Panels and the Sidepanel program.
You can offline create, modify, view macros which or stored in application
on your harddisk or you can connect online to a Kayenne XL control panel.

Section 6 — Stand-Alone Applications
Main Dialog
Figure 487. Stand-Alone Macro Editor - Main Dialog
The dialog is split into two identical sections, Macro Overview A and Macro
Overview B.
Each section offers the same functionality. Having two sections allows you
to compare different macros from the same or different applications and to
copy macros from one to another.
The remaining document describes the functionality for Macro Overview A.

Macro Editor
Main Dialog, Left Part - Offline
Figure 488. Stand-Alone Macro Editor - Main Dialog - Offline
When you select Harddisk in View/Edit Macros from you can enter the path
where you applications are stored. Either type the path or copy it from a
Windows Explorer Address Bar.
All available applications will be shown in the Applications list. If your

application contains several control panels select the desired one. Since the
Kayenne XL control panels support multiple workplaces this selection is
also offered. For most users Workplace 1 is the right selection. Once a Work-
place is selected, all available macros are listed in the Macros list. You can
now create a new macro, rename or delete an exiting one or copy a macro
from Macro Overview B.
To view the contents of a macro just select it in the Macros list.
To view the contents of a macro:

• Select Harddisk in View/Edit Macros from
• Enter the path of your application
• Select an application
• Select a control panel
• Select a workplace
• Select a macro

Main Dialog, Left Part - Online
Figure 489. Stand-Alone Macro Editor - Main Dialog - Online
When you select Kayenne XL Panel in View/Edit Macros from you can enter the
IP address of your Kayenne XL control panel. Then press the connect
button.
Select the workplace you are working on (In most case Workplace 1). You
can now create a new macro, rename or delete an existing one or copy a
macro from Macro Overview B. To view the contents of a macro just select it
in the Macros list.
• To view the contents of a macro:
• Select Kayenne XL Panel in View/Edit Macros from
• Enter the IP address of your Kayenne XL control panel
• Select a workplace
• Select a macro
Note You can run this program on the same PC or the Kayenne XL Menu module
in parallel to the Sidepanel application.

Macro Editor
Main Dialog, Right Part - Commands

The right part of the main dialog shows the contents of the selected macro
- the commands.
Figure 490. Stand-Alone Macro Editor - Main Dialog - Commands
Since the Kayenne XL control panel supports multiple mainframes in par-

allel you can show the command destination by checking the according
box.
Note Only necessary for customers who use multi mainframes.
While recording, a macro collects all commands created by the Kayenne XL

panel and the attached Sidepanel. Since the Sidepanel can also work in
combination with Kayak control panels which only support the 'Classic'
command structure, the commands recorded via the Sidepanel are shown
with the prefix 'Classic'. These commands cannot be automatically updated
with the Update data button" (see below).
In the example above the last two commands will do the same, one build
via the Kayenne XL panel, the later via the Sidepanel

Creating, Modifying, Updating, Deleting Commands

Figure 491. Stand-Alone Macro Editor - Edit Commands
• New commands can be created in 'Classic' style or 'Kayenne XL' style.

• Once a command exists, modifying will be done in the style it was
created or recorded.
• When you are connected to a Kayenne XL control panel you can also
update your macros to the current switcher state. This is only possible
for macros created in 'Kayenne XL' style.
• The creation of 'multiple commands' is only possible when you are con-
nected to a Kayenne XL panel, command style is 'Kayenne XL'.

Macro Editor
Create a New Command 'Classic' Style
Figure 492. Stand-Alone Macro Editor - Create New Classic Style Macro
Users familiar with the XtenDD or KayakSD/HD system will recognize

this way of creating a macro. You make your selection from the left to the
right, first select your Main Group, then the Subgroup, the Function, and at the
end the Action Type and the Parameter(s).
enabled.
• insert at selected command is only enabled when a command line was
selected before.
If you control more than 1 mainframe in parallel you can select another
mainframe as command destination.

Modify an Existing Command 'Classic' Style
Figure 493. Stand-Alone Macro Editor - Modify an Classic Style Macro
Depending on the command you will have several options to change your
Main Group and/or your Subgroup. Changing the Function will result in a
new selection for Action Type and Parameter(s).
• Start from scratch allows you to build a completely different command.

Macro Editor
Create a New Command 'Kayenne XL' Style
Figure 494. Stand-Alone Macro Editor - Create New Kayenne XL Style Macro
For creating a 'Classic' macro you always define your command by a choice
of Main Group, Subgroup, Function, etc. Finding the right command can be
difficult when you do not know which Main Group contains the desired
command.
The 'Kayenne XL' style commands are all build out of segments like you see
above, e.g. BGDA, BGDB, BUS, IDPM, etc.
To find the desired command you can either select a Category, one or more
subgroups or use one or more of the 5 search fields. The matching com-
mands are displayed in the Commands found list. The example above shows
all commands which contain ME1, KEY3, and IDPM.
Search via Category, 1st subgroup, 2nd subgroup, 3rd subgroup

Category makes a coarse pre-selection for the 1st subgroup. When you make
a selection in the 1st subgroup, the 2nd subgroup offers only segments which
are available in combination with the 1st subgroup. In the example above
only commands are listed which contain ME1 and KEY3. With the 3rd sub-

group you could bring down further the number of found commands by
limiting them to only commands which contain e.g. ADDITIVE.
Search via Search Fields

An alternative way to find the desired command is offered via the search
for... fields. button
The moment you start typing in one of the fields the list below offers all seg-
ments matching your entry. You can use one of the found segments to limit
your command search. By using more search for... fields in parallel you can
bring the number of matching commands further down.
In the example above you see that one search for... field contains an "I", the
list below offers all segments starting with "I". The selection of IDPM in this
list, in combination with the selections made via Category, 1st subgroup, and
2nd subgroup limits the matching commands to all commands containing
ME1, KEY3, IDPM. When you are looking e.g. for the command for iDpm
Aspect Ratio you can either walk through the list of found command or use
another search for... field, type "A" or "ASP" to find the ASPECT segment and
select it. Keep in mind that as a result of your search functions the Command
found list can be empty. In this case no single command contains all selected
segments and you have to clear some selections.
When you have selected your desired command you can either enter or
select the according parameter (in the example above 12.5%) or you can
read the current value from the switcher by pressing the update data button.
This function is only available when you are connected to a Kayenne XL
control panel. There are some commands which do not represent a single
parameter state in the switcher like e.g. Recall Emem Register 7 or Reset RGB
correction. For those parameters the update function is disabled.
enabled.
• insert at selected command is only enabled when a command line was
selected before.
If you control more than 1 mainframe in parallel or you want to select a

control panel command you can select another mainframe or the panel as
command destination.
• The Show Raw Commands checkbox allows you to see the commands in
their native segmented structure.
• The Show Increment Commands checkbox offers the incremental in place
of the absolute command if applicable

Macro Editor
Modify an Existing Command 'Kayenne XL' Style
Figure 495. Stand-Alone Macro Editor - Modify an Kayenne XL Macro
In this dialog you can change to any of the offered alternatives and/or
change the parameter(s).

Create New Multiple Commands 'Kayenne XL' Style
Figure 496. Stand-Alone Macro Editor - Create Multiple Commands
Snapshots are used to recall a large group of parameters; macros are used
to recall individual parameters. This was the case until now and it still
makes sense in most situations.
One reason snapshots were preferred above macros for multiple parame-
ters was the fact, that macros had to be built command by command,
including the selection of the parameter. This becomes rather time con-
suming for a larger amount of commands.
This dialog allows you to insert a complete group of commands with only
a few button presses. Just click e.g. the Transi button in the ME2 group and
all command handling the transition module of ME2 are listed. To update
the parameters press the update parameters button. When all parameters are
updated you can insert them via one of the three insert buttons. The insert
at selected button is only enabled when a command line was selected
before.
All actions (insert, update parameter, and remove) are applied to all com-
mands in the list as long as no command is selected. When you select one
or more commands (standard Windows selection mode with Control and
Shift button), only the selected commands are affected.
This dialog is only available when you are connected to a Kayenne XL

control panel.

Macro Editor
Note Although the layout looks quite similar to the Define Memo of the Emem
system, the commands offered in this dialog do not exactly represent the
same parameters you will affect by an according snapshot recall.
CAUTION This dialog offers a convenient way to insert multiple commands in a macro.
It should NOT be used to replace the Emem system. The switcher software is
optimized to handle recalls of snapshots and timeline in a very efficient way.
Macro commands are send from the panel and handled in the mainframe as
if they were send by the operator. For a large amount of commands execution
in the same frame can not be guaranteed.
If the same result is achievable with a snapshot, this is the better choice.
If the granularity of the Emem Define Memo is not fine enough to change
some parameters without touching others multiple macro commands offer a
solution.

Update Parameters of Macro Commands
Figure 497. Stand-Alone Macro Editor - Update Parameters
This function adds a new feature to macros which was until now only
known for snapshots.
The update data function is only available when you are connected to a
Kayenne XL control panel. To update only a single command, first selected
the desired command and then press the update data button. Without a
selection all commands will be updated. To deselect a command just select
the macro again.
"Classic' commands do not support an update. Furthermore some com-

mands cannot be updated, due to the nature of the command, e.g. Start Auto
transition.
The updated parameters are marked with "updated".
Figure 498. Stand-Alone Macro Editor - Updated Command List
All macro edit functions (new, modify, delete, update) are performed in
buffer. The first action will disable parts of the dialog and the Macro section
shows two buttons Save Changes and Discard Changes. When you have fin-
ished your editing, make your choice to continue.

Macro Editor
Figure 499. Stand-Alone Macro Editor - Save/Discard

Image Converter
The Image Converter is started with a browser. The left window shows the
folders displayed as icons and the right window lists the files contained
within the selected folder.
Figure 500. Image Converter
1. Double-click to select and open a folder.
2. Select a file to be converted with a left mouse click. You can select more
than one file by using the right mouse key.
Note When converting, the associated filter is started and one single sequence is
created from the individual files. The picture order in the sequence is deter-
mined by the order of the selected files.

Image Converter
Select Destination Format

Activating the Convert button opens a dialog window for the detail adjust-
ments. The following picture formats can be converted among each other:
AVI Audio Video Interleaved
BMP Windows/OS2 Bitmap
JPG Joint Picture Expert Group
TGA TrueVision Targa Image
TIFF Tagged Image File Format
XTENDD RAM Recorder File
Figure 501. RAM Recorder – Image Converter – Select Target Format
Output File Name

The name of the exit file has to be entered in a dialog box. The file extension
is added automatically depending on destination pixel format. In general,
the entered file name will be enlarged with a three-digit number to gen-
erate different file names if a sequence will be converted to single images.

Converting in AVI Format

If AVI as target format is selected, a Codec dialog window appears. Select
on of the listed Codec and close the dialog with OK.
Note If the dialog is canceled, an empty file will be generated.
Source Pixel Format

Touching the Convert button opens a dialog window for detail adjustments.
The following Source Pixel formats can be adjusted:
Figure 502. RAM Recorder – Image Converter – Source Pixel Format

Image Converter
Destination Pixel Format

Actuating the Convert button opens a dialog window for the detail adjust-
ments. The following destination pixel formats can be adjusted:
Figure 503. RAM Recorder – Image Converter – Destination Pixel Format
If the source and destination pixel format is different, the image is resized
to maintain the aspect ration of the image content.
• If PC as destination pixel format is selected, the first picture to be con-
verted determines the picture format of the destination file.
• If a TV format is selected as destination pixel format is selected, the des-
tination file is coupled with TV format.
Converting Size, Positioning, and Preview

Having selected the conversion parameters, you may have a look at the
format in the Preview window. The red frame shows the outer edge of the
picture (TV format only) to be converted and the white frame shows the
limits of the picture screen after conversion.
The switches Allow enlarge, Allow shrink, Keep aspect and the controls located
below enable adjusting and locating the desired picture section.
If PC is selected as destination pixel format, only the “size” control (<<<

xx% >>>) is active.

Untangle
The Untangle feature can be used for clips. Selecting the function cuts a clip
in single frames.

Glossary
Auto Transition Chroma
A transition having a predefined duration The depth or saturation of color. Chroma,
generally initiated by pressing a control pan- hue, and luminance make up the three char-
el button. acteristics of television color.
Aspect Chroma Key

The ratio of a picture’s horizontal and verti- A video key effect in which one video signal
cal dimensions when correctly displayed is inserted in place of areas of a particular
(4:3, 16:9). color in another video signal. Blue and green
are the chroma key colors most frequently
Background Bus used.
A row of buttons on the M/E used to select
background video signals. Typically labeled Clean Feed
A and B, with A representing the current out- A final output of the switcher that does not
put, and B representing the next output. include downstream key effects or fade to
black. Also see Programmable Clean Feed on
Background Transition page 615.
A transition between the background video
signals selected on the M/E. Clip
A threshold level adjustment to which the
Background Video keying attribute (luminance, chrominance) is
Video that forms a background scene into compared for generating the internal key
which a key may be inserted. control signal. Clip, in conjunction with gain,
sets the switching point between the back-
Backing Color ground and the key fill. Also see Gain on
page 613.
The color in a chroma key scene that will be
replaced with another video signal. Clip High, Clip Low
Bit Rate An alternative to Clip and gain keying, pro-
viding independent control of the points
The number of bits per second passed from where the background video and the key fill
one point to another. video are each fully visible.
Black Complex Wipe Pattern Generator (Wipe1 + 2)
A black video signal generated within the A wipe pattern generator with additional ca-
switcher. pabilities (for example, matrix wipes).
Box Wipe Component Video
A rectangular wipe pattern. For masking, the Video signal that keeps color and luminance
system provides a special box wipe pattern information separate. RGB, Y, R-Y, B-Y, and
generator allowing independent control of Y, Cr, Cb are examples of component video.
the placement of each side of the box.

Glossary
Composite Video Deserializer

An encoded video signal that combines color A device that converts serial digital informa-
information with luminance information. tion to parallel.
NTSC, PAL, and D-2 are examples of com-
posite video Dissolve
See Mix on page 615.
Compositing
Combining two or more video signals to- DPOP (Double Press Open)
gether into one output signal. Pressing a control panel button twice rapidly
to open a related menu or submenu. This
Control Signal does not work if Menu Lock is turned on.
A signal used to perform an alteration or
transition of video signals. For example, con- Effect
trol signals are used for keying, masking, A setup of panel controls specifying the
and wipe transitions. sources involved and any processing applied
to those sources. Effects can be learned
Control Surface (saved) and recalled by the EMEM effects
The set of controls available to a single oper- memory system.
ator. These controls may reside on separate
but related control panels. Effect Transition
Recalling an EMEM effect so that a transition
Cross Fade is automatically performed at the start of the
See Mix on page 615. recall.
Crosspoint Effects Processor

An electronic switch, usually controlled by a The portion of a switcher that performs mix-
button on the panel, that enable video or au- es, wipes and cuts between background
dio to pass when the switch is closed. and/or effects key video signals.
Cut EMEM Effects Memory

An instantaneous switch from one picture to A feature that permits control panel setups to
another. Switching circuitry enable cuts only be stored for later recall.
during the vertical interval of the video sig-
nal to prevent disruption of the picture. Engineering Setups (Installation)
On the Kayak HD system, a collection of set-
VDR (Video Disk Recorder) tings that establishes an essential baseline for
A video recorder and playback device using system operation and integrates the system
hard disk storage in place of video tape. into a facility.
Delegate Ethernet
To assign panel controls to a particular oper- A form of high speed data transport between
ating function. Some panel controls (buttons, devices on a network.
knobs, Positioner) can affect more than one
function. The operator can choose an alterna- Fade To Black
tive function by delegating the panel controls A mix transition to black.
to that function (typically by pressing or
holding down a panel button).

Glossary
Field GPO
One scan of an interlaced video image. In in- General Purpose Interface Output
terlace systems, two fields are required to
make a complete picture (video frame) be- General Purpose Interface (GPO)
cause alternate lines are scanned. An interface that enable limited remote con-
trol of some of a device’s functions.
Fill Video
A video signal which fills a hole cut in back- House Sync
ground video by a key control signal. Sync generated within a facility that is used
as a reference for generating and/or timing
Flip-Flop other signals.
A transition where the sources selected on
the background buses (for example, preset Hue
and program) of an M/E are exchanged at The location of a color on the color spectrum
the end of a transition. The original preset (i.e. red, yellow, green, blue). Chroma, hue,
bus source becomes selected on the program and luminance make up the three character-
bus, and the original program bus source be- istics of television color.
comes selected on the preset bus.
Interlace
FPGA
A system of video scanning where the odd
Field Programmable Gate Array. and even numbered lines of a picture are pre-
sented consecutively as two separate inter-
Frame leaved fields. The two fields required to
One complete scan of a video image. For in- make a complete picture are called a frame.
terlace video, alternate lines are scanned, and
so a frame containing all the picture informa- Jitter
tion consists of two fields. An undesirable variation in the timing of
transitions in a digital signal.
Frame Rate
The number of frames presented per second. Positioner
For interlace systems the frame rate is half A hardware positioner with control of multi-
the field presentation rate. ple axes.
Gain Key
An amplification factor applied to a key con- An effect where a portion of a background
trol signal by a keyer that determines how scene is replaced by a new video. Key cut
much, if any, of the background and key fill and key fill signals are involved, though in
video will be mixed together at the key edge some cases the same signal may be used for
areas. Low gain (1, or unity) generally results both (self key).
in a linear key.
Key Cut
General Purpose Interface (GP)
In key effects, the key cut signal is used to
An interface that enable limited remote con- specify where to cut a hole in the background
trol of some of a device’s functions. that will be filled with the key fill video. The
key cut signal determines the shape of the
GPI key effect.
General Purpose Interface Input

Glossary
Key Fill Looping, Loop-Through

In key effects, the video signal which fills the An input that includes two connectors. One
hole cut in the background video. connector accepts the input signal, and the
other connector is used as an output for con-
Key Invert necting the input signal to another piece of
Reversing the polarity of a key, such that ma- equipment. On Kayenne XL Package , only
terial formerly keyed out will be keyed in, the analog reference input is loop though.
and vice versa.
Luminance
Key Mask The brightness of the picture or area of the
A key mode which enable use of a wipe pat- screen being considered. Chroma, hue, and
tern generator to prevent some undesirable luminance make up the three characteristics
portions of the key cut signal from cutting of television color.
holes in the background video.
Luminance Key
Key Memory A key effect in which the portions of the key
A feature where the last keying and video cut signal that are greater in luminance than
processing settings for a source are retained the clip level cuts the hole in the background
and re-imposed when that source is re-select- scene. Generally used when the key cut and
ed. Default source memory values can be set key fill signals originate from the same
for each source on each bus. source. Luminance key clip and gain is ad-
justable.
Key Priority
Mask
The stacking order of multiple keys. The
keyed signal with the highest priority ap- See Key Mask on page 614.
pears in front of all the others. Keyed signals
appear below higher priority keys and in Matte
front of lower priority keys, in a stack. A key Internally-generated color video which can
priority transition changes the order of the be adjusted for luminance, hue, and chroma.
keys without changing the background out- Matte can be used to fill areas of keys and
put. borders.
Key Frame Matte Fill

A complete definition of an effect at a single Using matte video to fill the hole of a key ef-
point in time. Default keyframe values can fect.
be set for a suite. See Snapshot on page 616.
Matte Generator
Linear Key A video generator that produces matte sig-
A Luminance key with a special parameter nals.
Setting: gain 100%, Clip 50%.
M/E
Look Ahead Preview Abbreviation of Mix/Effects, pertaining to
Video that shows the result of the currently the circuitry and controls involved in com-
setup next transition. positing video signals.

Glossary
Mix Preset Pattern

A transition between two video signals in A key effect in which a wipe pattern that has
which one signal is faded down as the other been preset to a desired size and location is
is faded up. used to cut the key hole. The characteristics
of the pattern are set using pattern controls.
Multiplier
A control circuit in which a control signal is Preview
multiplied with one or more input video sig- A video signal that is viewed before it is out-
nals. The resulting video output level varies put by the switcher. See also Look Ahead Pre-
from full on to full off related to the state of view on page 614.
the control signal.
Program Bus
Object A row of source buttons used to select the
An individual a functional area of a system, source for the current output of the M/E.
typically one of several having similar capa- Also called the A bus.
bilities.
Programmable Clean Feed
Pattern Border A type of clean feed where different keys can
A variable width border that occurs at the be selected for inclusion or exclusion from
edges of a wipe pattern. the clean feed.
Pixel RamRecorder
A picture element. A pixel is a digital sample A device that captures, saves, and outputs a
of the luminance and color values of a pic- still video image or in some cases motion
ture at a single point. video clips. On the Kayak HD system the
RamRecorder option can capture still imag-
Profile es, motion video, and animation for play-
Model name of a Thomson Grass Valley Vid- back. The RamRecorder is also referred to as
eo Disk Recorder. a Still Store.
Point of Use Recall

A location in the system where a resource is To restore a previous panel setup that has
used. A resource is generally used at differ- been learned using EMEM.
ent locations at different times. However,
with some resources it is possible to use the Reclocking
same resource at different locations at the The process of clocking the data with a re-
same time. generated clock to remove jitter.
Preset Bus Resource

A row of source buttons used to select the A capability of the system, typically consist-
source that will be output by the M/E during ing of a set of circuitry.
the next background transition. Also called
the B bus. Register
A place to store an effect.

Glossary
Saturation Stack
The degree of purity of a color. Adding white See Key Priority on page 614
to a color reduces its degree of saturation.
Still Store
Self Key A device that captures, saves, and outputs a
A key effect in which a single video signal still video image. On the Kayak HD system
serves as both the key cut and key fill. the RamRecorder option is a still store with
additional capabilities, including animation.
Serial Digital Video
Passing video data bits in serial form (one bit Store (Learn)
after another), along a single wire. To save a panel setup using EMEM.
Serial Interface Sync

An interface which enable the switcher to be 1) General term for a synchronizing signal or
controlled remotely by a computer editor or signal component. Digital systems generally
other serial controller. Data is passed serially employ an analog external timing reference
between the editor and the switcher at select- signal (such as color black or tri-level sync) to
able baud (transmission) rates. synchronize different pieces of equipment.
Within the digital signal itself, however, syn-
Serializer chronizing information is carried by special
A device that converts parallel digital infor- digital codes inserted at the beginning and
mation to serial. end of each active line.
2) In analog television systems, sync is the
Snapshot portion of the video signal which occurs dur-
An EMEM with only one keyframe. ing blanking and is used to synchronize the
operation of cameras, monitors, and other
Soft Border equipment. Horizontal sync occurs within
A wipe pattern border which is mixed on the the blanking period in each horizontal scan-
edges to give a soft effect. ning line, and vertical sync occurs within the
vertical blanking period. A color black signal
Soft Edge is often used for synchronizing different
pieces of analog equipment.
A pattern edge between two video signals in
which the signals are mixed for a soft effect. Tally
Source A light which lights up to indicate that the
associated button has been selected or to in-
1) An external device providing video. A dicate that the associated input to the switch-
source may provide only one video signal, or er is on-air.
it may provide two signals (key fill and key
cut). Terminate, Termination
2) The video signal(s) from a source, along To complete a circuit by connecting a resis-
with the source definition information asso- tive load to it.
ciated with that source.
Transition
SPOP (Single Press Open) A change from one picture to another. Cut,
Automatically opening a related menu when mix, and wipe are transitions.
a control panel button is pressed.

Glossary
Vertical Interval
The portion of the video signal that occurs
between the end of one field or frame and the
beginning of the next.
Video Fill
A video signal used to fill the hole made by a
key cut signal.
Video Path
The path that video takes through the
switcher.
Wash Matte
A type of matte that contains two elements
rather than a single flat color. For example, a
wash matte can have one color that mixes
gradually across the screen to another color.
Wipe
A transition between two video signals that
occurs in the shape of a selected pattern.
Wipe Pattern Generator

Circuitry that creates patterns that can be
used to create wipe transitions, preset pat-
terns, key masks, and matte washes.

Glossary

Index
A Continuity Control 73
Add Key 188 Control Panel 83
Additional Keying Controls 48 Control panel models 17
Alphanumeric Keypad 262 Control Panel Modules 83
Alternate Buses and Delegation 34 Converge Mode 79
AMP Protocol 316 Converting Size, Positioning, and Preview 492,
Aspect 60, 66 609
Attached Panel 268 Couple Key 188
Audio Follow Video 303 Crossbar Control 302
Auto / Abort 127 Cursor
Auto Recall 126 Control 514
Automatic Chroma Key Adjustment 191, 192 Custom Pages 271
Aux Bus Control 96, 98 Cut / Pause 127
Aux CP Menu 280 Cut 37
Axis Location 61
Axis Lock Buttons 114 D
Definition of Terms 123
B Delegation to Aux Bus Selection 91
Bank Mode Delegation to Define Memo 94
Enable / Disable 124 Delegation to eDPM 94
Bias 69 Delegation to EMEM Selection 93
Bias Control 75 Delegation to Macros 92
Border 193 Delegation to Routers Source Selection 92
Buses and Crosspoints 31 Delete
Button Snapshots 126
Functions, Other 126 Timelines 126
Button and Bus Indication 95 Deleting Register 121
Button Assignment 30 Destination Pixel Format 492, 609
Button Color Definitions 87 Digipots 257
BVW-75 Protocol 316 Digital Effects 59
Digital Picture Manipulator 114, 119
Direct Mode 119, 123, 124, 135
C DISSOLVE 123
Chroma Key 52, 190, 433 Dissolve Functions
Chroma Key Shadow 53 Snapshot or Timeline 126
Clip and Gain 45 DISSOLVE TIME 123
Clip Hi/Lo 46 documentation online 4
Configuration 28 Downstream Keyers 57
Configuration Settings 277 DPM 114, 119
Continuity 69 DSK 57

Index
DSK Option 42 Home > Matt (Color Mattes) Selection

BGD ( Background Color1) 214
E
Editor Page 299 I
eDPM 59, 198 iDPM 59, 198
Effects Send 35 iDPM (eDPM)
EMEM 122 Edit > Crop Menu 203
EMEM Define 588 Edit > Locate Menu 200
EMEM Edit Menu 568 Edit > Skew Menu 204
Enable / Disable Edit > SpFX Special Effects 205
Bank Mode 124 iDPM (eDPM) Edit
Engineering Setups 28 Misc > #Use (Use DPM Crosspoint) 211
External Key Page 322 Misc > Default Menu 207
External VTR Delegation 158 Misc > Lo+ (Load&Lock) 210
Externel DVE Page 294 Misc > Priority Menu 208
Misc > Settings 209
Near > Near Input Crosspoint Selection 212
F
Near/Key > Near/Key Input Crosspoint Se-
Fade to Black 40 lection 213
Fader Calibration 328 Setup Menu 206
Faders 274 Image Converter Menu 606
FAQ database 4 Inhibit Mask 194
FAR Button Operation 94 Input
FGD Fade 192 (Aux - non Page mode) 243
Flare Suppression 53 (Aux - Page Mode ”Page01”,
Flexible Chroma Keyers 58
”Page02”&”Page12”) 247
Flip Flop Background Buses 40 (Aux - RamRecorder Inputs) 249
Force Mask 194 (Aux Safe Title&Center Cross Delegation)
frequently asked questions 4 245
Front and Back 64 (Aux Sage Title & Center Cross Modes) 246
Full Additive Mix 37 (eDPM1) 252
(M/E# Crosspoints) 240
G (M/E# Keyer) 241
Gain High/Low/Unity 46 (M/E# Keys, Aux, Ram, eDPM) 239
Genlock Phase 305, 307 (MeH) 242
GPI Page 289 Input Page 286
GPO Page 292 Input Standard 305
Grass Valley web site 4 Inputs and Sources 30
Install E-Box 279
Install Main Menu 277
H Install Menu 276
Half M/E 148 Install Panel 324
Half ME 42
HD Reference 306
Help Editor 271 J
Help system 269 Joystick and Digipots 185

Index
K Mask Menu 194

Kayenne Features 86 Masking 48
Key 1...6 188 Matt (Color Mattes) Selection
Key Adjustment 45 Bord (Key Border Colors) Key-Wipe 218
Key and Wipe Delegations 184 ColT (Test Signal Generator) 216
Key Invert 48, 189 Fill( Key Fill Colors) Flat 217
Key Memory 31 Trans(Transition Border Colors)Main Wipe1
Key Over 189 219
Key Preview 187 Matte Fill188
Key Priority 41 Matte Fill Key 43
Key Sources 188 ME Delegation Indication 95
Key Types 188 Menu
Key Wipe 114 Image Converter 606
Keyer Control 187 Menu Control 85
Keyer Priority Menu 196 Menu Overview 255, 591
Keyer Store Menu 195 Menu Panel 256
KEYFRAME 123 Menu Structure Overview 265
Keying 43 Mix 37
Keying 43 Mix/Effects Stage 34
Mnemonic Transfer 302
Mouse 263
L Multi Function Control 180
Lin Key 189 Multiple Device Assignment 176
Linear Key 49
Local EMEM 115
Look Ahead Preview 41 N
Lum Key 189 Navigation 261
Luminance Key 51 Navigation Area 257
Near and Far 64
Numerc Key Pad 261
M Numeric Keypad 261
M/E Delegation 183
M/E Main Menu 273
Machine Control 149, 176, 314 O
Machine Delegation Busses 177 ODETICS Protocol 315
Machine Page 313 On Air 95
Machine Selection 155 online documentation 4
Macro 134, 135 Opacity 48
Macro Attachment 174 Options 24
Macro Building 173 Other Documentation 16
Macro Editor 396, 397, 591 Outputs 36
Macro Recording / Editing 173
Macros 101 P
Mainframe Selection 268 Parallel Mode 78
Manual Page 269 Patch Panel Settings 288
Mask Path Control 68
Sources 432

Index
Path Vectors 70 Self Key 51, 188

Paths 68 SF Mode 307
Pattern Key Menu 197 Shaped Video 54
P-Bus Page 319 Shaping Video 44
Personal Settings 29 Shift Level Delegation 90
Perspective 61, 66 Shifted Sources 32
Positioner 113 Signal Routing 30
Positioner Delegation 113 Size 59, 66
Positioner Subpanel 112 Converting 492, 609
Positioning Skew 61, 66
Converting 492, 609 SNAPSHOT 123
Post Transform Space 63 Snapshot 125
Preroll Time 287 Storing 125
Preset Black 40, 109 Soft Knobs 257
Preset Pattern 54 software download from web 4
Preset Pattern Key 189 Source
Preview Pixel Format 491, 608
Converting 492, 609 Source and Target Space 61
Primary Color Suppression 53 Source Definition 30
Source Scalars 33
Source Select Buttons 89
R
Source Selection 88
RAM Recorder 121 Spin 60, 66
Still Store 438 Spin and Rotation 66
RECALL 123 Split Key 54, 94, 188
Recorder Delegation 162 S-Shaped Key Signals 47
Register 119, 120, 123, 125, 134 Standard Features 21
Register Mode 119, 123, 135 Standard Latch Mode 90
Resource Sharing 36 Startup menu 267
Rotate 60 Status menu 273
Rotation 66 STORE 123
Router Control 101 Storing
Router Page 301
Snapshot 125
Row Delegation 90 Strategy for Manual Chroma Key Setup 190
Substitution Table 287
S Supported Control Protocols 26
Save Installation 277 Sure Touch 77
Screen Coordinates 65 Switched Preview 172
SD Reference 306 Switcher Concepts 27
Secondary Color Suppression 53 System Bars 171
Select Destination Format 490, 607 System Configuration 27
Selecting System Overview 17
Half M/E 149 System Timing 307
Selecting a Register
Storing 125
While Recalling 125

Index
T web site FAQ database 4

Tallly Page 282 web site Grass Valley 4
Temporary Machine Delegation 177 web site software download 4
Tension 69 Wipe Pattern 40
Tension Control 71 Wipe Selection
TIMELINE 123 Wipe Source=Main Wipe1, Mix=delega-
Timeline ted&Off 220
Editing 127 Wipe selections
Timing Page 305 Wipe Source= Main Wipe2, misc. Modifiers
Touch Screen 256 221
Touch Screen Menu Panel and PC Menu Control Wipes 39
85 Workplace 325
Trans Dur 126
Transform
Numbering Systems 64
Transformation 59
Transition 37
Transition Control 102
Transition Control Interactions 111
Transition Elements 107
Transition Preview 110
Transition Rate 40, 110
Transition Types 108
Transitions 109
U
UMD Addresses 312
UMD Display 312
UMD Page 310
Uncalibrated /Asynchronous Source 95
Undo 126
Untangle 492, 610
User Definable Presets 274
User Manual 15
Utility Bus 35
V
VDCP Protocol 315
Vector Values 70
VTR Delegation 158
VTR Emulation 317
W
web site documentation 4

Index

Kayenne XL Panel Kayak HD User Manual, Version 7.0.3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kayenne XL Panel Kayak HD User Manual, Version 7.0.3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kayenne XL Panel Kayak HD User Manual, Version 7.0.3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kayenne XL Package

KAYAK HD DIGITAL PRODUCTION SWITCHER

Kapittelweg 10 7140 Baymeadows Way 2300 So. Decker Lake Blvd.

40 Rue de Bray Spinnereistrasse 5 Brunnenweg 9

Including its implementation, meets the requirements of the standard:

This Certificate is valid until: June 14, 2012

KEMA-Registered Quality, Inc. Accredited By:

Copyright © Thomson, Inc. All rights reserved.

Grass Valley Web Site

Online User Documentation — Current versions of product catalogs, brochures,

FAQ Database — Solutions to problems and troubleshooting efforts can be

Software Downloads — Download software updates, drivers, and patches.

4 Kayenne XL Package — User Manual

Section 1 — System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Kayenne XL Package — User Manual 5

6 Kayenne XL Package — User Manual

Section 3 — Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Kayenne XL Package — User Manual 7

Transition Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

8 Kayenne XL Package — User Manual

Kayenne XL Package — User Manual 9

iDPM (eDPM) Edit - Near - Input Crosspoint Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Section 4 — Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Section 5 — Menu Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

10 Kayenne XL Package — User Manual

Selection of an Attached Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Kayenne XL Package — User Manual 11

12 Kayenne XL Package — User Manual

Media Player Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Kayenne XL Package — User Manual 13

Copy Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

Section 6 — Stand-Alone Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

14 Kayenne XL Package — User Manual

Standard Documentation Set

The User Manual contains background information about the Kayenne XL

The Installation and Service Manual contains information about installing,

Kayenne XL Package — User Manual 15

16 Kayenne XL Package — User Manual

Kayenne XL Control Panel Models

Kayenne XL Package — User Manual 17

18 Kayenne XL Package — User Manual

Kayenne XL Package — User Manual 19

20 Kayenne XL Package — User Manual

Kayak HD Mainframe Standard Features

Kayenne XL Package — User Manual 21

22 Kayenne XL Package — User Manual

• Freeze frame buffer on every full-function keyer

Kayenne XL Package — User Manual 23

24 Kayenne XL Package — User Manual

HD 1-M/E or 1.5-M/E system if it does not also have an I/O Expander

Note To use the RamRecorder, a new 6910000xx or 7710060xx Controller Board

Table 1. HD RamRecorder Storage Sizes

Kayenne XL Package — User Manual 25

Supported Control Protocols

26 Kayenne XL Package — User Manual

Several innovative concepts are employed in the Kayenne XL Package to

Kayenne XL Package Configuration Overview

Kayenne XL Package configuration information is divided into three areas:

Kayenne XL Package — User Manual 27

Installation (Engineering Setups)